Home

Structured Data Environment (SDE)

1. gt lt Description For use in macros EXTRACT VALUE obtains the values of each field belonging to the default record type Values are obtained for each displayed field column in the order in which they appear in the display Therefore the SELECT command will influence the values returned by EXTRACT VALUE EXTRACT Rexx variables lvalue o Number of currently selected fields belonging to the default record type value i sd The character representation of the ith field value in the display See Also EXTRACT FIELD EXTRACT FOCUS EXTRACT FVALUE VIEW SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax A WE View view_parms TT gt lt 3 SET i gt gt Query VLEW ee gt lt gt gt EXTract View gt lt Description This option controls which records or record segments are in view not suppressed based on their assigned record types The SET VIEW option is equivalent to the VIEW command SET VIEW values take effect at the View level SET Value view_parms Specifies parameters as supported by the VIEW command QUERY Response The string VIEW followed by the record type names of each non suppressed record in the file EXTRACT Rexx variables kenn Number of non suppressed record type names view i ihe name of the ith non suppressed record type entry 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Stru
2. gt lt Description This option controls the record type to be used as the default record type if SELCOPY i SDE is unable to determine the default record type from the focus line The initial value of DRECTYPE is set when the SDE window is opened via an EDIT or BROWSE command In addition to the SET DRECTYPE command DRECTYPE may be dynamically set following a VIEW WHERE MORE or LESS command or any command that requires a record type See section Default Record Type for further information SET DRECTYPE takes effect at the View level SET Value record_type The record type of any RTO defined within the current structure definition object SDO QUERY Response The current default record type followed by the record type that is the current setting of the DRECTYPE option EXTRACT Rexx variables larectype 1 sd Thee current default record type larectype 2_ sd The record type that is the current setting of the DRECTYPE option 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 199 SET QUERY EXTRACT DRECTYPE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option DSN SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option DSN has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET DSN in CBLe Text Edit documentation DSORG SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option DSORG has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a
3. EE gt lt parm_string Description Force SDE to execute the REXX macro specified by macro_name as opposed to an SDE command of the same name By default SDE first checks a user supplied token for a recognised SDE command If the token is not recognised as a command an attempt is made to find a macro with the same name Therefore when invoking a macro the command verb MACRO may not be necessary Any text specified following the macroname is passed to the macro as a parameter string The specified macro is read into memory from disk executed and removed from memory on completion If the macro cannot be located an error message is issued and the MACRO command fails Parameters macro_name Name of the macro to be executed If macro_name is a full fileid containing file name path etc then the macro is loaded from the specified location If only a file name is specified each directory in the macro path is searched for a matching macro name parm_string Text to be passed to the macro as a parameter string Examples macro cbl dist cbli site cble xarc XXFLD 22 33 Execute the macro XARC in library CBL DIST CBLI SITE CBLE with parameters XXFLD 22 33 macro select Execute the user macro SELECT from a library in the macro path not the SDE command SELECT FMT Description Display records or record segments in single record formatted view If the record type RTO assigned
4. gt lt Description Flip records that are of the default record type so that visible data records become EXCLUDED and EXCLUDED records are made visible Parameters FLIP has no parameters See Also LESS MORE MORE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 130 Command Line Primary Commands FORMAT FORMAT Syntax gt gt FORmat Character SS SS SAA SS O AAA ee eee gt lt e Hex ee d las single s Sagi EE he Tabi SHS A Description Sets the display format for the current SDE BROWSE or EDIT window See also SDE command ZOOM to display unformatted data FORMAT CHARACTER or FORMAT HEX in single record display Parameters Character Multi record view with all records or record segments mapped as a single character field with field name UnMapped or UnMappedSeg No data conversion is performed Hex Same as CHARACTER with the addition that the data is also displayed in Hex below the character display Note that the Hex display occupies an additional 2 lines of data Single Sngl Single record format with data types formatted according to the record structure Each field occupies a separate line Vertical scrolling transfers focus between fields Horizontal scrolling transfers focus between records By default PF2 is assigned to distributed CBLe edit macro SDEZOOMW which opens a new view of the record data and executes FORMAT SINGLE to display the record
5. Displaying Records of Specific Record Type s Of the typed records selected for display by any FROM FOR and or FILTER options those not assigned specific record type s may be temporarily suppressed from the display using the VIEW operation By default all records are displayed whether or not they are typed The VIEW operation may be invoked as follows 1 On intial load using the VIEW parameter of the EDIT or BROWSE primary commands 2 Executing VIEW primary command 3 Executing the prefix line command V V or V against a record of the required record type 4 By positioning the cursor an a record or shadow line of the required record type and selecting one of the following options from the SDE Edit Browse Utility Menu assigned to lt F16 gt 1 VIEW record_type records only assigned to lt PF1 gt 2 Add Remove record_type records to from current VIEW assigned to lt PF2 gt 4 Select from list of available record types assigned to lt F16 gt VIEW nominates one or more record types which identify those typed records to be made visible in the display Alternatively records types may be added or suppressed from the existing display of visible records using VIEW plus or VIEW minus respectively e g To display only records assigned record type REC CUST or REC ORDER execute the following from the SDE window view command line VIEW REC CUST REC ORDER To then add suppressed recor
6. INVALID H NEXT CHARs ee es ee EEN gt ALL a Y PREfix Sl a EX A gt FIRST E 3 SUFfix a dE NX E LAST oP j WORD _ 2 x d PREV de ALL ZFIRST ZLAST B bee La SE 5 FS ei to E E le Hamel Habs sees A Ge pos2 pl name2 ER pesosqonss os persas bk Seege sek v field_col tt e field_coll field_col2 mata DATA TEXT Description Search DB2 table rows or data records in the current edit or browse view for the specified character string or numeric value string1 and replace it with string2 Only DB2 table rows records or record segments assigned the default record type visible and EXCLUDED records are included in the search Records groups that are of a different record type or are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED are excluded from the search Note that DB2 table rows may be considered to be formatted records that are all assigend the default record type If the specified occurrence all first last next or previous of the search string or numeric value string1 is found within a record then 1 If the record is EXCLUDED it is made visible 2 The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the string or numeric field 3 If necessary scrolling occurs to display the found data 4 If the replace string string2 satisfies the data type precision a
7. Single 25 tos Sng F Table 2 22 gt gt Query t ee Sa aso a aS aaa a Se Se See eS gt lt gt gt EXTract FORmat gt lt Description This option controls the display format for the current SDE BROWSE or EDIT window SET FORMAT is equivalent to the FORMAT command SET FORMAT takes effect at the View level SET Value Character Multi record view with all records or record segments mapped as a single character field with field name UnMapped or UnMappedSeg No data conversion is performed Hex Same as CHARACTER with the addition that the data is also displayed in Hex below the character display Note that the Hex display occupies an additional 2 lines of data Single Sngl Single record format with data types formatted according to the record structure Each field occupies a separate line Vertical scrolling transfers focus between fields Horizontal scrolling transfers focus between records 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 203 SET QUERY EXTRACT FORMAT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option By default PF2 is assigned to distributed CBLe edit macro SDEZOOMW which opens a new view of the record data and executes FORMAT SINGLE to display the record occupying the focus line in single format Table Multi record table format Default with data types formatted according to the record structure Ea
8. RECord gt IN struct_name STRUCTure Description GRPX is equivalent to SET GROUPASCHARACTER OFF and so redisplays the specified group structure field which has been displayed as a fixed length character field GRPC as a formatted group of its component fields Parameters field_col The individual column identifying the group field to which the option will apply This may be the group field itself or a field contained within The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID Default is the focus column FOR RECORD record_type Identifies the record type mapping in which the specified field_col is defined Default is the default record type IN STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the name of the SDO structure in which the specified record_type is defined Required only if a distinction is to be made between multiple data sets displayed in SDE views each using different SDO structure definitions but where the specified record_type is defined in more than one of the structures Default is the SDO structure used to map records in the current SDE view See Also GRPC ARRC ARRX HELP Description SDE CLI command HELP performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command HELP See HELP in CBLe Text Edit documentation HEX Syntax gt gt HEX ON 222222202 2022000012900 gt lt QEP saat Description Sets the hexadecimal disp
9. n_lines 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE DOWN 09 Command Line Primary Commands DOWN Description Scroll the view of the data within the SDE window downwards towards the bottom of the file data Where no parameter is specified the scroll amount will be the value specified in the Scroll gt field in the top right corner of the window display Note that the first data record in any multi record view will always be preceded by its complete group of column header lines For single record views the standard headers are always visible at the top of the display area and are not included as part of the scrollable text Each non header line within a single record view is identified as being a field data line Where the cursor is positioned at an offset within a column header line of a multi record view the cursor is deemed to be located at the same offset within the data record that immediately follows the group of header lines Therefore DOWN CURSOR will operate successfully when the cursor is positioned within a header line UP and DOWN scroll commands will cause the window display area to be adjusted by a number of lines determined by the number of multi record view data records and shadow lines or single record view field data lines Other lines in the display area i e Header lines and blank filler lines that precede a group of header lines or follow the End of Data record are not incl
10. gt lt e SET i gt gt Query AUXdsnprefix O O O O gt lt gt gt EXTract AUXdsnprefix gt lt Description This option controls the default data set name HLQ prefix used to allocate the auxiliary data set when the Auxiliary Edit technique is required The initial value of AUXDSNPREFIX is set by default to USER CBLI SDEAUX SET AUXDSNPREFIX takes effect at the Global level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value dsn_prefix Valid data set name high level qualifiers conforming to your system s standards to be used as the DSN prefix for the generated auxiliary data set Qualifiers of the format Dyyyyddd Thhmmssx representing the current local date and time are appended to dsn_prefix to complete the auxiliary data set name If dsn_prefix exceeds 26 characters then the DSN is truncated QUERY Response The auxiliary DSN prefix that is the current setting of the AUXDSNPREFIX option 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 191 SET QUERY EXTRACT AUXDSNPREFIX SET QUERY EXTRACT Option EXTRACT Rexx variables auxdsnprefix 0 lauxasnprefix The auxiliary DSN prefix that is the current setting of the AUXDSNPREFIX option BOUNDS SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt 4 BOUNds doo gt lt SET BNDS left_col right_col gt g
11. SOL Query Opte 1 nn ee gt USING 0 2 55 struct_name at he STRUCTure ze FORMat TABle EE EE gt L FORMat SINGle a Se FMT ee SNGL a Pes Steeg Pes poss SesseSSeee Sees Ee p ses gt da FROM 2 gt 3 0 a a FOR POPOV 2 ll Y ROW a E ROWS gt SQL Query Opts ee fap A SR A O PA Bde GPa RRS gt SELect select clause WHERE where clause P SS A gt ORDER e p p orderby clause I BY SORT Description Browse a structured data set or HFS file or browse a DB2 results table within SDE If BROWSE is used the displayed data cannot be altered in any way An SDE edit display window is opened and focus is passed to the new window Depending on the value on the FORMAT parameter the SDE display is either a multi record window view or a single record window view for the first record selected Structured Data Browse Unless FILTER is used SDE browse will not attempt to load all records of the file into storage thus allowing quick display of records even in very large data sets Records are loaded and dropped from storage as required ensuring that available storage is never exceeded Note that for both SDE EDIT and BROWSE FILTER attempts to load all records that match the filter criteria If the Structure Definition Object SDO specified by the USING STRUCTURE parameter is not already in
12. Default Record Tupe 1f no LEVY 01 entry Figure 13 SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel FILTER Changing the Record Display The user can tailor the appearance of the SDE window view and the records displayed within An SDE window view is an MDI child window and can be resized and positioned using standard window manipulation as documented in the SELCOPY i Reference and User Guide General manipulation of the SDE window contents is discussed in the following e Displaying Records of Specific Record Type s e Display Unformatted Record Data e Displaying a Record in Single Record View e Displaying Hexadecimal Representation of Record Data e Excluding Records from the Display e Displaying Selected Columns e Displaying the Record Headers The record data may be displayed as Typed and or Formatted in Single or Multi record view and or with Hexadecimal or Hexadecimal dump display set on The many methods by which data may be displayed in an SDE view is summarised by the following table 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 17 Getting Started with SDE Changing the Record Display Record Yes Yes mo N N A A No no Ne vr No ves No Je Yes JN A A N N Command Combination VEMT EX OFF VEMT HEX ON HEX OFF HEX ON FORMA FORMA FORMAT FORMA HAR HEX OFF HAR M M P P P P Yes HEX ON EMT HEX ON EXDUMP M M
13. ERror EXcluded Find HIDE Label Description Reset individual flags set on for records or record segments in the current SDE BROWSE or EDIT view Parameters ALL Equivalent to RESET COMMAND DUPLICATES EXCLUDED FIND LABEL CHANGE ERROR CHANGE Remove CHG gt flags from the prefix area COMMAND Remove any pending prefix area commands DUPLICATES Reset the DUPE gt and DUPF gt line flags introduced with support for KSDS data set editing These flags are set when an attempt is made to save changes to the data and cause the save operation to fail DUPE gt indicates that a duplicate key exists between 2 or more new or changed records within the edit session DUPF gt indicates that a duplicate key exists between a new or changed record in the edit session and an existing file record ERROR Remove ERR gt and ERRV gt line flags from the prefix area ERRV gt line flag indicates that the expanded record has a variable length or variable array size value error EXCLUDED X Restore make visible any data records belonging to the default record type that have been previously excluded from view FIND Remove all highlighting of search strings and numerical fields that have been found by the FIND command HIDE Redisplay all shadow lines that have beed removed from the display by the HIDE command RESET HIDE is equivalent to SET SHADOW ON ALL LAB
14. minus oot deat plus i gt 4 SCAle ON Kee Sess SeS gt lt SET OFF el peaa c2 gt gt Query A O E gt lt gt gt EXTr ct SCA1e 2 2 2 gt lt Description This option controls the display of the scale lt 1 occupying a row in the field column headings for SD edit browse The SCALE option operates at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON Scale display is set ON OFF Scale display is set OFF cl The format character used for intervals of 1 byte Default is the minus sign e g SET SCALE ON results in lt 1 c2 The format character used for intervals of 5 bytes Default is the plus sign e g SET SCALE ON results in lt 1 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 226 SET QUERY EXTRACT SCALE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option QUERY Response The current setting of the SCALE option ON or OFF followed by c1 and c2 EXTRACT Rexx variables lscale 1_ The current setting of the SCALE option ON or OFF lscale 2 The current setting of the SCALE option c1 scare 3 The current setting of the SCALE option c2 SESSION QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query SESSION SS SsSss5 See ehbe Se A aS SS Sa eas asses gt lt gt gt EXT
15. FLOATBin de E O ES FLOATDec Se Ee JEE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 94 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE gt BEE SSeS eas A SS Sasa FS D2 DYVCes 11 SSS SaaS Sa ARA SA HEXadegimal sao a ee PA E aby Ges AA ASS SS aa INTeger REEL EE CURL DYESS eee See eee PCHAR 4 t pill picture string PFIXED 4 A pill picture tE A 2 PFLOAT 4 t pliprctureustring i 25 2 25 Ho gt gt ER v STRUCTure Field Definition t Binary Decimal Binary Stek Hfsdir Ho gt gt p SPSS SAR v UNION Field Definition F VARCHAR EE p max_Dyt st H eege a A See Geen XVARCHAR a max_bytes Jen field e ZONEd EE Gs precisiont fo Y SceasaRsarcssasaa i scale oy Description Create a Structure Definition Object SDO to be used within SDE and if TE
16. e Page numbers are in the order 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 DOWNTHENACROSS is valid only if all visible records in the SDE view are of the same mapped record type It specifies that by scrolling downwards the leftmost display of all data lines are to be printed first before returning to the first view of the printed data scrolling across right one page and once again printing all views scrolling downwards This is repeated until all data in the longest line has been printed i e Page numbers are in the order 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 BROWSE EDIT NOVIEW Supported for interactive execution of PRINT to a non SYSOUT data set only these parameters determine whether or not NOVIEW the output print file is displayed in a window view following PRINT processing and if so whether the file is opened for BROWSE or EDIT Default is BROWSE OUTDSN fileid OUTDSN identifies the location of the printed output fileid may be a DDname a sequential or VSAM data set name PDS PDSE library DSN and member name or an HFS fileid By default fileid is DDname SDEPRINT which is the standard SDEAMAIN output destination which must already be allocated SYSOUT outputclass Applicable only if OUTDSN is a DDname which is not already allocated In this case the specified DDname will be dynamically allocated to a system output SYSOUT data set If PRINT is run interactively without parameter OUT
17. qr srr ss eaan gt lt UPPER or BIFUPPER returns the string with all lower case alpha characters upper cased and all other characters unchanged Note that the data type of string must be character otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field reference 2 contains character data c Mark Williams UPPER hello UPPER 2 HELLO MARK WILLIAMS VALUEERROR gt gt VALUEERROR gt lt VALUEERROR or BIFVALUEERROR has no arguments lt returns 1 if the formatted focus record segment or DB2 table is flagged as including at least one field value which while valid for the field s data type is outside the range of valid values defined for the field ERRV gt Otherwise 0 is returned The VALUEERROR flag may be set on when any of the following conditions are true 1 A field used to define the length of a variable length field has a value greater than the maximum length defined for the variable length field 2 A field used to define the size of a variable array is outside the range of values specified for the array size 3 An enum field contains a value not listed as a defined enum value Because VALUEERROR has no arguments it may be expressed simply as VALUEERROR 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 61 SDE Concepts VALUEERROR WORD gt gt WORD string word oee E gt lt
18. If start is greater than the length of the primary segment then a blank character string is returned If length is greater than the length of the primary segment the returned character string will include data from the start of the segment that follows the primary segment 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 52 SDE Concepts BASPOS If not specified length defaults to be the length of the primary segment from position start to the end of the primary segment Note that the data type of the primary segment is character and start and length must be positive integer values otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following the primary segment contains a 2 character country code c UK at position 15 BASPOS 15 2 UK CHANGED gt gt CHANGED gt lt CHANGED or BIFCHANGED has no arguments It returns 1 if the focus record segment or DB2 table row has been changed in the current edit session and 0 otherwise Because CHANGED has no arguments it may be expressed simply as CHANGED CHANGEERROR gt gt CHANGEERROR gt lt CHANGEERROR or BIFCHANGEERROR has no arguments It returns 1 if a CHANGE command error ERR gt has been flagged on the focus record segment or DB2 table row in the current edit session and 0 otherwise Because CHANGEERROR
19. Record type AM Fixed S700 Offset 0 Data elements 95 n d gt 00000001 Flags f Length S700 F2FOFOF4 40404040 40E2E4D7 bb oo bh oo Springwell Lane DONC HhODDHHAADL SFoooo0o Smbmbhhh uth DN SCeoeeeeceeceoecececcococo 0 TAMVOODDVOVTNMSWNEFO 3 N Ocoococococcocoocoocoo 7m bo Dw a OOOrFMONONCOOo e a a 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 a 0 0000000000000000 BASDWSMSODDDS ELS AADULSASSAA BB BOO 04 04 04 04 Be 04 3C 04 EE TE 04 04 04 HOSconNNonoyoooo SSCOrRWOMFOOD Pbbbhhoobhown Dcoooeoebooumumn MbEELOBLEOOT Moooonmoo wn o R 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 a a 0 MEEREDDACOORERA A ROO Figure 29 SDE Hexadecimal Dump Format SDE Data Types Structured records may be mapped by a record type object RTO whereby fields may be interpreted as being of any of the the following supported field types Bit Flags A Binary field of length specified in number of bits where each bit is interpreted as a flag switch which is either ON 1 or OFF 0 Fields of this data type have a data type record header of BT ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bits Binary Data Fixed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 37 SDE Concepts SDE Data Types A DB2 Binary data field built in data type BINARY of fixed length whose contents are interpreted as printable ASCII or
20. SET QUERY EXTRACT FOCUS Syntax FHS y Ss v gt gt SELect ALL EE gt posa Ms o Field Col Hold a pa papa eR es Kleeder gt lt I FROM record_type IN struct_name Description For a particular record type specify the names of the fields to be displayed and also the order in which they are to be displayed within the current window view The selected field names must belong to the specified record type If record_type is not specified then the default record type is assumed If struct_name is not specified then the SELECT command operates on the data in the SDE current window SELECT may be preceeded by modal primary command PERMANENT or TEMPORARY default to determine whether the columns selected for display is saved in the the SELCOPY structure SDO If so subsequent display of data using the same structure will initially display the saved selection of columns SELECT operates at the SDE window view level and so will not apply to additional views of the same SDE edited record data Parameters field_col Any field reference number or name defined for this record type If field_col refers to a struct then all elements of that structure are considered to be selected Hold Indicates that this field and any others preceding it is to be held visible when scrolling occurs ALL Shorthand to define all fields in their default order
21. LENGTH NOLENGTH Include or suppress display of the record length column This option is equivalent to the SDE command RECLEN ON OFF 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 221 SET QUERY EXTRACT RECINFO SET QUERY EXTRACT Option The record length column contains a 5 byte decimal value and has header Length For non DB2 table edit the contents of this column may be overtyped to alter the length of a record if an appropriate SDE edit type is in use and the records are of variable length If the length of a record is increased then pad characters are appended to the record The pad character used is that defined by the current value for PAD Reducing a record s length will truncate record data If a structure has been applied to the edited records then the record type RTO associated with the updated record is re evaluated and the contents of the SDE edit view updated accordingly ID NOID Applicable to non DB2 table edit only ID or NOID respectively includes or suppresses display of the record identification column For non VSAM data sets the record identification is by Relative Volume Track and Physical Record number TTR followed by an offset within the physical record The columns are displayed as decimal or hexadecimal values with headers Vol if multi volume TTR and Offset If the data set is single volume the Vol header is unnecessary and so omitted For DB2 table edit the ID column is not appl
22. LIst SDO A aE gt lt library_mask Description Use the LIST SDO command to display the Structure Definition Members list window containing details of each SDE structure SDO library member selected by the nominated PDS PDSE library and member masks Parameters library_mask Specifies a PDS PDSE library DSN mask and optionally one or more member name masks If no member mask is specified all members in selected libraries will be listed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 142 Command Line Primary Commands LIST SDO A library DSN mask may contain the following wild card characters KR A single asterisk represents a DSN qualifier or zero or more characters within a DSN qualifier e g DEV SDO DEV C SDO SR Double asterisk represents zero or more qualifiers within a DSN Double asterisk must be preceded or followed by either a dot period or a blank It cannot precede or follow an alphanumeric character e g DEV SDO DEV SDO A single percent sign represents exactly one character other than dot period within a DSN qualifier e g DEV C SDO One or more member masks may be specified between a single pair of parentheses Multiple PDS PDSE member masks must be separated by a commma and or one or more intervening blanks A member mask may contain the following wild card characters x A single asterisk represents an entire member n
23. gt gt RECORD gt lt relative_record RECORD or BIFRECORD returns a character string which is the unformatted contents of the record identified by relative_record a record number relative to the focus record If not specified relative _record defaults to be O zero identifying the focus record A negative relative _record value identifies a record occurring before the focus record a positive value identifies a record occurring after the focus record If the specified record does not exist the null string is returned Note that relative _record must be zero positive or negative integer value otherwise ZZSD386E is returned If RECORD is specified with no arguments it may be expressed simply as RECORD Examples RECORD Contents of the focus record RECORD RECORD 2 1 Contents of the record immediately before the focus record Contents of the 2nd record following the focus record RIGHT gt gt RIGHT string length gt PSN TESTS ASA gt lt RIGHT or BIFRIGHT returns a character string equal to the right most length characters of string If length is greater than the length of string the returned character string is padded on the left with the pad character If not specified pad defaults to be character blank Note that the data type of string1 must be character length must be a positi
24. has no arguments it may be expressed simply as CHANGEERROR CHANGEOK gt gt CHANGEOK gt lt CHANGEOK or BIFCHANGEOK has no arguments lt returns 1 if a CHANGE command executed successfully CHG gt on the focus record segment or DB2 table row in the current edit session and 0 otherwise Because CHANGEOK has no arguments it may be expressed simply as CHANGEOK DATATYPEERROR gt gt DATATYPEERROR gt lt DATATYPEERROR or BIFDATATYPEERROR has no arguments It returns 1 if the focus record or segment is assigned a non default record type and one or more of its fields contains data invalid for the field s data type e g invalid packed decimal data in a DECIMAL field and 0 otherwise Because DATATYPEERROR has no arguments it may be expressed simply as DATATYPEERROR 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 53 SDE Concepts DATATYPEERROR DUPLICATEKEY gt gt DUPLICATEKEY gt lt DUPLICATEKEY or BIFDUPLICATEKEY has no arguments It applies to KSDS edit mode only and returns 1 when either of the following is true otherwise 0 is returned 1 Following a SAVE operation the focus record was flagged as having a duplicate key with another record which has been changed or inserted in the
25. 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 NbLWOWWNFOSCOCOo Gmumnpkoooumnoo OoO JOkOoODoOO Joo un ao Rojo Aen ooe 20 00 10 00 10 10 PR UO o ko TMPPRROLOOeEIM LU 5 Figure 44 Record Info Hexadecimal for VSAM Data Set DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL Applicable to non DB2 Table edit only displays ID information as a decimal or hexadecimal value For non VSAM data sets the decimal display of Vol TTR and Offset for the record occupies 4 columns in the following order 1 Relative Volume number Displayed for multi volume data sets only 2 Track number 3 Physical record block number on the track 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 222 SET QUERY EXTRACT RECTYPES QUERY EXTRACT Option 4 Offset from the start of the physical record The hexadecimal display of Vol TTR and Offset for the record is represented as 3 character fields of length 2 6 and 8 bytes respectively which represent a 1 byte relative volume number 3 byte TTR and 4 byte offset hexadecimal value For VSAM data sets the decimal display of Relative Byte Address RBA for the record is a single column containing a decimal value The hexadecimal display of RBA is 16 bytes of character data representing a single 8 byte hexadecimal value SQLCODE NOSQLCODE Applicable to DB2 table edit only SQLCODE or NOSQLCODE respectively includes or suppresses display of the SQL code column Th
26. 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 103 Command Line Primary Commands CURSOR CURSOR Syntax gt gt CURsor HOME PSS SSS SSS SS Sa E gt lt CMdline Description Position the cursor within the current SDE window view The CURSOR command is most often used in macros Note The CURSOR command does not alter the window view itself i e the current line and column remains unchanged Parameters HOME If the cursor is on the command line the cursor is positioned at the line and column at which it was positioned when it was last in the display area If this line is no longer visible within the current SDE window view the cursor is positioned in column 1 of the current line If the cursor is in the file area the cursor is positioned at column 1 of the command line CMDLINE The cursor is positioned at column 1 of the command line Syntax 1 ZCSR ZLAST l gt gt DELete KE pS O doo gt lt 1 l n lines EX namei name2 ALL NX X Description Delete visible data records not excluded and or EXCLUDED groups of records Deletion of records is not allowed for Update in place editing unless the data set is an RRDS or VRDS For these types of files deleted records become empty slots A group of EXCLUDED records corresponds to a single line f
27. An integer value identifying the left bound column Record data to the left of this column will no be included within the scope of shift and string search operations Alternatively asterisk may be specified to represent the current left bound value right_col An integer value identifying the right bound column Record data to the right of this column will no be included within the scope of shift and string search operations Alternatively asterisk may be specified to represent the current right bound value If left_colis specified right_colis mandatory QUERY Response The current left and right bound values for the BOUNDS option EXTRACT Rexx variables bounds 0 bnds 0 bounds 1 bnds 1 The current left bound column number bounds 2 bnds 2 The current right bound column number 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 192 SET QUERY EXTRACT BOUNDS SET QUERY EXTRACT Option CAPS SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt 4 CAPs ON gt lt a SET Se OFF gt gt Query CAPS Se a See Se eS gt lt gt gt EXTract CAPs aaa gt lt Description This option controls whether upper casing of alpha characters will occur for all data within fields that are changed If record or record segment data is unformatted record type UnMapped or UnMappedSeg respectively then all alpha characters in
28. FILTER filter_fileid Filter Clause FILTER specifies additional record filtering criteria to further reduce the display of records for browse All record filters are applied only to records that have been selected using the FROM and or FOR parameters otherwise it applies to all records in the structured data file Enough available storage must exist to load all records selected by the filter otherwise a storage error occurs and the browse is terminated FILTER parameters are specified via a filter clause which may be supplied as part of the BROWSE command or referenced via filter_fileid a separate sequential data set PDS PDSE member or HFS file filter_fileid must contain the keyword FILTER followed by a valid filter clause The filter is applied only once during initial load of the data A record will not be excluded from the display of browsed records if its record type or data is changed in a way that no longer satisfies the filter criteria Filter Clause A filter clause must be specified in parentheses and may contain comment data enclosed by and If filter clause is specified via filter_fileid then comment data may also occur before and after the filter clause The following options are supported by the filter clause INCLUDE record_type Include only records that are assigned the specified record type record_type by SDE browse This parameter may be specified repeatedly to include a number of record types or to perfor
29. Must be supplied as the last parameter asterisk Shorthand to define all fields other than those explicitly defined already i e the rest in their default order Must be supplied as the last parameter FROM record_type Defines the record type to which the selection applies If record_type is not specified then the default record type is used IN struct_name Defines the name of the structure definition object SDO to which the selection applies The SDE window containing data mapped by this SDO will be the target window for this SELECT command Default is the SDE current window Examples select from Employees EmpNumber Dept LastName FirstName select EmpNumber Dept LastName FirstName H 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 172 Command Line Primary Commands SELECT SET Description See SET QUERY EXTRACT Options SHIFT Syntax gt gt SHIft Left n_bytes be gt S SE we BOUNds left_col right_col Ee i BNDs Seal 1 ZCSR ZLAST Gees A eee ee ee E n lines al e EX a de namel E lo name2 SS ds ALL E NX K E Description Supported for unformatted record view only SHIFT moves record data within the left and right bounds columns left or right without altering relative spacing See SDE BOUNDS option Record data which is shifted left beyond the left bounds column or right beyond the right bounds column gets truncated Shift left and shi
30. Primary_1 Secondary_1 Secondary_2 Secondary_2 a SE SO RE RE Record 3 a pos fa O O O O i Primary_2 Secondary_1 Secondary_4 A aa pa Se en pS Se ee ee ee ee ee eee Record 4 222222222 fo a fo OS O Primary_1 Secondary_1 Secondary_2 Secondary_3 pS dE A O aa SSS SS The record data must contain ID fields that identify which segment mapping is to be used to format individual segments of the record ID fields that identify a primary segment mapping must exist within the primary segment data ID fields that identify a secondary segment mapping may exist within the secondary segment data within the data of any previously mapped segment belonging to the same record or specifically within the primary segment data 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 44 SDE Concepts Structure Definition and Record Type Assignment Structure Definition and Record Type Assignment A SELCOPY i SDE structure may be created using the CREATE STRUCTURE command or Create Structure SDO Menu panels 9 to format segmented records so that a record type RTO mapping definition exists for each record segment in the file Each RTO is defined as being either a primary PRI or secondary SEC segment map or the default primary segment map DEF Except for the default segment RTO which must not be defined with segment identification criteria all primary and secondary segment RTOs must be defined with USE W
31. RTO are found in the structure definition object SDO referenced by CBL CBLI SDO PRODL 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 80 Command Line Primary Commands CANCEL lt sd browse db2 DB9G CBL APIFUNC where FUNCMOD REF 0 Browse filtered rows of DB2 table CBL APIFUNC in subsystem DB9G See Also EDIT CREATE STRUCTURE CANCEL Syntax gt gt CANCEL erer gt lt Description Close all SDE window views for data displayed in the current SDE view If unsaved changes exist the user will be prompted to save the changes discard the changes or to terminate the CANCEL operation and return focus to the SDE edit view The default action in this list being to discard the cahanges If anon temporary structure SDO is used to map the record data and changes have been made to that structure during the course of the edit session e g USE WHEN then the user will be prompted to save the changed structure to its structured data file SDF See command SAVESTRUCTURE Parameters CANCEL has no parameters See Also END FILE QQUIT CBLI Description SDE CLI command CBLI performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command CBLI See CBLI in CBLe Text Edit documentation 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 81 Command Line Primary Commands CBLI CHANGE Syntax EQ gt gt Change ae A Sn stringi 4 Se gt gt Leo a VALID
32. SET PL1 gt gt Query COMPiler O gt lt gt gt EXTract COMPiler 22 2 222 2 gt lt Description This option controls the name of the COBOL and PL1 module to be called by SDE when compilation of copy books is required for CREATE STRUCTURE The initial COMPILER values are set by the INI variables SDE COBOLCompiler and SDE PL1Compiler or where these INI options have not been set defaults to IGYCRCTL for COBOL and IBMZPLI for PL1 Note that the SDE COBOLCompiler and SDE PL1Compiler options may be set to a fully qualified load library DSN and member name When SET COMPILER is executed the SDE COBOLCompiler and or SDE PL1Compiler option is set or updated in the User INI file when the SELCOPY session is closed This means that the compiler module names will be set across SELCOPY i sessions SET COMPILER values take effect at the Global level SET Value COBOL PL1 Specifies that the following token is the COBOL or PL1 compiler module name compiler_module The 8 byte member name of the compiler module SDE will invoke the compiler module via standard system library search chain This replaces any fully qualified load library name that may have been included as part of the SDE COBOLCompiler or SDE PL1Compiler INI option specifications QUERY Response The string COBOL the COBOL compiler name followed by the string PL1 and the PL1 compiler name which are the c
33. The List window displaying the list data will support most of the standard list window features as follow e Field Descriptor Block FDB e Edit View 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 90 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE LIST e Selecting Sorting and Filtering e Sorting with the Cursor On exiting the List window display the in storage list is destroyed and storage is freed Parameters list_name The name to be assigned to the in storage list data for reference in a DISPLAY LIST command FROM fileid Identifies the fileid of the data set containing the structured records fileid may be the DSN of a sequential or VSAM data set or the DSN of a PDS PDSE member USING STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the SDO to be applied to the data records struct_name is the SDF fileid assigned to the SDO in a CREATE STRUCTURE command TITLE title_text Specifies the text to be displayed in the List window s title bar Examples lt sd create list AMLIST from CBL AMSUPP DA using CBL CBLI SDO AMMAP title Contact Address Details Generate in storage list AMLIST lt sd display list AMLIST Open a list window for the in storage list AMLIST See Also DISPLAY LIST CREATE STRUCTURE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 91 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE CREATE STRUCTURE Syntax gt gt CREATE STRUCTUre struct name sss as Se gt AAA A A a a
34. before pressing lt Enter gt Enter prefix line command Z against the required record Press lt PF2 gt with the cursor positioned on the required record As distributed lt PF2 gt is assigned to the macro SDEZOOMW which opens a new window to display the single record view Position the cursor on the required press lt F16 gt to open the SDE Browse Edit Utilities Menu or DB2 Browse Edit Utilities Menu as appropriate then select option Open single record ZOOM view in new window to invoke the SDEZOOMW macro Bb WP 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 19 Getting Started with SDE Displaying a Record Segment in Single Record View e To display formatted data using the currently assigned record type execute FORMAT SINGLE with the cursor positioned on the required record e To re assign the record type and display formatted data execute MAP with the cursor positioned on the required record or execute prefix line command MAP against the required record when in multi record view e To display unformatted data execute UNFMT with the cursor positioned on the required record Only records that are visible may be viewed in the single record view i e records that are flagged as being NOTSELECTED SUPPRESSED or EXCLUDED cannot be viewed in this format When in single record view commands LEFT and RIGHT lt PF10 gt and lt PF11 gt respectively and or NEXT and PREV scroll to other visible records
35. blanks String2 may be null C Two adjacent quotation mark characters that are embedded in a replace string which is enclosed by the same quotation mark characters will be treated as a single occurrence of the character See example under string1 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix C This is equivalent to specifying a quoted search string but that the string search will be case sensitive e g C Book 0 A hexadecimal string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix X 0 A picture string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix P Where a picture string is used as string2 of a CHANGE command then it must be the same length as the string1 and may only contain the following special characters Any character in a picture string that is not one of the special characters supported by picture strings is untranslated Where string1 is a regular expression string2 may contain tag references to tagged sub expressions of the regular expression search pattern defined by string See Regular Expressions in CBLe text edit documentation for details on tagged sub expression reference ALL Where field conditions are satisfied change all occurrences of string1 to string2 A message is displayed providing the number of occurrences of string1 that have been changed to string2 If NX is not specified all excluded records that contain an occu
36. formatted view If the record type RTO assigned to each record or record segment has been disabled record data is unformatted then VFMT will re enable the assigned record types to reformat the record data Compare with FORMAT TABLE which does not attempt to re enable the assigned record types Parameters VFMT has no parameters See Also FORMAT CHAR MAP FMT UNFMT ZOOM 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 181 Command Line Primary Commands VIEW Syntax gt gt View PS E gt lt Ho eege RE dee J 0 t 4 E Pl 1 v a ee ee record type plus minus Description Select the record types associated with data records to be made visible within an SDE BROWSE or EDIT window The VIEW command performs the same operation as the V prefix area command Records that not included in the display of records due to a VIEW CLI command or V prefix command are flagged as being SUPPRESSED Suppressed records can be identified if shadow lines are set on for SUPPRESSED records Where a non generic record type is specified the DRECTYPE setting is updated to be the first record_type parameter specified on the VIEW command If no parameters are specified then the default record type is used Where more than one record type is selected in a multi record view the appropriate column
37. gt SS gt Wiere Clause saa ea SS a ee gt lt l Tine flag Description Exclude any visible records that are of the default record type and also satisfy the specified where_clause criteria Records that are already EXCLUDED are unaffected by the LESS command The current line is also unaffected unless the SHADOW option for EXCLUDED lines is set off and the current line is one which is excluded by the LESS command In this case the line following the current line becomes the new current line If LESS is executed with no parameters then all visible records that are of the default record type are EXCLUDED The record type used on a LESS command becomes the new value of the DRECTYPE option 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 140 Command Line Primary Commands LESS Parameters where_clause where_clause syntax is described fully in documentation for the WHERE command line_flag line_flag may be specified to locate a record or record segment that has been flagged with the requested line flag Each valid line_flag keyword detailed below corresponds to a built in function A description of each line_flag keyword may be found in its equivalent function description Epper e JCHANGEERBORD o Z O ZO OoOo o Oo OO Dupken e JDUEUCATEREN NEW o e y O KEYChanged KEYCho RNC TRUNCated VALERRor O IVALUEERROR Examples less 14 gt 255 Exclude any records that are of the de
38. gt greater than to indicate that the number of records reported does not reflect the whole file size or equals to indicate that the number of records reported does reflect the whole file size gt may be displayed for BROWSE or UPDATE in place EDIT where sequential processing of the file has been suspended until more records are required for display is displayed sequential processing has occurred until end of file was reached QUERY Response Displays SIZE followed first by the number of segments then the number of records in the file or DB2 table then either gt or EXTRACT Rexx variables The number of record segments in the file The number of records rows in the file or DB2 table Indicator of whether or not the size value reflects the file size gt or Syntax A E Title short_title gt lt D SET i gt gt Query SEENEN gt lt gt gt EXTract TItle gt lt Description This option displays and assigns the title that may be defined as part of an SDE structure SDO file See CREATE STRUCTURE SET TITLE values take effect at the File level SET Value short_title Specifies a structure title text string which may be no longer than 64 characters Enclosing quotation marks or apostrophes may be specified and are stripped when saved in the structure QUERY Response T
39. gt lt Description This option controls the action taken if unsaved changes exist in edited data and the END or QUIT command is executed Actions are as follow 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 190 SET QUERY EXTRACT AUTOSAVE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option AUTOSAVE Action Taken See or Changes to the data are saved without prompting the user before doing so END command is terminated with the following message OFF PROMPT ZZSD465I Data Changed Use SAVE CANCEL AUTOSAVE OFF PROMPT is set User is prompted to save the changes discard the changes or to terminate the END command and OFF NOPROMPT return to the SDE edit view The initial value of AUTOSAVE is set by default to AUTOSAVE OFF NOPROMPT SET AUTOSAVE takes effect at the Global level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether changes to data will be automatically saved ON or not OFF PROMPT NOPROMPT For AUTOSAVE OFF only controls whether a prompt message or a popup window is opened containing choices to save the changes discard them or cancel END and return to the edited data QUERY Response The current setting of the AUTOSAVE option EXTRACT Rexx variables he current setting of automatic SAVE ON or OFF lautosave 2 The current setting of the prompt window PROMPT or NOPROMPT AUXDSNPREFIX SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax A E t AUXdsnprefix dsn_prefix
40. level1_name immediately before the specified copy book data This is intended for use where no level 01 record is defined within the copy book copybook_name The complete fileid DSN and member name of a COBOL or PL 1 copy book or ADATA file SELECT levell_entry Selects the individual 01 level entry names from within the concatenation of specified copy books for which record type mappings RTOs are to be generated All data declaration entries associated with 01 level entries that are not selected will be ignored Default is to generate an RTO for each 01 level entry in the copy book concatenation DB2 Definition DB2 definition syntax provides the method of defining an SDO containing a single record type structure RTO based on columns returned by a prepared SQL query statement CREATE STRUCTURE uses information stored in the returned SQLDA to determine the data type etc for each field definition in the RTO To do this a BIND of the SELCOPY i DB2 plan must have been performed for any DB2 sub system containing tables involved in the CREATE STRUCTURE operation Furthermore SDE DB2 edit and browse options may be specified on CREATE STRUCTURE and so are saved in the RTO These options are used by default when the SDO structure is used to edit the table data FROM DB2 lt ssn gt Indicates that structure generated is derived from a DB2 results table ssn is optional and identifies the local DB2 sub system name to which a conne
41. not only the interpreted printable character representation of the formatted field but also its raw hexadecimal data Record Information Columns Record information RECINFO field ID is not applicable to DB2 table rows and so is always suppressed However record information field SQLCODE may be displayed to report the last SQL code received following an SQL INSERT DELETE or UPDATE performed on the table row as a result of a SAVE operation DB2 Column Attributes Single record view of a table row includes an additional column within the display which flags attributes defined to the individual table columns These column attributes are obtained from the DB2 catalog table SYSIBM SYSCOLUMNS and flags whether a column is part of the primary key a unique key foreign key a duplicate key index has a check constraint a default value and or supports a null value Display of the column attributes information may be suppressed using the COLATTRIBUTES ON OFF option Varible Length Fields Data in variable length character fields VARCHAR that is not of the maximum length is suffixed with a lt less than character The lt itself does not form part of the data but is displayed to indicate that the character to the left is the last character of the field data This indication is particularly necessary where the variable length field contains trailing blank characters which are to be preserved In editing the field data the lt indicator may
42. or select menu item Run to open the SDE Edit Browse view SELCOPY i Structured Data Browse Edit m File Run Command SDO REPLACE FILTER Help wS wR x Command gt SEFOLLA C3F ZZSSDE00 Lines 1 20 of 23 INPUT Fileid CBL SELC310 SZZSSAM2 ZZSDATSA or Fileid format ivolser dataset name member Volume For uncataloged datasets DSN Member HFS Recfm V Fmt EOL Lrecl Browse Edit Allow Ins Del Upd In Place Read Only Options Enter Y Y to activate each of the options below Record Key RBA FROM E FOR records Note Must have storage for this many records FILTER Expression or dataset Specify optional structure Copybook overlay USING SDO Structure or USING COBOL Copybook CBL SELC310 SZZSSAM1 ZZSCOBSA Default Record Tupe If mo LEV 04 entry Figure 2 SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel USING Copybook In order to format records into discrete fields SDE uses a structure definition object SDO An SDO is a pseudo compiled object that may contain any number of record structure record type definitions and may be generated automatically by SDE as part of an edit or browse operation or directly using the SDE CREATE STRUCTURE command When using SDE to perform formatted record edit or browse using a COBOL or PL 1 copy book SDE generates a temporary SDO which involves compiling the copy book Note Since compilation is a processing overhead it is recommended that if the copy book
43. the search string is compared against individual fields that have been selected for display in the formatted data record See SELECT Fields are searched from left to right in the order that they appear in the display This is true regardless of the order in which field columns are specified on the FIND command or the order in which fields are encountered within the unformatted record The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define which of the fields within the formatted records are eligible to be searched i e Fields are eligible only if they exist within the left and right bounds when applied to the expanded record data which 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 126 Command Line Primary Commands FIND is not necessarily the same as the unformatted record data Where a BOUNDS column occurs within a field definition then the following rules apply 1 For character data type fields only the area of the field that falls within the BOUNDS columns is eligible for the search 2 For numeric data type fields the field is not eligible to be included in the search If one or more field columns are specified on the FIND command using field_col or field_col1 field_col2 that do not reference at least one field defined by the BOUNDS columns as being eligible for search then the following error message is returned ZZSD280E No fields selected within the current bounds for the FIND command If a field column is speci
44. then the function is not called and the field is evaluated instead To force use of the function name the function s internal name should be used This is the name of the function prefixed with BIF e g The internal name of the FIND function is BIFFIND ABBREV gt gt ABBREV stringl string he gt lt tas p o length Sat ABBREV or BIFABBREV returns 1 if string2 is equal to the leading characters of string1 and string2 has a length that is greater than or equal to ength otherwise 0 is returned If not specified length defaults to the length of string2 Note that the data type of both string1 and string2 must be character and the data type of ength must be positive integer otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples ABBREV input inp 1 ABBREV c input inp 0 ABBREV input inp 4 1 ABBREV input inp 2 0 ABBREV input int 0 gt gt BASPOS start 7 gt lt pag Length BASPOS or BIFBASPOS returns a character string which is a sub string of the current record s primary base segment starting at position start for length length H the current structure is not segmented then the current record is used as the primary segment BASPOS is primarily used for mapping segmented records where a record type definition RTO is assigned to secondary segments based on field values in the primary segment
45. 00000 D0000 00000 VOVHUSAWE DOV kr rm btt um BRR eb UNNE NPE NP NPNNNE Bfofoiitoin in toin to tokonont DONONWoONoNooonN JN MES d bd E EE WNONCONFERNNE Gau b amn amn N wN bo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d 0 ah 0 d 0 A 0 d 0 d 0 sE 0 1 S A J Figure 25 SDE Table Format Single Format Record data is processed as for a table view except that the display becomes a single record window view of the default record 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 35 SDE Concepts Single Format SELCOPY i CBL AMSUPP DA 2 using CBL CBLI SDO DIRAMEMP 5700 m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwaplList Help wS wR Command gt Scroll gt Csr Record type AM Fixed S700 Offset 0 Data elements 95 Record 00000001 Flags f Length S700 Data 20040322 ALEQUIP SUPP AL Equipment 28 Springwell Lane DONCASTER South Yorkshire AmGElCur AmGElMax AmGLineN AmGLineL 4 AmGALL KOHHRHHHHHHHHHHHH www wN NN N N W w e e POJNONPbEAEBEE RNE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tu Figure 26 SDE Single Format Character Format Record data in the current multi or single record view is mapped as a single variable length character field with field name UnMapped or for record segments UnMappedSeg No conversion of numeric or unprintable data is performed and the window view either multi or single record remains unchanged SELCOR YT ECH CEL AMSUPP DA EBCDIC using CBL CBLI SDOC
46. 1 ESS a ee RBA byte offset S alae aati t plus t relative line i minus EK NEXT expression Ke doo E line_flag a a ALL SS E EX FIRST k ts NX E a LAST ho X 4 l PREV Formatted Column Locate Options gt field_name Ho a a gt field ref FIRST LAST PREV Notes 1 Parameters RECORD KEY or RBA may be specified before or after their associated record_num key_string or byte_offset value Description Locate and scroll to a data record or the formatted record column field that matches the specified criteria Where no match is found the display is unchanged Field column location is supported for formatted record data i e mapped by an SDO structure record type and applies to the default record only In single record view record locate will scroll left or right to display the record that matches the locate criteria whereas formatted column locate will scroll up or down so that the specified field appears first in the display The LOCATE command verb may be omitted altogether if the first token in the command can be identified as being a valid locate parameter and ambiguity exists with defined SELCOPY i command verbs If expression is specified for record location and no field name nor field reference is included within expression then the LOCATE is performed only fo
47. 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 227 SET QUERY EXTRACT SESSION QUERY EXTRACT Option SHADOW SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt 4 SHADOW ON gt SET OFF EE ALL a a a Geer eege 4 gt lt EXcluded NOTselected SUPressed gt gt Query SHADOW EE gt lt gt gt EXTract SHADow gt lt Description This option controls the display of shadow lines used to indicate the presence of records not displayed due to one of three reasons EXCLUDED identifies a record group that has been excluded by the user using selective line editing techniques e g using the WHERE or EXCLUDE commands NOTSELECTED identifies a record group that has not been assigned a record type Reasons for this are 1 The length of the data record does not fit that required to match any of the RTO definitions 2 Fields within the data record do not satisfy the criteria associated with any of the available RTO definitions RTO criteria are defined as part of the RTO via a USE WHEN clause 3 Fields within the data record contain invalid data when an RTO definition is applied SUPPRESSED identifies a record group of a record type that has not been selected for view See the VIEW command The SHADOW option operates at the
48. 15 uncataloged Filter Limit Specify the maximum number of records to be selected Stopaft gt ei zero indicates no Limit Selection Criteria Specify ii to set INCLUDE selection criteria Type I Specify Si to set EXCLUDE selection criteria Structure File Required for option 3 Dsn NBJ SELCOPYI SDOLIB Member gt COBSALES volume If dataset is uncataloged Type Z SDO _fAData Cobol ret Action gt 2_ i Text Edit existing filter file PF4 2 Specify Unformatted Selection Criteria from scratch PFS 3 Specify Formatted Selection Criteria from scratch PF6 A CrestesPllneR object PERES Figure 9 Create File Filter 1 Open the Create File Filter panel by selecting Filter from the Primary Option Menu the FILTER menu bar item from the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel or simply by entering command FILTER at any command prompt 2 Insert the filter fileid in the Filter File input fields 3 In the Selection Criteria Type field enter either I or X to indicate whether records that satisfy the filter expression are to be included or excluded respectively 4 If the filter is to be applied to only a limited number of records after which no further filtering occurs then enter a maximum number of records value in the Filter Limit field 5 The filter may either reference data within the unformatted record or data within fields located at a fixed position of the formatted record i e the field does not follow a variable l
49. 217 SET QUERY EXTRACT PAGEDEPTH SET QUERY EXTRACT Option PAGEWIDTH SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax A E PAGEWidth ee gt lt a SET l gt gt Query PAGEWidth O a a gt lt gt gt EXTract PAGEWidth gt lt Description Applicable to PRINT output only PAGEWIDTH specifies the number of character columns printed per page For batch processing a PAGEWIDTH value may be specified any number of times within the same SYSIN input to change the page width of pages printed by subsequent PRINT commands SET Value n_cols The number of character columns to be printed per page minimum 50 default 133 QUERY Response The current PAGEWIDTH value EXTRACT Rexx variables pagewidth 1 sd The current PAGEWIDTH value setting PFKEY SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option PFKEY has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET PFKEY in CBLe Text Edit documentation POINT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax A AZ Point name poe SSS SSS SaaS gt lt SET OFf gt Query amaa Point A Ee gt lt Point A gt gt EXTract Point 2 gt lt Point Description Assign or unassign a label name to the focus line data record or shadow line for subseque
50. 233 SET QUERY EXTRACT USERNAME QUERY EXTRACT Option USERNAME QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query SEE Nees A eee A gt lt gt gt EXTract USERname gt lt Description Obtain the current user s RACF login id and the executing job name QUERY Response Displays USERNAME RACF user followed by the user s RACF login id then JOB name followed by the currently executing job name EXTRACT Rexx variables lusername 1 Irpe name of the user s RACE login id lusername 2_ Dpe name of the currently executing job USING QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query USING A SS SS SSeS gt lt gt gt EXTract USING gt lt Description QUERY EXTRACT USING reports the structure name SDO and record type of the default record within the current SDE window view The USING option operates at the view level QUERY Response Message ZZSD079I stating the structure name and record type e g ZZSD079I USING Structure CBL CBLI SDO DIRAMEMP Record type EMP EXTRACT Rexx variables lasing sd Thee structure name used in the current SDE window view sing 2 The default record type 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 234 SET QUERY EXTRACT USING QUERY EXTRACT Option VALUE EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt EXTract VALUE
51. 3 l 1 gt 1 gt t 1 gt tao t gt ao ke A 557833807 18385 84 82 4 79 696534904 128 03 Displaying Records of Specific Record Type s using NBJ CBLI EDGE wS wR x Sie rec COUNTRY PO csr record line s line s line s Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed C PAYMENT CARD Sebel ALt 0 0 50 Figure 14 SDE View Selected Record Types Display Unformatted Record Data The initial format of the record data in the SDE window view is determined by the FORMAT parameter of the EDIT or BROWSE command default is FORMAT TABLE If a structure has been specified on the SDE Data Edit panel or via the EDIT BROWSE USING parameter then record type assignment occurs so that each record is Typed Furthermore if FORMAT TABLE or FORMAT SINGLE is in effect the records are formatted so that record data is arranged and displayed in distinct discrete fields FORMAT TABLE displays records beginning at the first selected record in multi record view whereas FORMAT single displays the first selected record in single record view Once the SDE window view has been opened the display of data may be changed so that it is unformatted and optionally untyped To display records as unformatted but preserve their record type assignment so continuing the ability to selectively VIEW only records assigned specific record types then execute the FORMAT command with parameter CHAR or HEX Note that the record v
52. 53 DUPLICATE E A On E EEEE ETRE SEE E E EE RRE EEE O 54 ENP Teo e EE Ee 54 EXCLUDED Osai ae sane ee e asada edd Genee 54 EN e tree rec ere se eter ete rrr a 54 ell MR EE 55 PASPREF IX OMD EE 55 Ji ele 55 INSERTE scooter ono petits dia edo 55 KEY CHANGED Destinatario ie 55 Eeer 56 Bn EE 56 lee EE Treen pret creer ener creer trees 56 BS len E TT 57 POWER EE 57 Be EE 57 NOE aii dnd oa 57 EE 57 EE E A A E E E N EE 58 ee MN EE 58 SAV le 0 EE 59 SE LEE 59 ll EE 59 eil H EE 60 TRAIN SEA EE EE 60 TRUNCATED escasas pt ii ii 61 UPPER EE 61 EEN eigene euer 61 WORD Ma o cielo season 62 EE 62 A RANG EO vccrase sees ccznsasocersensanssersioirsccamatiesamsasiteuaanvenciost acer massuseeietiaueummecachedind aad naa N 62 REENEN EE 63 Macro Pa ies 63 SDE Protile SDEPROE Ee cosita arto ata aaa 63 SDE Men s and Popup WINDOWS aiciiscscsincssanicesassrscainesstasssstensnsinessansuosassnestansassnindsaanssonsdinduatnoiaeatrosntantndansadasaneuadseteesisctusiasiesasaaseal 64 Library Directory Member Selecte EE 64 el Buet ue 64 SDE Browser Git Uulities Mel sn A 64 A A 65 Se Re ele EE 67 Record toma Ni eir eepe eE ona 67 ShadowS OPNIMT e A eE a E eaio Leaders tetas lado ed 67 Window Option S sisme iciocarccicin ne nine ino or ide 68 Locale ODIOS aeaa E 68 DB2Browss Edit Vumigs EE 68 PSION SG ere e EE 68 Record MOMO tii eii EO 69 Ee Tee EE 69 Keier 69 SDE CREATE REPLACE Pile Panel espurio Eae E En A ESAE A pibe 69 Panel apura ee ad el E
53. A PINnLIW I s j 00001 EELER 0 0 0 D R m n 0 a e db 00001 wow DN 200001 ATA TYPES 1 i ata elements 15 MYBINTEGER M MYFIXED Figure 23 SDE Insert Records Deleting Records Record record segment and DB2 table row delete is not supported by Update in place edit technique Lines of data records record segments or DB2 table rows may be deleted as follow 1 Enter prefix line command D n on the line and n 1 lines that follow to be deleted 2 Enter prefix line command DD on the first and last line of a block of lines to be deleted 3 Execute the DELETE primary command to delete one or more consecutive excluded and or non excluded lines Unless a range of lines is specified the first line of data to be deleted is that which occupies the focus line e g Delete all excluded lines that fall within a range of lines denoted by label names FTXT and FLST DELETE ALL EX FTXT FLST Delete treats typed and untyped lines of data identically i e it is not sensitve to any assigned record type Following a delete operation record type assignment processing occurs for all remaining records affected by the operation Records that are SUPPRESSED or NOT SELECTED are unaffected by delete operations Moving Records Moving records and record segments is not supported by Update in place edit technique Although supported by DB2 table edit moving table rows has no bearing on the location of a row within a DB2 tabl
54. A numerical value is assigned a specific numeric data type based on its value This data type may be converted during the evaluation of the expression in order to satisfy arithmetic and relational operations Field value A field value is either a hash prefixed number or an unquoted character string that matches a formatted field column reference number or field column name belonging to the named or focus record type A field name may be fully qualified partially qualified or unqualified An unqualified field name is simply the field s designated name e g ADDR a partially qualified field name includes the names of any nested groups in which the field is defined e g MAST ADDR or INVOICE ADDR and a fully qualified field name includes the record type name e g LOCATION REC MAST ADDR Note that the default qualifier separator character is dot but may be altered using the QSEPARATOR option Furthermore if the ABBREVIATION option is set on then any group or field item designator within the file name may be abbreviated starting with the first letter of the designator to a length that identifies it as a unique group name or field item The data type of the field value matches that of the field being referenced so that a field which is of numerical data type will evaluate to be a numerical value and a field which is of character data type will evaluate to be a literal string with character case preserved A field column reference na
55. By default line_numis setto 1 SE The number of lines that message text may occupy within the display area If the message text exceeds the number of message lines then an SDE Message List window is opened to display the message text instead If lines is not specified the number of message lines last defined in the current CBLe view is unchanged By default lines is set to 5 OVERLAY Specifies that the first message line should overlay a line normally used to display a line of data If omitted the first message line will be reserved for message display only Second and subsequent message lines always overlay data lines Initially OVERLAY is set on QUERY Response The current setting of the MSGLINE option ON or OFF followed by location of the first message line the number of message lines and whether OVERLAY is in effect 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 214 SET QUERY EXTRACT MSGLINE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option EXTRACT Rexx variables The current position of the first message line The number of message lines OVERLAY if overlay is in effect MSGMODE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option MSGMODE has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET MSGMODE in CBLe Text Edit documentation MULTIPOINT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt A 4 MULTIPO int ON o gt lt he SET OFF gt gt Query MU
56. CBLe edit view See SET DSORG in CBLe Text Edit documentation EOLIN SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Ho EOLIn doo EE gt lt SET CR LF NL CRLF LFCR CRNL SEEING gt gt Query BOLI 2 5 52 2 SS a 2 gt lt gt gt EXTract EQLIn 22 22222222222 2 gt lt Description EOLIN alters the current input EOL end of line delimiter string used to interpret variable length records obtained from an HFS file for SDE EDIT and BROWSE CLI commands An EOLIN value is set for all SDE and CBLe edit views including those containing non HFS files When an edit view is opened and before the edit data is read the default EOLIN is automatically set to be one of the following values in the order of precedence 1 The EOL parameter argument specified on the EDIT or BROWSE command 2 For SDE EDIT BROWSE only the EOLIN value set in the SDE profile macro using SET EOLIN 3 The EOL format value defined in the directory entry 4 EOLIN NL new line SET EOLIN takes effect at the File level SET Values CR LF NL CRLF LFCR CRNL string Identifies the end of line delimiter Delimiter elements are as follow Line Feed string JA 2 byte user specified character or hex string QUERY Response 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 200 SET
57. CBLe Text Edit documentation FMODE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option FMODE has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET FMODE in CBLe Text Edit documentation FNAME MBR SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option FNAME or MBR has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET FNAME in CBLe Text Edit documentation 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 202 SET QUERY EXTRACT FNAME MBR SET QUERY EXTRACT Option FOCUS EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt EXTract FOCUS gt lt Description For use in macros EXTRACT FOCUS obtains information about the focus field EXTRACT Rexx variables lfocus 1 Ling number of the first record in the focus line record group lfocus 2 Une number of the last record in the focus line record group os Shadow state of the focus line VISIBLE EXCLUDED SUPPRESSED or NOTSELECTED focus a IDescription of the focus line record group DATA TOF EOF SHADOW or BOUNDS focus 5 Record type of the focus line record group Focus field name Position of cursor within the focus field See Also EXTRACT FIELD EXTRACT FVALUE EXTRACT VALUE FORMAT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax SE FORmat Character EE gt lt SET Hex
58. E Eege EES eegE 142 HS TS RS VAG Lerten errr etree Ea aii 143 cht MIER ee aere See ee EE 143 ere NEE 144 NE D E EE 148 MAP tit ise 148 MA ne lod rater reer 149 VORE EE 149 AA PP 150 IS 150 NOMS EE 151 NO IND ii scooter E eerie 152 Seele eet eebe E T P e 152 OPTIONS EE 156 PERMANENT ia aa aci 156 PREVIOUS EE 157 PRIN WEE 158 EE 161 el EE 161 RORANGE cusco darnos manusnaiener aed 162 o EE 162 RECLEN o rene ey arr e Pere ee o e o yen 163 RLE DIE EEA Ee 164 2013 11 13 13 03 23 iii Structured Data Environment SDE Contents Command Line Primary Commands REFRESH SEVQUERVEXTRAS E 187 ABBREVIATION SE TOUERYEXTRACT OPON niniaren n a R E 188 ALT SETQUERYWEAXTRACT Optio ricsi iieii AA A SE E N 188 ARRA YALL SE TOQUE aida 188 ARRAYASOHARAG TER SE TOVER Y CUO EE 189 ASCI SE VOUERY EXTRACT ODIO eyo nanena rnae aa EE E EE E EPEE E E cena 190 el Dee el Re RE Bel 190 AUXDSNPREFIX SE T QUERY EXTIRAG PT Optom us datada 191 BOUNDS SE VOUER VEXTRACT ODIO disemir ranan r e rinitis indias 192 CAPS SE VOUERWVEX TRACT ODHON servici aaa aaa EE datar 193 CCSID SE VOQUERY EXTRAG T Option sar ti 193 COLATTRIBUTES SETQUERWEXTRACT Opt Eegen eEEeEegE et 194 COLOUR COLOR lt SEFOUERWEX TRAC FO pions EE 195 COLWIDTH SE TOQUE E OPON ernia e E p ie tion dit 197 COMPILER SE T OUERY EXTRACT Opn OU EE 198 DESCRIPTION SET QUERY EXTRACT Op tlOM sacs is crsceasnqeesneseetussscsvesessecsesntusinvesvesezeesynccnsvtesepsnscn
59. INCLUDE filter then all remaining untested records are excluded If an EXCLUDE filter then all remaining untested records are included DB2 lt ssn gt Indicates that edit is for a DB2 base or results table ssn is optional and identifies the local DB2 sub system name to which a connection will be made Before a connection can be made to the DB2 sub system the SELCOPY i DB2 plan must have been bound to that sub system Default for ssn is the users default DB2 sub system name as set by the DB2 Primary Options menu table_name A DB2 base table name specified as table_owner table_name containing rows of data to be edited view_name A DB2 table view specified as view_owner view_name which references an SQL query used to generate a results table containing the rows of data to be edited DB2 Opts The following DB2 options are applicable to edit of DB2 table data only See SDE Opts for structured data edit options SELECT select clause Specifies a DB2 SQL SELECT clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the select clause WHERE where clause Specifies a DB2 SQL WHERE clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the where clause SORT ORDER BY order by clause 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 117 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT Specifies a DB2 SQL ORDER BY clause to be included in the prep
60. If the record is EXCLUDED it is made visible 2 The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the string or numeric field 3 If necessary scrolling occurs to display the found data All occurrences of the search string or numeric value are highlighted in the text Enter the RESET FIND command to turn off the highlighting When the duration of a FIND or RFIND execution exceeds 1 second a progress window is opened displaying the number of records processed so far This window also provides the user with the oportunity to interrupt the operation using the Attn key Use of FIND with no parameters is equivalent to RFIND assigned to function key PF5 by default and repeats the last find command executed including all its specified parameters The FORMAT of the SDE display affects the execution of FIND Unformatted Multi or Single Record Display CHAR or UNFMT By default a character compare for the supplied search string is performed against the entire length of unformatted data records The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define the area of the record within which the search occurs i e the matched data must begin at or after the left bound and not exceed the right bound The BOUNDS columns may be overridden using pos and pos2 positional parameters field_col and ALL parameters are not applicable to these display formats and are ignored Formatted Multi or Single Record Display VFMT or FMT For formatted records
61. Overview Included as part of SELCOPY i DB2 functionality the SDE data editor includes support for BROWSE and EDIT of DB2 results tables Using the SDE editor for DB2 table edit has the benefit that all SDE commands and operations including FIND CHANGE WHERE and LOCATE apply equally to the display and edit of DB2 table data For both BROWSE and EDIT all rows of the DB2 results table are loaded into storage before being displayed in the SDE window view The SDO structure used to format the DB2 table rows may be a pre defined structure file generated using the CREATE STRUCTURE command or if no SDO structure file is named on the BROWSE or EDIT operation a SELCOPY i generated temporary structure derived from the DB2 SQLDA chain returned by SQL SELECT query A DB2 table edit SDO includes the SQL query option criteria SELECT WHERE ORDER BY used to obtain the results table Isolation clause options specified on edit and other options which include skipping display of locked rows actions that trigger an SQL COMMIT and preservation of primary key fields Because data in rows returned by a DB2 results table are formatted identically the display of table rows has only one record type assigned a name Row name equal to the table owner id Because there is only one record type all table rows are eligible for processing by commands that operate on records of the default record type A separate SELCOPY i DB2 table EDIT audit log may be started for
62. S or any non blank character in the Sel column for the required entries Note that multiple filter sub clauses may be generated the same record type by duplicating the row referencing that record type and selecting it Records assigned record types that are not selected by the filter are not interrogated when the filter is applied If the filter includes records then these records will be excluded If the filter excludes records then these records will be included On pressing lt Enter gt the Filter formatted Selection Criteria panel view will be opened for each selected record type entry SELCOPY i FILTER formatted S Criteria m File Help wS wR x Command gt Scroll Csr ZZSGFLTW PFS Show Selected PFE Show ALL FILTER formatted Selection Criteria 13 Rows AND Lev Name Fmt ROp Value ee tite CUST Db gt BALANCE EMOL of Data Figure 12 Create File Filter Formatted Fields This panel view also contains an embedded table displaying all fields defined in the selected record type Like an unformatted record filter a filter sub clause expression for records assigned one of the selected record types comprises one or more sub expressions Each sub expression being associated with the preceeding sub expression via the logical operator AND or OR The table of fields should be updated as follows 1 Use the X or XX line command to exclude those fields not included as part of the filter expression f
63. SaaS SSeS 92222 A gt lt a SET a gt gt Query LENGE SS Sess SSS s S35 2222222522212 gt lt gt gt EXTract LENgth gt lt Description This option controls the record length of the record occupying the focus line If the length of a record is increased then pad characters are appended to the record The pad character used is that defined by the current value for PAD Reducing a record s length will truncate record data The length of a record may also be updated by overtyping the new value in the Length field displayed in the Record Information area See SET QUERY EXTRACT RECINFO and RECLEN commanos If a structure has been applied to the edited records then the record type RTO associated with the updated record is re evaluated and the contents of the SDE edit view updated accordingly Record length changes are only applicable to variable length records where Full Edit KSDS Edit or Auxiliary Edit is in effect Beware that changing record lengths incorrectly may result in length errors indicated by LGTH gt or ERRV gt in the prefix area and so the record data is no longer correctly mapped by the defined record structure SET LENGTH takes effect at the File level SET Value n_bytes A positive integer value representing the new length assigned to the record QUERY Response The length of the record occupying the focus line EXTRACT Re
64. See DB2 SQL Reference for details on the isolation clause and DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide for details on the effects of isolation level on concurrency and protection of DB2 table data The KEEP sub parameter options are applicable to isolation levels RR Repeatable Read and RS Read Stability only Default isolation level as set by the SELCOPY i DB2 package and plan BIND is CS COMMITONCLEANSAVE COMMITONSAVE COMMITONEXIT Specifies when a COMMIT should be executed for changed data commrroncreansave COMMIT only if SAVE is executed without errors lcommrronsave COMMIT on SAVE regardless of errors lcomtonextr COMMIT only on exit of the edit session Default is COMMITONCLEANSAVE LOCKTABLE EXCLUSIVE SHR For DB2 base tables only executes a DB2 SQL command LOCK TABLE before loading data from the table Use this option with caution as other users and applications may be prevented from accessing the table If LOCKTABLE is specified the lock is held until the next COMMIT is actioned LOCKTABLE EXCLUSIVE prevents another process from performing any operations on the table whilst it is being edited unless the process is running with an isolation level of Uncommitted Read UR in which case read only dirty read operations may be performed LOCKTABLE SHR prevents anything other than read only operations to be performed on the table whilst it is being edited See DB2 SQL Reference for details on the effects
65. Sequential data set or PDS PDSE member If executed with no sdo_file parameter the Create Structure from XREF File 9 2 panel will be displayed In this case if xref_file has been specified or XREF has been executed against an entry in a file list the XREF file fields of the panel will be populated with the xref_file name If sdo_file has been specified then the utility will generate a CREATE STRUCTURE primary command with parameters that match that of the input XREF syntax Parameters xref_file Identifies a single XREF file sequential data set or PDS PDSE library member sdo_file Name of the output SELCOPY i structure definition file sequential data set or PDS PDSE library member FOREGROUND BATCH FOREGROUND default will execute the generated CREATE STRUCTURE command in the foreground BATCH will display a temporary data set in a text edit window which contains JCL to execute the SDEAMAIN SELCOPY i data edit batch program The job will include a single job step that executes the SELCOPY i CREATE STRUCTURE command max_rc The maximum acceptable return code that may be set by the COBOL or PL1 compiler for which structure generation will continue without error CREATE STRUCTURE will invoke the relevant compiler for the source copy book identified by the XREF file This parameter allows the user to perform a one time override of the maximum compiler return code value set by the COBOL Compiler Options 0 4 1 or PL 1 Co
66. Structured Data Environment SDE 205 SET QUERY EXTRACT GROUPASCHARACTER SET QUERY Option When a group field which comprises variable length field elements is displayed as a single character field the group is first expanded to its maximum length As a safety mechanism and so avoiding destruction of the group field structure the character display of this variable length expanded group field is non enterable and cannot be altered by a CHANGE operation If the specified field name field_col is not a group field then the GROUPASCHARACTER option is applied to the next higher level group field within which the field is defined Note that the record type is itself a group field so specifying a field name whose next higher level group is the record type group field will display as character all data in the record segment mapped by its assigned record type This is not the same as displaying the record data in unmapped CHAR or UNFMT format SET GROUPASCHARACTER takes effect at the View level SET Value ON OFF Display the group field as character ON or display its formatted component fields OFF Default is ON field_col The individual column identifying the group field to which the option will apply This may be the group field itself or a field contained within The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID If field_col does not exist in the specified record_type the following error mess
67. TOWS p2 HS 2 i le ROW ane ROWS SE SQL Query Opts AAA AA A E PR eS ie gt SELect select clause y WHERE where clause AA AA A A A A A O gt 1 ORDER 4 orderby clause 4 EE SORT Description Edit a structured data set or HFS file or edit a DB2 results table within SDE An SDE edit display window is opened and focus is passed to the new window Depending on the value on the FORMAT parameter the SDE display is either a multi record window view or a single record window view for the first record selected For both Structured Data Edit alpha numeric AN fields and DB2 Table Edit character CH or VCHAR fields that contain non printable text only the printable characters may be edited These editable areas of the character data occupy immoveable fixed positions and lengths within the field which are represented by underscores The non printable characters may only be edited by setting HEX ON and updating the hex display 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 113 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT Structured Data Edit If the Structure Definition Object SDO specified by the USING STRUCTURE parameter is not already in storage it is loaded from the appropriate Structure Definition File SDF Record Type Objects RTO within the specified SDO are then used to map the records in the data set For every record in the file each RTO is checked until one is found
68. UnMapped SDE edit of a file without application of a structure is an alternative to performing CBLe text edit on the file Reasons for using SDE data edit are detailed below Note that SDE browse is performed for the CBLe text editor BROWSE command To perform this type of edit or browse do the following 1 Open the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel by selecting Data Edit from the Primary Option Menu or simply entering command SDE at any command prompt 2 Enter the fileid of your data set HFS file or PDS PDSE library member in the appropriate INPUT field s select Browse or Edit options then press lt Enter gt or select menu item Run Note that the USING panel fields should be de selected to bypass use of a structure Alternatively use the SDE BROWSE or EDIT commands to open the SDE view directly e g lt SDATA EDIT CBL X2011036 JSO3XAU KSDS lt BROWSE u smpe smpnts CBL12075 S0001 CBL PROD CBL11091 README 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 7 Getting Started with SDE SDE Data Edit vs CBLe Text Edit SDE Data Edit vs CBLe Text Edit Whereas in most cases use of the SELCOPY i text editor CBLe to edit small non VSAM files is preferred the SDE structured data editor offers some advantages over CBLe 1 Automatic selection of optimal EDIT technique SDE EDIT techniques are KSDS for VSAM KSDS data sets In storage for files small enough to be loaded entirely within a region of availab
69. VRDS Update in place editing selects lines to become Empty Slots Only visible not excluded data records and shadow lines representing EXCLUDED record groups are eligible for delete i e records flagged as NOTSELECTED SUPPRESSED or if SHADOW OFF EXCLUDED is in effect records flagged as EXCLUDED are not eligible to be deleted Note that although not eligible for delete shadow lines representing NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED records groups are still included within a D n count of lines to be deleted If a shadow line is not displayed SHADOW OFF it is not included within a D n line count Show the first n records of an excluded record group Display the record or record segment in single record formatted view Prefix commands FMT and MAP are synonyms Display the record or record segment in HEXDUMP format Insert a new line or a block of n new lines of the default record type If display format is TABLE then numeric bit fields are initialised to zero and character fields to blank otherwise the whole record is initialised to blank For RRDS VRDS Update in place editing I n selects a line or block of lines to be searched for empty slots All empty slots found within this range of lines will be activated Shadow lines representing NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED records groups are still included within an I n count of lines to searched If a shadow line is not displayed SHADOW OFF it is not included within an I n line count Rem
70. VSAM data set PDS PDSE library member or HFS file containing a group of lines extracted from the current SDE edit or browse view 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 89 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE If the target file already exists then the following message is returned ZZSD229E File fileid already exists If output is to a new member of an existing PDS PDSE library or to an HFS file the target file will be created automatically created When CREATE defines a new HFS file the permission bits are set to 740 rwxr If output is to a non existant data set or to a member of a non existant PDS PDSE library the Allocate Non VSAM panel is displayed in order to allocate the new data set Beware that the specified fileid character string must not be LIST minimum abbreviation LI STRUCTURE minimum abbreviation STRUCT or VIEW minimum abbreviation VI which conflict with SDE command verbs CREATE LIST CREATE STRUCTURE and CREATE VIEW Specify CREATE with no parameters to open the SDE CREATE REPLACE file panel Parameters fileid Specifies the fileid of the target file to be created If fileid is a less than 8 characters in length and is a valid member name the target file will be a member of member name fileid belonging to the same PDS PDSE library referenced in the focus SDE view If the focus SDE view does not display a library member the fileid will be treated as an HFS file within the current
71. WORD or BIFWORD returns a character string which is equal to word number word in string A word is considered to be a blank delimited token in a character string If word is greater than the number of words in string then a null string is returned Note that the data type of string must be character and word must be a positive integer otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field reference 3 in the focus record type contains character data c But soft what light through yonder window breaks WORD Hello World 2 WORLD WORD 3 2 soft WORD 3 6 yonder WORD 3 9 my gt gt WORDS string 777 O Rn neH gt lt WORDS or BIFWORDS returns the number of words in string A word is considered to be a blank delimited token in a character string Note that the data type of string must be character otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field name Quote_01 exists in the focus record type and contains character data c So foul and fair a day I have not seen WORDS Quote_01 10 WORDS 0 XRANGE gt gt 5 ARANGE tee Start t 9 26 5 AR pS SRA E Ee gt lt end XRANGE or BIFXRANGE returns a string of single byte character representations between and including start and end If not specified start defaults to X 00 and end defaults to X FF If start is greater end then the returned stri
72. at CBL web page http www cbl com selcdoc html e SELCOPY Product Suite Customisation Guide e SELCOPY User Manual e CBLVCAT User Manual e SELCOPY i Reference and User Guide e SELCOPY i Text Editor CBLe Manual e SELCOPY i Structured Data Editor Manual No reproduction of the whole or any part of the SELCOPY Product Suite system and programs or of this document is to be made without prior written authority from Compute Bridgend Ltd At the time of publication this document is believed to be correct Where the program product differs from that stated herein Compute Bridgend Ltd reserve the right to revise either the program or its documentation at their discretion CBL do not warrant that upward compatibility will be maintained for any use made of this program product to perform any operation in a manner not documented within the user manual The following generic terms are used throughout this document to indicate all available versions and releases of IBM mainframe operating systems MVS z OS OS 390 MVS ESA MVS XA MVS SP OS VSE 2 VSE VSE ESA VSE SP DOS CMS z VM VM ESA VM XA VM SP All All MVS VSE and CMS operating systems 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 1 Summary of Changes This section is a summary of significant new features provided in SELCOPY i Release 3 20 First Edition October 2012 Regular Expressions Regular expressions may be used as arguments to comman
73. be overtyped or shifted right as appropriate If overtyped or deleted and the field data is not of the maximum length then SELCOPY i will reinsert the lt indicator following the last non blank character i e any trailing blanks will not be preserved The lt indicator may also be manually deleted and re entered in blank data following the last non blank character of the field This technique may be used to insert trailing blanks in the field Beware that when using this technique if the original lt indicator is not deleted first then it will become part of the field data Pop up Utility Menu Pressing lt F16 gt in an SDE DB2 table edit view now opens the DB2 Browse Edit Utilities Menu for DB2 specific table editing options instead of the SDE Browse Edit Utilities Menu for structured file editing options Segmented Records Records may be organised in such a way that they are split into a number of record segments each segment being mapped by a unique structure COBOL group or PL1 major minor structure Segmented records begin with a single primary base segment immediately followed by any number of non overlapping secondary segments A secondary segment may have the same or different segment record type RTO mapping as other secondary segments in the record Record 1 222 22 fo 222 2 RE 2222 O Primary_1 Secondary_1 Secondary_1 Secondary_1 Secondary_1 E fp RE KE Record 2 222222 been RE RE
74. by asterisks DB2 Table Browse DB2 table browse is supported for in storage edit browse only Therefore if a results table is too large to be loaded into available storage a storage error occurs The user must then restrict the number of rows to be loaded using further row selection criteria i e FROM FOR SELECT WHERE parameters On starting a DB2 table browse a temporary SDO is created reflecting field characteristics obtained from the SQL Descriptor Area return by the prepared SQL SELECT execution Furthermore if the user does not already have an open connection to the required DB2 sub system that is not for an SDE DB2 table edit view then a new DB2 connection is made Parameters fileid The fileid of the data set containing records to be browsed fileid may be the DSN of a sequential or VSAM data set or the DSN and member name of a PDS PDSE member hfs_fileid A complete HFS or ZFS file path containing data to be browsed hfs_fileid is identified as an HFS path if fileid is not a valid DSN for a sequential VSAM or PDS PDSE dataset e g DSN begins with contains invalid special characters e g or contains qualifiers of length greater than 8 HFS Opts The following HFS options may be specified to determine the handling of data within the HFS file EOL STD NL CR LF CRLF LFCR CRNL string Sets the EOLIN input end of line delimiter value used to determine the end of each record for non RECFM F V input EOLIN delimite
75. character For all display formats the string is treated as being non numeric and the search is actioned on the character representation of the record data pos2 The last position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched Like pos1 pos2 may be a positive or negative integer value not zero If pos references a position within the record data which is higher than that referenced by pos2 then the pos and pos2 values are swapped If pos2 is greater than the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data greater than the length of the expanded record then pos2 is set equal to the maximum or expanded record length Default is pos7 plus the length of the search string minus 1 ALL Search all eligible field columns in the current formatted display field_col An individual field column to be searched within a formatted display The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID If a field name is used enclosing parentheses are mandatory Field names are automatically converted to a field reference and Referencing the same field column more than once will not cause an error If the field is an array then all elements of the array are searched To search an individual element of an array the element occurrence should be specified in parentheses as a subscript to the field reference name e g 13 3 for the 3rd element of a single dimension array An entry must e
76. column 4 Enter a character literal string value in the Value column against which the record data will be compared If required a table row entry may be displayed in a formatted single row view by pressing lt PF2 gt on the row required The table column entries become input panel fields when in single row view lt PF3 gt returns to the table view When all required sub expressions have been entered press lt PF3 gt to return to the main Create Filter File panel view Filter Formatted Record Data The Create Filter Generate Include Exclude Subclause s panel view contains an embedded table displaying all record types defined in the selected structure file For reference purposes only the table includes column Identification Criteria to display any defined record type identification criteria 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 15 Getting Started with SDE Filter Formatted Record Data SELCOPY i wS wR x Command gt Scroll gt Csr SSES DEE EE PFi Help PFS Show Selected PFE Show ALL Structure NBJ SELCOPYI SDOLIB COBSALES Tupe SDO AData Cobol PLI FILTER formatted INCLUDE record types with optional criteria 5 Rows Sel Record Type Identification Criteria REC CUST REC CARD REC ORDER REC PAYMENT REC NOTE End of Data lol Jm Figure 11 Create File Filter Formatted Record Types Select the record types for which a filter sub clause expression will be defined by entering
77. command using field_col or field_col1 field_col2 that do not reference at least one field defined by the BOUNDS columns as being eligible for search then the following error message is returned ZZSD280E No fields selected within the current bounds for the ONLY command If a field column is specified on the ONLY command that is not part of the display e g a group field or a field that has been removed from display by a SELECT command then the following error message is returned ZZSD179E Data element field_col is not selected in the current view of record type record type of structure struct_name For character data type fields a string compare is performed For numeric data type fields binary packed decimal floating point zoned etc then the following will occur 1 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are not specified the search string is interpreted as a signed numeric value and an arithmetic compare is performed against the field s formatted numeric value The length and data type of the numeric field and the number of digits in the search value are not significant e g ONLY 67 Finds numeric fields with value 67 e g 0067 67 00 0 0670E 03 and character fields containing the string 67 e g 167 Baker Street If the search string is non numeric then numeric data type fields are not searched Therefore to bypass searching numeric data type fields explicitly set the search string to be character or hex usi
78. default value for this field should a new record be added It can be defined either as a numeric or quoted string constant or as an expression referring to field names within the current record remark A comment string placed in either single or double quotes ENUMeration Data Definition Create an enumeration definition or specify the name of an existing enumeration for use with the current field enam may be specified to allocate a name to the enumeration definition or as a reference to an enumeration already defined within the current field definition clause Each enumerator should be specified in the form display value where display will be displayed when this field contains value e g enum HLAsm 16 Cobol 17 P11 40 display should be enclosed in quotes if it is to contain blanks display may be specified without a corresponding value in which case the previous value plus 1 will be implied Data type of a single field within the record RTO BINTeger Defines a field to be interpreted as binary whole number occupying n_bits bits where n_bits defaults to 1 BIT Defines a field to be interpreted as a series of ONJOFF 1 0 switches occupying n_bits bits where n_bits defaults to 1 CHARacter Defines a field to be interpreted as a fixed length character string occupying n_bytes bytes where n_bytes defaults to 1 CHARVarying Defines a field to be interpreted as a variable length character string padded with blanks to
79. defined as max_bytes bytes defaulting to 0 The actual length of the string is defined by a len_bytes bytes binary integer at the start of the field Default for len_bytes is 2 The value of the exclusive parameter indicates whether this length integer includes or exIcudes the length field itself Permissable values are EXCLUSIVE the default and INCLUSIVE XVARCHAR 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 102 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE Defines a field to be interpreted as a variable length character string The maximum possible length of the string is defined as max_bytes bytes defaulting to 0 The actual length of the string is defined by field name en_field which must be numeric ZONEd Defines a field to be interpreted as a zoned decimal character number allowing precision number of digits in total of which scale number of digits will be displayed following the decimal point Default for precision is 1 Default for scale is 0 Examples lt sd create structure lt sd edit CBL SDE EMP CBL CBLI STRUCT EMP using CBL CBLI STRUCT EMP from cobol CBL COPYBOOK COBOL EMP Sample commands as they may appear in the user s HOME CMX file The first command will generate a new SDO structure from a single COBOL copy book the second will edit a file using the SDO to apply record mapping lt sd create structure REC TYPEO1 struct CBL CBLI SDO FILSTRUC REC TYPE char 2 N
80. file If a start line label name has been specified a valid entry in theis field is mandatory SDE COPY File Panel SELCOPY i SDE COPY Fil m File Help wS wR Command gt ISI SE DES DEE Lines 1 20 of 22 Enter the file id of an existing Sequential or VSAM data set PDS PDSE library data set and Member name or HFS file path from which Lines are to be copied Source Fileld DSN Path gt Member gt Volume gt If dataset is uncataloged Line Numbers Optionally specify subset of lines to be copied First Line gt y Last Line gt ei O zero gt last line Optionally enter a target line label name with preceding If not target is the first line containing line command ng BEFORE otherwise the first line of the display Target Line gt Before After Target Line gt AFTER Press lt Enter gt to execute COPY lt PF3 gt END to cancel Figure 40 SDE Copy File Panel The SDE Copy File panel ZZSGSDEC is an interactive panel window opened on executing primary command COPY without any parameters This panel is used to copy lines from an existing sequential or VSAM data set PDS PDSE library member or HFS file into data being edited in the focus SDE edit view Panel Input Fields Source Fileld Fields that identify the source file from which lines are to be copied DSN Path gt An absolute or relative HFS Path name or the fully qualified name of a sequential data set or PDS PDSE library Quotes are permitted but un
81. focus was last placed This may be the focus window or if the focus window is not an SDE window view the last SDE window view visited The concept of a current SDE window view is important when executing SDE commands from a CBLe text edit view via the SDATA command which directs the SDE command to the current SDE window view Using SDATA is particularly useful for issuing stored SDE commands from within a CMX file Default Record Type SDE windows are capable of displaying records of more than one record type simultaneously within the same display area Because many SDE commands and functions operate on records of a single specific record type the concept of a default record type exists for use when a record type has not been specifically identified via a command parameter The following identifies the order in which the default record type is determined by SELCOPY i SDE 1 The record type of the focus line if the focus line is a visible record or an EXCLUDED shadow line 2 The prevailing setting of DRECTYPE The value of DRECTYPE is assigned when the SDE window is opened and is established in the following order 1 The record type that is the first non generic argument specified on the VIEW parameter of the EDIT or BROWSE command 2 The record type of the RTO in the SDO defined as being the DEFAULT 3 The record type of the first visible record of the edited or browsed data 4 The record type of the first RTO in the SDO The DRECTYP
82. gt field in the top right corner of the window display Note that the first data record in any multi record view will always be preceded by its complete group of column header lines For single record views the standard headers are always visible at the top of the display area and are not included as part of the scrollable text Each non header line within a single record view is identified as being a field data line UP and DOWN scroll commands will cause the window display area to be adjusted by a number of lines determined by the number of multi record view data records and shadow lines or single record view field data lines Other lines in the display area i e Header lines and blank filler lines that precede a group of header lines or follow the End of Data record are not included in this calculation Attempting to scroll up beyond the first entry data record shadow line or field data line will make the first entry the first line of the display Multi Record View Scrolling Where the cursor is positioned at an offset within a column header line the cursor is deemed to be located at the same offset within the data record that immediately follows the group of header lines Therefore UP CURSOR will operate successfully when the cursor is positioned within a header line The first data record in the display must be preceded by all of its header lines To accomodate this the magnitude by which the display is scrolled upwards may be
83. gt gt NOEOL gt lt NOEOL or BIFNOEOL has no arguments and applies to HFS files containing record EOL characters This function returns 1 if the focus record or segment is flagged as having been split due to no EOL delimiter being found within the file s declared LRECL length EOL gt i e record length is graeter than LRECL Otherwise the function returns 0 Because NOEOL has no arguments it may be expressed simply as NOEOL POS gt gt POS stringl y string2 been Fon D gt lt Seege Start E POS or BIFPOS returns the position of the first occurrence of string1 in string2 starting the search from position startin string2 A search is successful only if string1 exists entirely between the start position and the last position of string2 If string1 is not found 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 57 SDE Concepts POS 0 is returned If not specified start defaults to be the first position of string2 Note that the data type of both string1 and string2 must be character and the data type of start must be a positive integer otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field name SourceText exists in the focus record type and contains character data c To be or not to bei POS be SourceText 0 POS c be SourceText 4 POS c be SourceText 5 17 POS c SourceText 10 13
84. in the USE WHEN expresssion It is also sensitive to changes to data in when record type formatting is disabled i e field name Unmappeo or field reference number 1 Where one of these ID field changes is detected or where the length of the record segment data is altered via CHANGE or RECLEN updates the ID flag ID gt is set on for the changed record segment This is intended to notify the user that the record segment data may no longer satisfy the USE WHEN criteria for its assigned record type In order to allow the user the opportunity to complete any changes being made SELCOPY i does not automatically remap records with the ID flag set on The records selected for remap by IDENTIFY depend on the current value of the IDSCOPE option By default IDSCOPE is set to CHANGED indicating that all records flagged as having been changed may be selected for remap Alternatively IDSCOPE FLAGGED indicates that only records with the ID flag set on may be selected for remap 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 135 Command Line Primary Commands IDENTIFY The remap of records performed on execution of IDENTIFY may be individually undone and subsequently redone using the UNDO lt PF22 gt and REDO lt PF23 gt commands Parameters Note that in single record view the SDE window view displays the focus line record or record segment of the equivalent multi record view n_lines Specifies the number of lines recor
85. is displayed in a CBLe text edit window which allows the user to employ standard text editing techniques to re order and or exclude the fields from the SELECT command and so select and re order the display of table row fields The SELECT operation may be executed by placing the cursor on the first line of the SELECT command beginning with lt and pressing lt F16 lt Record Information Configure display of record length RBA and flags Opens the SDEUTRI sub window which prompts the user to select the record information to be displayed at the start of all rows in the current SDE window view The Display Record Information option must be selected before any of the selected record information fields will be displayed to activate each of the options below y Record Information a Lude RBAYTTR column Decimal Hex lude Record length column lude Flags column f Record is on file i Record is inserted c Record is changed s Record requires save Figure 36 SDE Browse Edit Record Info Window lt Enter gt actions the information display in the SDE edit view but keeps the SDEUTRI window open lt PF3 gt closes the window and returns focus to the Utilities Menu See the RECINFO SET QUERY EXTRACT option for details of the individual record information fields Shadow line Options Configure display of SHADOWed records Opens the SDEUTSH sub window which has option fields indicating whether shadow lines are displayed for reco
86. length 1 otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field names XText and XLen exist in the focus record type and contain character datac The quality of mercy is not strained and binary integer value 16 respectively SUBSTR XText 29 strained SUBSTR XText 5 XLen quality of mercy SUBSTR XText 29 15 c x strainedxxxxxxx SUBSTR XText 29 15 x strainedXXXXXXX gt gt TRANSLATE string gt lt 4 4 tabo t to ARS AS tabi pad TRANSLATE or BIFTRANSLATE returns the character string string with characters at offsets in the input translate table tabi translated to characters at equivalent offsets in the output translate table tabo Characters in string that are not included in tabi are not translated If both tabo and tabi are specified then e f tabo has a shorter length than tabi then tabo is padded on the right to the length of tabi using the pad character e f tabo has a longer length than tabi then tabo is truncated to the length of tabi If tabo is specified but tabi is not tabi defaults to be all 255 single byte characters in the range X 00 to X FF If tabi is specified but tabo is not tabo defaults to be a string equal to the length of tabi containing only pad characters If neither tabo nor tabi are specified then string is s
87. line command D lt n gt where nis the number of segments E Alternatively delete a block of segments using prefix command DD on the first and last segments to be On deleting a primary base segment the record to which the primary segment belongs is deleted and its secondary segments are appended to segments belonging to the previous record Deleting a secondary segment simply removes that segment from the record hence reducing the record length All subsequent segments in the record are shifted left to fill the gap left by the deleted segment INSERT Insert individual segments following the focus segment using command INSERT or prefix line command I lt n gt where nis the number of segments of the focus segment type to be inserted Inserting a new primary segment inserts a new record in the file If the inserted primary segment is inserted before a secondary segment i e in the middle of an existing record then the existing record is split so that all secondary segments following the inserted primary segment now belong to the new record Inserting a new secondary segment simply adds the segment to the focus record COPY and DUPLICATE Copy individual segments using prefix line command C lt n gt where nis the number of segments to be copied Alternatively copy a block of segments using prefix command CC on the first and last segments to be copied Prefix commands A or B must be used to specify whether segments are to be copied After
88. line of the current display area becomes the first line of the scrolled display n_lines Scroll down a specified number of lines The data record shadow line or field data line that is n_ lines below the current line becomes the first line of the scrolled display Examples down 5 Scroll the display area down 5 lines See Also LEFT RIGHT UP 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 110 Command Line Primary Commands DROP DDROP DROP DDROP Syntax gt DROP SEruce_ Name EE SSS SS SS SSeS Se SS SSS SSS gt lt gt gt gt DDROP seruct name Saas SSS SS EE gt lt Description Drop from storage a Structure Definition Object SDO used within SDE An SDO file structure provides the information required to interpret indiviudal logical fields within a file s data records If changes have been made to the structure since it was last saved using SAVESTRUCTURE USE WHEN criteria may have been added for instance then the user will be prompted with a dialog asking whether or not the changes are to be saved DDROP removes the SDO without prompting the user to save changes Parameters struct_name The name of the structure SDO being dropped See Also CREATE STRUCTURE SAVESTRUCTURE DUPLICATE Syntax fase SSS Sa gt gt DUPlicate A A a a a tm gt lt n lines Description Duplicate the focus line record a specified number of times By default DUPLICAT
89. line of the display Records that are suppressed excluded or not selected cannot be viewed within a single record view Scrolling left and right will display the previous and next records respectively that have not been suppressed Scrolling up and down will display the previous and next fields within the record respectively A group of 3 field column heading lines are displayed within the window display area immediately above the first field in view Header Line 1 Record Type Information Identical to Header line 1 in a multi record view Header line 2 Record Information Contains the record or record segment sequence number within the file any assigned record flags as displayed by the RECINFO option and the record length Header line 3 Field Data Headers Contains the column headers for the record data that follows The headers displayed in this line and so the format of the data displayed beneath may be altered using the SHOW command Column headers and data displayed for each occur left to right as follows and may be changed by setting the Ref If SHOW NUMBER is in effect the Ref header is visible so that field reference data element numbers assigned by SELCOPY i to each field are displayed Field If SHOW LEVEL is not in effect the Field header is displayed to the right of the Ref header For each field entry that follows only the field name is displayed and for array field elements the vector entry subscript is inclu
90. may have been defined as packed decimal integer floating point etc If the record data is invalid for the assigned data type the expression will return a false condition SOURCE The SOURCE parameter identifies the input file data set or PDS PDSE library member and the type of input to be used to generate the record type definition If COBOL or PL1 then the appropriate compiler will be invoked to compile the source file and if the compiler return code is within the range of acceptable values See options MAXCOBOLRC and MAXPL1RC use the resulting ADATA file to build the record type definition RTO If the source is an existing COBOL or PL1 ADATA output file then the RTO is generated directly from the ADATA source no compilation is required SDO source may be used to copy an RTO definition from an existing SDO structure whereas STRUCTURE indicates that the RTO is to be constructed using in line record definition syntax COBOL PL1 member_name copybook_library member_name Identify a COBOL or PL1 copy book containing the group field definition major or minor structure whose name matches record_type specified by the NAME parameter copybook_library member_name specifies the fully qualified PDS PDSE library DSN and member name If a library search chain is provided via the LIBRARY parameter then member name may be specified without the library DSN In this case the first instance of member_name found within the search chain will be
91. n and L n These remove the EXCLUDED flag from the First or Last records respectively and optionally n 1 records that follow precede that belong to a block of excluded records regardless of record type Alternatively the RESET EXCLUDED command may be executed to remove the EXCLUDED flag from All excluded records of a specific record type SDE commands that perform searches and selection on records may also alter the EXCLUDED flag setting of individual records in the display See Searching Data Records and commands FIND LOCATE WHERE MORE and LESS Displaying Selected Columns By default all fields belonging to formatted records in the SDE window view are displayed in the order in which they occur within the data records Once the SDE window view has been opened the SELECT command may be used to re order and or restrict the number of fields displayed in records that are assigned the specified record type In addition to this the HOLD parameter may be used to indicate that a specified field and all fields before it are to be held when scrolling the display of the record data left and right The supplied macro SDESEL may be executed to generate a SELECT command in a temporary CBLe text edit view referencing all fields in the focus record group or all record types within the SDO 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 21 Getting Started with SDE Displaying Selected Columns This is particularly useful when dealing
92. occurs if string7 is found at the start of a word within the data being searched i e the matched text must precede an alphanumeric character and either be preceded by a non alphanumeric character or be at the start of a line or field SUFFIX For non numeric search strings only SUFFIX indicates that a successful match only occurs if string7 is found at the end of a word within the data being searched i e the matched text must be preceded by an alphanumeric character and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field WORD For non numeric search strings only WORD indicates that a successful match only occurs if string1 is found to be a complete word within the data being searched i e the matched text must either be preceded by a non alphanumeric character or be at the start of a line or field and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field EX X Search EXCLUDED data records only By default both visible and EXCLUDED records are searched CHANGE does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED NX Search only visible data records i e not EXCLUDED By default both visible and EXCLUDED records are searched CHANGE does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED posl The first position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched For formatted records this is a position in the expanded record Only those fields or parts of fields
93. of LOCK TABLE options Default is not to perform any explict table locking prior to load Recommended COMMIT TONLOAD Perform a COMMIT following the initial load of rows to be edited thus releasing all DB2 table locks performed during load of the data This includes any explicit table locks applied via the LOCKTABLE parameter Default is not to perform a COMMIT following load of the table rows AUDIT Open a new SELCOPY i DB2 audit data set to record changes to the edited table made during this edit session See Audit Trail Functions for details Default is not to perform edit auditing FORMAT Specifies the format TABLE or SINGLE in which record data will be displayed in the initial SDE view See FORMAT for structured data edit for details Default is FORMAT TABLE READONLY Perform read only edit of the data Attempts to save changes made to the data during the SDE edit session will give an error FROM lt ROW gt n Equivalent to FROM RECORD n FROM ROW n specifies that rows are to be displayed beginning at row number nin the DB2 results table returned by the SQL query The first row displayed becomes row 1 within the SDE window edit view Rows that occur before this row number are not included within the edit session 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 118 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT Default is row 1 FOR n_rows lt ROWS gt Equivalent to FOR n_recs RECORDS FOR n_rows ROWS specifies the maximum num
94. of importance if the user wants to first verify that integrity between the required segment mapping and its identification criteria is maintained prior to saving the data and ending the edit session Remap of a record and reset of the ID flag is achieved using the primary command IDENTIFY or prefix line commands ID lt n gt or IDD Note that the remap is not performed automatically in order to allow the user the opportunity to make further changes to the data before executing IDENTIFY Note that if ID field values do not satisfy any secondary segment mapping identification critera the remainder of that record is displayed as unformatted data UnmappedSeg Remap of a record may also be required where an update has occurred for an ID field identified in a USE WHEN expression by its unformatted record position and length or when segments have been inserted deleted duplicated copied or moved For this reason the default action of the IDENTIFY command is to not only remap records containing segments with the ID flag but also records flagged as having changed segments See option IDSCOPE to force IDENTIFY to remap only those records containing a segment with ID flag set on Full Edit Functionality Update in place edit only supports changing data in existing segments without changing the the length of a segment In contrast full function edit supports changing data changing the length of a segment and also the addition and removal of record segm
95. of the terminal CCSID 0 in batch cp is the code page of the terminal CCSID 0 in batch bccsid is the default batch input CCSID This will have be set to the user s terminal CCSID during interactive execution of any of the SELCOPY i structured data commands if not already set and can be changed with the SET CCSID command EXTRACT Rexx variables lccsid 1 The terminal CCSID 0 in batch ccsia 2 hee terminal character set 0 in batch Leg Ire terminal code page 0 in batch ccsia 4 pe default batch input CCSID COLATTRIBUTES SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax O E COLAGETIbutes JON A ee gt lt 2 SET i le OFF gt gt Query COLAttributes O O e gt lt gt gt EXTract COLAttributes gt lt Description Applicable to DB2 table edit and browse only this option controls the display of the DB2 results table column attributes when a row is presented in single format view See commands FORMAT and ZOOM Column attributes are displayed under header PKUIFCND and reflects information obtained from the DB2 catalog table SYSIBM SYSCOLUMNS as follow u which indicates that this column is ea Displays n which indicates that this column supports a null value Een blank b Displays one of the following single character DEFAULT value indicators See description of the DEFAULT column of table SYSIBM SYSCOLUMNS in the IBM DB2 SQL Reference manual SET COLATTRIBUTE
96. on the last line of a block of lines to be duplicated n number of times Enter the DUPLICATE primary command to duplicate the focus line a specific number of times e g DUPLICATE 3 The duplicate operation treats typed and untyped lines of data identically i e it is not sensitve to any assigned record type Following a duplicate operation record type assignment processing occurs for all records affected by the operation Following the duplicate operation the duplicated lines appear immediately following the last line selected for duplication and the cursor is placed on the first character of the first duplicated line Only excluded or non excluded records or segments may be duplicated Records that are SUPPRESSED or NOT SELECTED are unaffected by duplicate operations Undo and Redo Changes A new change level is added for each field whose contents have changed since the last 3270 transaction Having made changes to field data during the edit session the UNDO primary command assigned to lt PF22 gt by default may be used to undo the change represented by the last change level Repeatedly executing UNDO will undo each previous change in the change level stack Where changes have been undone they may be re applied one change level at a time using the REDO primary command assigned to lt PF23 gt by default 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 28 Getting Started with SDE Undo and Redo Changes The number of ch
97. option PAGEWIDTH otherwise the default is the maximum record length of the output file PAGEDEPTH PD n_lines Set the print output page depth to n_lines lines Default is the value set by option PAGEDEPTH See Also PAGEDEPTH PAGEWIDTH LEFT RIGHT QQUIT Syntax gt gt DOE gt lt Description Close the current SDE window view only If additional SDE views exist for the data then these will remain open If only one SDE edit view exists for the data then any unsaved changes to the data will be discarded However if a non temporary structure SDO is used to map the record data and changes have been made to that structure during the course of the edit session e g USE WHEN then the user will be prompted to save the changed structure to its structured data file SDF See command SAVESTRUCTURE Parameters QQUIT has no parameters See Also END CANCEL QUERY Description See SET QUERY EXTRACT Options 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 1 o bi Command Line Primary Commands QUERY RCHANGE Syntax oo URC HEN G A A A E gt lt Description Repeat the find and replace performed by the last CHANGE command The RCHANGE search will be executed on records that are of the same record type as that used by the last CHANGE command Where the last CHANGE issued was CHANGE LAST or CHANGE PREV RCHANGE will perform a CHANGE PREV operation otherwise RCHANGE performs a CHANGE NEXT op
98. or Before the selected segment Duplicate a segment using command DUPLICATE or prefix line command R lt n gt where nis the number times the segment is to be duplicated Alternatively duplicate a block of segments using prefix command RR lt n gt on the first and 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 47 SDE Concepts Full Edit Operations last segments to be duplicated The effect of a copy or duplicate operation on existing primary and secondary segments is the same as for insert MOVE Move individual segments using prefix line command M lt n gt where nis the number of segments to be moved Alternatively move a block of segments using prefix command MM on the first and last segments to be moved Prefix commands A or B must be used to specify whether segments are to be moved After or Before the selected segment The effect of a move operation on existing primary and secondary segments located at the destination of the move is the same as for insert The effect of a move operation on primary and secondary segments immediately preceding and following the original location of the moved segments is the same as for delete Expressions A selection of SDE commands support an expression as parameter input e g The Edit and Browse FILTER parameter LOCATE WHERE and USE An expression consists of one or more terms literal strings numerical values field values function calls or sub expressions and zero or more operator
99. or only the current view VIEW QUERY Response The current setting of the RESERVEDLEVEL option FILE or VIEW EXTRACT Rexx variables lreservedleve1 1 The current setting of the RESERVEDLEVEL option FILE or VIEW SAVEOPTIONS SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt SAVEOPTions ON gt lt SET OFF gt gt Query SAVEOPTions eae gt lt gt gt EXTract SAVEOPTions gt lt Description 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 225 SET QUERY EXTRACT SAVEOPTIONS SET QUERY EXTRACT Option This option controls whether or not the following SDE options are saved for use in subsequent SDE views opened in the current and subsequent SELCOPY i sessions ABBREVIATION IDWARNING QSEPARATOR ASCII LEVEL RECINFO AUTOSAVE LOADWARNING REFERENCE AUXDSNPREFIX MAPPING SCALE CAPS MSGLINE TYPE COLATTRIBUTES MULTIPOINT UNDOING COLOUR COLOR OFFSET UNNAMED GROUP PAD WRAP IDSCOPE PREFIX ZEROS Option SAVEOPTIONS takes effect at the Global level SET Value ON OFF Save of selected SDE options is set on or off As distributed the default is ON QUERY Response The current setting of the SAVEOPTIONS option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables saveoptions The current setting of the SAVEOPTIONS option ON or OFF SCALE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax
100. or record segments SELCOPY i NBJ CBLINST CBL1i1091 SZZ2SSAM2 ZZSDATSA 2 using NBJ CBLI Sx File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwaplList Help wS wR x Command Scroll gt Csr Record type REC CUST Fixed 196 Offset 8 Data elements 16 Record 0000000141 Flags f Length 196 Data 0 PRPRPOTTUUONWE M um booubuoumosscs 156 Rh momo hi baM bunon WN nu 3 78f j2foa Ramstein Hans UK DHA SBR DONCASTER 124 Springwell Lane hansrams abc co 01302 619928 07941 922766 230 48 LASTNAME FIRSTNAME COUNTRY POSTCODE Eien TUDDDDTADDDDDD NA Uu UI HHHHHHHHHHHH PEEEBBPBPYDOVOU a a e le 1 00 0 CD UU Figure 15 SDE Formatted Single Record View Notes 1 An unformatted record in single record view is displayed with a single field name of UnMapped or UnMappedSeg and all record data displayed to the right of the field name 2 Executing ZOOM in a FORMAT TABLE view is equivalent to executing the FORMAT SINGLE command 3 Executing ZOOM when already in single record view will switch back to a multiple record view preserving current record type formatting and hex display Displaying Hexadecimal Representation of Record Data FORMAT HEX displays the unformatted record s data in both character and up down hexadecimal Alternatively the character and up down hexadecimal representation may be applied to all fields within a formatted or unformatted record HE HEX ON OFF SELCOPY i CBL DIST CBLI SDE SAM
101. parameter will be included by default record_type Record with field name UnMapped may be used to perform a filter on the unformatted record data whether or not a structure USING struct_name has been specified In this way a filter may test all records regardless of their assigned record type INCLUDE and EXCLUDE parameters are mutually exclusive WHERE expr WHERE applies further filter conditions to records assigned to the record type specified by the last INCLUDE record_type or EXCLUDE record_type parameter processed expr is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record_type field names and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of the WHERE expression must be numeric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition The WHERE expression is applied to each record assigned the record type record_type and if the result is true the record is selected for include or exclude as indicated by the prevailing INCLUDE or EXCLUDE filter If multiple INCLUDE EXCLUDE record_type WHERE expressions exist for the same record type then a logical OR is implied for all the expressions relating to that record type STOPAFTER n_hits When the number of records selected by the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE filter reaches the value specified by STOPAFTER n_hits then no further filter testing occurs If an
102. preceeds it i e It identifies potential values for the data mapped by the conditional variable field name Specification of a condition name VALUE clause within an expression tests the associated field entry for the value or range of values associated with the clause Therefore no expression operator should follow the condition name VALUE clause name e g A COBOL copy book processed by SELCOPY i to format data may contain the following 03 RECORD TYP A 05 RT PIC X 001 88 RI ARTIST VALUE 1 88 RI ALBUM VALUE 2 88 RT TRACK VALUE 3 88 RI ANY VALUE 1 THRU 3 88 RT NONE VALUE 4 THRU 9 Data formatted using this copy book may then use the condition names specified by the 88 levels to test the contents of the preceeding lower level RT field e g To display only records which heve RT 2 the following primary command may be used WHERE RT ALBUM Function Call 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 49 SDE Concepts Expression Operators A function call is a call to one of SELCOPY i s internal routines which return a single result string or numerical value The function name is a an unquoted character string immediately followed by zero or more comma separated function arguments bracketed by a left and right parenthesis The data type of the value returned from a function call will be that defined by the function See Function Calls for all available functions supported by the SELCOPY i SDE environme
103. ranges that occur in records that match a specific record type Records that are assigned a different record type and fields that have been removed from view by a SELECT command are automatically excluded from the search e g To find the first occurrence of the mixed case string James within the character fields LASTNAME or FIRSTNAME field reference 4 which belong to records of the same record type as the focus record then enter the following from the SDE command prompt FIND FIRST C James LASTNAME 4 Un quoted numeric search strings are treated as numeric values when testing non character data fields i e the value of the numeric field data must be arithmetically equal to the search value When testing character fields numeric search strings are treated as character data e g To find all occurrences of the value 1 within any numeric field or the character string 1 in any character field within a record of the same record type as the focus record then enter the following from the SDE command prompt FIND ALL 1 ALL If the specified occurrence ALL FIRST LAST NEXT or PREV of the search string or numeric value is found then 1 If the record is EXCLUDED the EXCLUDED flag is set off so that the record is brought back into view 2 The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the string or numeric field 3 If necessary scrolling occurs to display the found data 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE
104. record type name of the ith RTO in the SDO 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 223 SET QUERY EXTRACT REFERENCE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option REFERENCE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax SE een REPSrenCe sN SSS Sse SSS ee Se gt lt le SET po OFF GEN gt gt Query REP SrenCe A O O SS gt lt gt gt EXTract REFerence gt lt Description This option controls the display of the reference numbers nn occupying a row in the field column headings for SD edit browse The REFERENCE option operates at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Reference number display is set ON or OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the REFERENCE option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables lreference 1 The current setting of the REFERENCE option ON or OFF REGION QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query nee REGION EE EE ee gt lt gt gt EXTr ct REGion 2 2 2 2 5 se gt lt Description QUERY EXTRACT REGION provides information about the private area region for the current MVS TCB REGION is not an option for the SET command QUERY Response Two pairs of values indicating the available private area storage region limit and high value both below and above the 16M line e g REGION Below 16M Limit 9412608 High Value 9412608 Above 16M Limit 33554432 High Value 3355443
105. records deleted or inserted The third number following Alt n n m on the status line indicates the number of change levels If this number is followed by an asterisk then it is possible to REDO previous UNDO commands Parameters None See Also UNDO UNDOING SET QUERY EXTRACT Undo and Redo Changes REFRESH Description SDE CLI command REFRESH performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command REFRESH See REFRESH in CBLe Text Edit documentation 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 164 Command Line Primary Commands REFRESH REPLACE Syntax gt gt REPlace Ho EE EE gt lt fileid namel name2 1 Note 1 If a group of lines are not specified using line label names then a group of lines must be specified using one of the following line prefix area commands C or CC Copy if the group of lines in the current file is to be preserved following successful execution of REPLACE M or MM Move if the group of lines in the current file is to be deleted following successful execution of REPLACE Description Replace the contents of a sequential or VSAM data set PDS PDSE library member or HFS file with a group of lines extracted from the current SDE edit or browse view The target sequential or library data set may be uncataloged If the target file does not already exist then one of the following will occur 1 If output is to a membe
106. sign i e fixed zoned decimal value Escaped Quotes Character literal strings used in EXCLUDE CHANGE FIND ONLY and any SDE expression now support the escaping of the apostrophe and quote characters when the same character is used to delimit the string For details see 0 Expression Terms 0 CHANGE 0 EXCLUDE 0 FIND 0 ONLY 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 2 Summary of Changes First Edition October 2012 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 3 Introduction to SDE Data set records may have an associated file structure that maps field information position length and data type for all data within each data set record These structures often exist as a PL 1 or COBOL copybook The SELCOPY i Structured Data Environment SDE allows users to display and process structured data sets using a pre defined SDE structure so that record data is formatted and arranged in field columns An SDE structure may be generated from a copybook or using SDE s Create Structure internal syntax and can contain a number of mappings one for each different type of data set record SDE runs as a sub component of the CBLe Text Editor so that window views displaying structured file data may be opened as child windows of a CBLe or SELCOPY Interactive MDI Frame window SELCOPY i SDE enables users to do the following e Display copy edit and update structured data e Concurrently display reco
107. specified then as many of the set of selected fields in the current view as there are values in the list of field values are used as the default In this case the order of the field columns is equal to the order in which fields are displayed in the current view VALUES field_ value An individual field value within a list of field values to be inserted in a corresponding field_col entry in the field column list If one or more field_col entries are specified i e a field list is specified then there must be the same number of field_value values to correspond with each field_col entry If a character string field value contains special characters blanks or commas then it must be delimited by quotation mark or apostrope characters If the value contains characters which match the delimiting characters then each occurrence of this character must be escaped by prefixing it with the escape character The escape character is the same as the delimiting character e g VALUES He said It s John s bike n_lines Number of identical records to be inserted or for RRDS VRDS Update in place edit the number of lines to be searched for Empty Slots Default is 1 Examples insert SeqNum FirstName LastName JobTitle Salary Val 283 Jacob Smith Systems Engineer 35 950 00 Insert a record of the default record type populating the specified list of fields with the explicit values in the corresponding list of field values All
108. storage Record Type Object A Record Type Object RTO is a single record structure definition within an SDO which contains the following information 1 Field offset length and data format of all fields within a data record 2 USE WHEN expression which defines selection criteria that identify the data records to which the RTO will apply So that its data can be formatted correctly each structured record within a data set should have characteristics that match the selection criteria defined by an RTO Each RTO is referenced by a name which is unique within the SDO This name is also referred to as the record type and is allocated to an RTO when it is defined CREATE STRUCTURE The RTO record type may be used as a generic description of those data records that are assigned that specific RTO See Record Type Assignment e g Client1 data records are considered to be records that are assigned an RTO with the name Client1 An RTO and therfore the SDO may be altered e g via the USE WHEN command and saved to a Structure Definition File Record Type Object Data Length The RTO data length is the sum of all field lengths defined by the RTO If all RTO fields are of fixed length the RTO data length is a fixed value If however the RTO includes variable length field definitions or a vriable number of repeating field groups the RTO data length will encompass a range of possible values In this case the RTO data length is variable and ha
109. string Search backwards from the bottom of the file data i e the last position of the last data record to exclude the last record of the default record type to contain an occurrence of the search string Search forwards from the current cursor location to exclude the next record of the default record type to contain an occurrence of the search string If the cursor is not within the window s data display area the search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the default record type Search backwards from the current cursor location to exclude the previous record of the default record type to contain an occurrence of the search string If the cursor is not within the window s data display area the backwards search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the default record type For non numeric search strings only CHARS indicates that a successful match occurs if the search string is found anywhere within the data being searched For non numeric search strings only PREFIX indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found at the start of a word within the data being searched i e the matched text must precede an alphanumeric character and either be preceded by a non alphanumeric character or be at the start of a line or field 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 123 Comm
110. supported by EXTRACT allow the user to extract information about individual records and also extract record text SDE options may be initialised via the following methods 1 The SData section of the INI file which is processed at SELCOPY i startup 2 The SDEPROF macro which is executed at the start of every SDE session 3 The SDE CLI command SET executed from the command line or an SDE macro 4 The Edit Options entry of the Options drop down menu on the parent MDI window menu bar SET options take effect at the following different levels Global The option affects all SDE edited files The option may be set differently for each SDE edited file The option may be set differently for each SDE window view of the same file Parameters option_name The SDE environment option s For EXTRACT multiple options maybe requested at once by separating each with a blank or forward slash value For SET the new value to be assigned for option_name Supported Options MAXPL1RC DESCRIPTION DRECTYPE RECTYPES REFERENCE REGION RESERVED Examples lt sd query shad lt sd shad off all lt extract reference scale type 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 187 SET QUERY EXTRACT ABBREVIATION SET QUERY EXTRACT Option ABBREVIATION SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt ABBREViation ON gt lt a SET l es OFF
111. that fall within the position range will be searched Fields will be searched in the order that they occur within the display area pos may be a positive or negative integer value not zero and must be a value that is less than or equal to the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data the length of the expanded record A negative value represents a position in the record relative to the end of the record Therefore where position 1 references the 1st character in the record position 1 references the last character For all display formats string is treated as being non numeric and the search is actioned on the character representation of the record data pos2 The last position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched Like pos1 pos2 may be a positive or negative integer value not zero If pos references a position within the record data which is higher than that referenced by pos2 then the pos and pos2 values are swapped If pos2 is greater than the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data greater than the length of the expanded record then pos2 is set equal to the maximum or expanded record length Default is pos7 plus the length of the search string minus 1 ALL Search all eligible field columns in the current formatted display field_col An individual field column to be searched within a formatted display The field column may be identified by its reference num
112. the record type STRUCTURE field and any other STRUCTURE fields in the RTO definition Therefore the data elements value may be greater than the number of fields in view Note that a repeating group array contains a fixed number of data elements which is reflected in the total data element count Each array element posesses a one or more dimensional vectors with each vector having been defined maximum number of entries Array vector entries are not reflected in the data element count For SDE DB2 table row display this header identifies 1 The record type Row name assigned to the table rows default is the table owner ID name 2 The record type format Fixed or Variable followed by the record type length i e the sum of the record type field lengths in parentheses Note that for variable record types a maximum minimum length pair is displayed 3 The number of columns defined by the DB2 results table Header Line 2 Field Name 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 32 SDE Concepts Field Column Heading Lines Where present the names of fields selected for display are used as the column header names and are located in the second line of the column header This header line may not be switched off Header Line 3 Field Reference The third column header line displays the field number reference within the record By default when table format is specified the fields displayed will be the lowest level of a nes
113. the group of records belonging to fileid to be copied into the focus SDE edit view All remaining fileid records are copied if the n_lines value is greater than the number of remaining fileid records men Default is asterisk all remaining fileid records AFTER BEFORE Identifies whether lines are to be copied after or before the target line in the focus SDE view Default is AFTER name A label name identifying the target line of copy If not specified then the first line containing line prefix area command A or B is the target line otherwise the focus line Examples copy SYSA CBL MACLIB FS23T901 22 before MAC Copy records from line 22 to the end of the file from member SYSA CBL MACLIB FS23T901 before the line in the focus SDE view identified by line label MAC See Also CLIPBOARD CREATE REPLACE CREATE Syntax gt gt CREate 4 4 4 4 gt lt fileid namel name2 Note 1 If a group of lines are not specified using line label names then a group of lines must be specified using one of the following line prefix area commands Cor CC Copy if the group of lines in the current file is to be preserved following successful execution of CREATE M or MM Move if the group of lines in the current file is to be deleted following successful execution of CREATE Description Create a new sequential or
114. the number of records displayed Depending on the format of the file the FROM value may identify the first record by means of a record number decimal or hex numeric value VSAM KSDS record key character or hex string or VSAM ESDS relative byte address decimal or hex numeric value The method of record identification to be used must be indicated by selecting one of the mutually exclusive options Record Key or RBA respectively FROM and FOR may be used in conjunction with FILTER so that the record filter only applies to records first selected by the FROM and or FOR combination Create a record FILTER dataset The FILTER input field accepts a temporary SDE expression or the fileid of a saved file containing an SDE expression The expression when applied to a set of records or record segments tests either true or false and so either selecting or deselecting the record as appropriate Particularly if a filter is to be used for subsequent edit or browse of a file it is recommended that the filter expression is saved to a filter file To generate a filter file either edit a new sequential data set HFS file or PDS PDSE library member and insert Filter Clause syntax or use the Create File Filter panel SELCOPY i re L L m File Help wS wR Ex Command gt Scroll Csr Z SGFLTO Lines 1 20 of 21 PFi Help Filter File PDS E member Sequential or HFS path Dan rPath gt NBI SEECOPYyYT EIERE Member SALESOO1 Volume gt If dataset
115. the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the order by clause SKIPLOCKED Saves an SDE DB2 table edit default for option SKIPLOCKED Ignored unless an isolation level of Cursor Stability CS or Read Stability RS is in effect SKIPLOCKED specifies that any selected rows that are already locked by another process should be skipped and not be included in the edit display See DB2 SQL Reference for details on the SKIP LOCKED DATA clause Default is to allow display of locked rows whenever possible PROTECTPRIMEKEY EDITPRIMEKEY Saves an SDE DB2 table edit default for option PROTECTPRIMEKEY EDITPRIMEKEY Specifies whether data occupying columns that comprise the table s primary key is eligible for update EDITPRIMEKEY or is read only PROTECTPRIMEKEY Default is PROTECTPRIMEKEY WITH CS UR RR RS lt KEEP EXCLUSIVE UPDATE SHR gt Saves an SDE DB2 table edit default for option WITH Specifies a DB2 SQL isolation clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for details on the isolation clause and DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide for details on the effects of isolation level on concurrency and protection of DB2 table data ag KEEP sub parameter options are applicable to isolation levels RR Repeatable Read and RS Read tability only Default isolation level as set by the SELCOPY i DB2 package and plan BIND is CS COMMITONCLEANSAVE COMMITONSAVE COMMITON
116. the unformatted data will be upper cased SET CAPS takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether automatic upper casing is set ON or OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the CAPS option EXTRACT Rexx variables lcaps 1 sd hee current setting of CAPS option ON or OFF CCSID SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax SPS oa sae SSS COS ID EN A A Se A EE O gt lt LE SET gt gt Query EE a a ana ag ge E gt lt gt gt EXTract CCSID gt lt Description This option controls the default Coded Character Set Identifier CCSID used in the XMLGEN command when executed in batch For interactive execution the user s 3270 terminal CCSID is used as the default and cannot be changed by this SET option SET CCSID takes effect at the global level SET Value nnn A valid Coded Character Set Identifier This must be the integer identifier of an EBCDIC single byte character set CCSID supported by the IBM z OS UNICODE character conversion feature QUERY Response ZZSD079I CCSID tccsid CHARACTER SET cs CODE PAGE cp BATCH CCSID bccsid Where 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 193 SET QUERY EXTRACT CCSID SET QUERY EXTRACT Option tccsid is the CCSID associated with the 3270 terminal 0 in batch cs is the character set identifier
117. to TYPE PICTURE Equivalent to TYPE DEFAULT TYPE See Also SET LEVEL OFFSET REFERENCE TYPE SORT Syntax gt gt SORT KEY gt lt Description Sort VSAM KSDS records in the SDE edit view Parameters KEY Supported for VSAM KSDS data sets only sorts records into ascending key sequence During an edit session of a VSAM KSDS data set records may be moved inserted deleted or the the key field updated This parameter allows the user to re order the records in key sequence All records in the display visible EXCLUDED NOT SELECTED and SUPPRESSED are included in a SORT KEY operation SYSCOMMAND TSO CMS Description SDE CLI command SYSCOMMAND performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command SYSCOMMAND See SYSCOMMAND in CBLe Text Edit documentation TEDIT Syntax PROTA CHEO A Se ee gt lt Description Direct a command to the CBLe text edit Environment The TEDIT command allows CBLe commands to be issued from an SDE window command line or SDE edit macro Compare this with the SELCOPY i CLI command SDATA which allows SDE commands to be executed from any type of window so long as a CBLe frame window exists Parameters cble_command Any CBLe CLI command The command is passed to the current CBLe window the CBLe window view on which focus was last placed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 1
118. to each record or record segment has been disabled record data is unformatted then MAP will re enable the assigned record types to reformat the record data Compare with FORMAT SINGLE which does not attempt to re enable the assigned record types Parameters MAP has no parameters See Also FORMAT CHAR UNFMT VEMT ZOOM 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 148 Command Line Primary Commands MAP MARK Description SDE CLI command MARK performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command MARK See MARK in CBLe Text Edit documentation MORE Syntax AAA MORE ata Where cause Sik a a ee gt lt line_flag Description Make visible any EXCLUDED records that are of the default record type and also satisfy the specified where_clause criteria The current line of the display and any records that are already visible are unaffected by the MORE command If MORE is executed with no parameters then all EXCLUDED records that are of the default record type are made visible The record type used on a MORE command becomes the new value of the DRECTYPE option Parameters where_clause where_clause syntax is described fully in documentation for the WHERE command line_flag line_flag may be specified to locate a record or record segment that has been flagged with the requested line flag Each valid line_flag keyword detailed below corresponds to a built in function A description of e
119. up message window is displayed prompting the user to either continue or stop loading records for SDE display and edit The message also provides the user with the option to respect or bypass the load warning when the load theshold is once again encountered on continuing to load records from the data set If the user chooses to interrupt load of the data set s records once the load threshold has been reached then records that have already been loaded are displayed in the SDE window view If the records were loaded for edit then Update in place edit will be used overriding any EDIT REPLACE request for full edit capabilities The purpose of the Load Warning is to allow users to break out of possible time and resource consuming loads of large data sets Note the difference between SDE LOADWARNING and CBLe text edit LOADWARNING which specifies number of bytes loaded instead of number of records SDE SET LOADWARNING has no affect on the CBLe text edit LOADWARNING threshold Load Warning applies only to edit techniques where an attempt is made to load all requested records into storage e g no load warning threshold checks are made for KSDS and AUXILIARY edit techniques The initial LOADWARNING value is set by the INI variable SDE LoadWarning or where this INI option has not been set defaults to 5000 records When SET LOADWARNING is executed the SDE LoadWarning option is set or updated in the User INI file when the SELCOPY i session is closed This mea
120. value The search string is treated as a numeric value when a numeric field is searched in a formatted record view In all other cases a numeric search string is treated as a character string 0 An unquoted character string containing no commas or blanks The search for the character string will be case insensitive so that uppercase and lowercase characters are treated as being the same 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 122 Command Line Primary Commands EXCLUDE VALID INVALID ALL FIRST LAST NEXT PREV CHARS PREFIX 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks The search string may contain embedded commas and blanks and the character string will be case insensitive Two adjacent quotation mark characters that are embedded in a search string which is enclosed by the same quotation mark characters will be treated as a single occurrence of the character e g EXCLUDE Jim O Brien Find the character string Jim O Brien 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix C This is equivalent to specifying a quoted search string but that the string search will be case sensitive e g C Book 0 A hexadecimal string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix X 0 A picture string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix P Picture strings use special characters to represen
121. which the column width will be set The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID If field_col does not exist in the specified record_type the following error message is returned ZZSD148E Data element field_col is not defined in record type record_type of structure struct_name width The number of characters to be set as the column width If this value exceeds the column s maximum width then the maximum width value is used FOR RECORD record_type Identifies the record type mapping in which the specified field_col is defined Default is the default record type IN STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the name of the SDO structure in which the specified record_type is defined Required only if a distinction is to be made between multiple data sets displayed in SDE views each using different SDO structure definitions but where the specified record_type is defined in more than one of the structures Default is the SDO structure used to map records in the current SDE view QUERY Response The column field name referenced by field_col in the default record type followed by the current and maximum values of the column s width 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 197 SET QUERY EXTRACT COMPILER SET QUERY EXTRACT Option COMPILER SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax AO o v gt AZ COMPiler COBOL compiler_module gt lt
122. whose criteria is matched by the record characteristics This RTO is then used to map the record If the record does not match any RTO criteria then the first RTO in the SDO is used by default The RTO automatically selected to map a record may be changed by the user via the USE WHEN command or the SDE Edit Browse Utility Window By default all fields within records that have an associated RTO are displayed as printable character numeric data fields having first been converted to decimal If no SDO is specified then FORMAT CHARACTER is applied to each record i e the data is displayed as a single variable RECFM V or fixed RECFM F length character field with field name UnMapped No data conversion is performed If the VIEW parameter is specified with a non generic argument the DRECTYPE setting is initialised as the first record_type parameter specified on the VIEW parameter Otherwise the DRECTYPE setting is initialised as described in Default Record Type With the exception of alpha numeric AN fields record data that does not meet the specifications of its field definition is considered to be invalid and is represented by asterisks DB2 Table Edit DB2 table edit is supported for in storage edit browse only Therefore if a results table is too large to be loaded into available storage a storage error occurs The user must then restrict the number of rows to be loaded using further row selection criteria i e FROM FOR SELECT W
123. 0000000000 0000000000O 0000000000 im OGOOoooooo00o0 NNPRRRRRRE 000 0615 VUNORRAERLDO tu du Okt wo FUTON EON UTE tee WVUOLOYORNGOR 3 NEORPOO VOB UY SU NNFENNNOE VOVAWNUNW Ww B N E WOE Or ge E 9 09 101 014 UY Figure 1 Structured Data Environment View 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 4 Introduction to SDE Terminology Terminology The following terminology is used throughout SELCOPY i documentation in relation to record data processing in the SELCOPY i SDE environment ADATA File SYSADATA Associated Data file output generated by the Enterprise COBOL compiler when compile time option ADATA is specified or by the Enterprise PL1 compiler when compile time option MSG sub option XINFO is specified SELCOPY i SDE uses an ADATA file to generate an SDO COBOL Copybook A data set or PDS PDSE library member that contains one or more Enterprise COBOL group definitions not necessarily 01 level and is usually included by COBOL source programs to provide a file record layout Note that SELCOPY i supports Enterprise COBOL only Earlier releases of COBOL for z OS do not support generation of ADATA output Expanded Record Segment A formatted record segment that contains variable length fields or repeating groups In the process of formatting record data Variable length fields are formatted as fields of length equal to the maximum length of the variable field Repeating groups of fields are formatted so th
124. 04 CPChar04 DimMax01 DimMin01 DimE xp01 DimMax02 DimMin02 DimExp02 DimMax03 DimMin03 DimExp03 DimMax04 DimMin04 DimExp04 DimMax05 DimMin05 DimExp05 MT gt E gt gt m 3 E E 3 3 Z 3 3 Cc ALPair in o Dimension e Im in Display with leading zeros Display with ASCII to EBCDIC translation Numeric Type Maximum number of create parameters Actual number of create parameters Create parameter type 01 Create parameter integer value 01 Create parameter character value 01 Create parameter type 02 Create parameter integer value 02 Create parameter character value 02 Create parameter type 03 Create parameter integer value 03 Create parameter character value 03 Create parameter type 04 Create parameter integer value 04 Create parameter character value 04 Maximum dimension 01 Minimum dimension 01 xpression 01 Maximum dimension 02 Minimum dimension 02 Dimension expression 02 Maximum dimension 03 Minimum dimension 03 Dimension expression 03 Maximum dimension 04 Minimum dimension 04 Dimension expression 04 Maximum dimension 05 Minimum dimension 05 Dimension expression 05 Rem ALPair Remarks string DOWN Syntax gt gt DOwn eege Keeler gt lt t Cursor Ha Hs Saas CSR to Data sa 25 35 332 SS deen Hae ee eer e Max O Sess a gt Page 2 3
125. 1 in the field between USING and Copybook Note that the field option does not need to be activated 4 Enter the fileid of the copy book in the input field following USING Copybook 5 For COBOL copy books only if the copy book includes fields which comprise variable pseudo text strings then select REPLACE from the menu bar to open the COBOL Compiler Options panel Review and if necessary add COBOL replacing options that convert the pseudo text strings in your copy book 6 Select menu item SDO to generate the SDO and save it to disk using the specified SDO fileid 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 9 Getting Started with SDE Create an SDE structure SDO from a single COBOL or PL 1 Copy Book SELCOPY i Structured Data Browse Edit m File Run Command SDO REPLACE FILTER Help wS wR x Command gt SiG Rec Lyle ESr ZZSSDE0OB Lines 1 20 of 23 INPUT Fileid CBL SELC310 SZZSSAM2 ZZSDATSA or Fileid format ivolser dataset name member Volume For uncataloged datasets DSN Member Hes Rectm E mi Ecol Lrecls Browse Edit Allow Ins Del Upd In Place Read Only Options Enter Z to activate each of the options below Record Key RBA FROM e a ga FOR records Note Must have storage for this many records FILTER Expression or dataset ecify optional structure Copybook overlay Sp USING SDO Structure CBL SELCOPYI SDOLIB SAMSALES m or USING COBOL Copybook CBL SELC310 SZZSSAM1 ZZSCOBSA Def
126. 2 These values are as found in the Virtual Storage Manager Local Data Area Control Block EXTRACT Rexx variables region ie below 16M line private area region limit lregion 2 Fre below 16M line private area region size high value LGegien 3 Fre above 16M line private area region limit regionas sd The above 16M line private area region size high value 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 224 SET QUERY EXTRACT REGION QUERY EXTRACT Option RESERVED SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option RESERVED has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET RESERVED in CBLe Text Edit documentation See also RESERVEDLEVEL which controls the level File or View at which the RESERVED option takes effect RESERVEDLEVEL SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax Ce Ee RESERVEDLSvel bere pase ee oe gt lt BET to File View gt gt Query RESERVEDLevel O a aa gt lt gt gt EXTract RESERVEDLevel gt lt Description This option controls the level File or View at which the RESERVED option takes effect This option is primarily used in edit macros Option RESERVEDLEVEL takes effect at the File level SET Value FILE VIEW Reserved lines in SDE edit views configured using the RESERVED option apply to all edit views of the same data FILE
127. 2 ZZSDATSA ADELT 7 gt Creating a Subset of Records for Display usi wS Ha ele GE 1 gt 2890100161893840 8965229969967546 1098717650442152 record tupe REC CARD ne NEJ CBLI SDOx wR x siete ee 3000 amp 10 Joseph B Jones Mr Bruce WU Howar Msr J Coustesu 9463829326644146 BRUCE W HOWARD record type REC CARD 2637970469695876 Mr JOeseph B jon record type REC CARD 7678746370682730 Mr H R Ramstein record type REC CARD SELCOPY i structured data editor supports standard functions required for basic text edit but with additional emphasis given to recognition validation and preservation of field data length and data type Basic editing features include e Typing New Record Data e Find and Replace Data e Inserting Records e Deleting Records e Moving Records e Copying Records e Duplicating Records e Undo and Redo Changes In order to perform edit tasks the SDE window view must have been opened for EDIT not BROWSE In addition the edit technique employed to edit the data also governs which of these editing features are supported and when data may be saved Changes to edited text are saved in storage Unless QQUIT is used the user will be prompted to save the changes to disk when the file is closed Depending on the edit technique being used the SAVE command should be used to save the changes without closing the file Typing New Record Data Simp
128. 23 Getting Started with SDE SELCORY7i EBL DIST Command gt FIND ALL 4 HALL Z25D1861l 7 occurrences of string DATA TYPES 1 mau 3 4 5 2 AN 4 4 gt lt gt 9 rech 1 pecz 2 AN 1 1 FB ER 1234 56 CS RR EU ell Soir Variable 42 MYZONED MYINTEGER MYXVAR 3 4 ZD 2 4 ele Ete Fe SES ee 4 12 34 12 34 Offset 0 4 E MYLL 6 HAR HS 7 AN 8 8 gt ABCDEFGH BCDEFGH FB 16 2 gt ATA TYPES 1 MYBINTEGER MYCHAR Figure 20 SDE FIND Value Locating Records Using a Search Expression CBLI SDE SAMP VARCDATTYPES File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapLlist Help were found in records of 1 gt 1234567 89 1234567 89 Finding Record Data by Search String using NBJ CBLI SDO TY gt wS wR x Scroll Car tupe 6 7 FB 12 4 FP 16 1 gt 1 0000000E 01 Data elements 15 MYSTRCH 1 MYSTRCH 2 9 9 AN 18 1 AN 19 4 a b a b Data elements 15 MYFIXED MYFLOAT The LOCATE command will scroll the display to make a specific or relative record number the current first visible line of the window view Alternatively a record of a specific record type that matches the search criteria is made the current line of the display LOCATE supports use of an SDE expression which allows for more sophisticated search criteria than that provided by FIND e g Locate the last record with the same record type as the foc
129. 3 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 104 Command Line Primary Commands DELETE not deleted The default value of n_lines is 1 ALL All lines within the specified or implied range are selected for DELETE Only EXCLUDED record groups are eligible for deletion Visible data records are not eligible Only when EX or X is used will all EXCLUDED record groups that fall within the selected number of records be deleted regardless of whether excluded shadow lines are set on or off Default is that both EXCLUDED record groups and visible data records are eligible for delete in which case if excluded shadow lines are set off EXCLUDED record groups are not eligible for delete NX Only visible data records are eligible for deletion EXCLUDED record groups are not eligible Default is that both EXCLUDED record groups and visible data records are eligible for delete namel woe A label name identifying the first record of a range of data records to be deleted The preceding dot is mandatory Default is ZCSR the focus line name2 A label name identifying the last record of a range of data records to be deleted The preceding dot is mandatory If name2 occurs before name in the display then the order is reversed The default is ZLAST Examples del 3 Delete all eligible lines within the first 3 lines of data starting at the focus line Eligible lines are visible data records and shadow lines representing an EXCLU
130. 3 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 212 SET QUERY EXTRACT MAXPL1RC SET QUERY EXTRACT Option The initial value of MAXPL1RC is set by the INI variable SDE MaxPL1RC or where this INI option has not been set defaults to 4 When SET MAXPL1RC is executed the SDE MaxPL1RC option is set or updated in the User INI file when the SELCOPY i session is closed This means that the maximum storage value will be set across SELCOPY i sessions SET MAXPL1RC takes effect at the Global level SET Value value Maximum acceptable Return Code from the PL 1 compiler QUERY Response MAXPL1RC followed by a single numeric indicating the current MAXPL1RC value EXTRACT Rexx variables Imaxplirc 1 sd The value that is the current setting of the MAXPL1RC option MAXSTOR SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax Gebees MAXSTOR en n bytes pS gt lt SET K M gt gt Query MAXSTOR 22 222 gt lt gt gt EXTract MAXSTOR gt lt Description This option limits the amount of storage available to handle edit of any single data set within the SDE environment An SDE edited data set is limited by the lesser of the prevailing MAXSTOR value and the amount of free private area storage above the 16MB line available within the region at the time of open The edited data set is unaffected by any subsequent change to the MAXSTOR setting This limit will be used to determine the
131. 4 E gt pos2 Zo e name2 pe A ea eege ESE ge AER v orton field col 5 5 e2 to dos field_coll field_col2 H Description Based on the FIND ALL command ONLY displays all DB2 table rows records or record segments assigned the default record type that satisfy the specified search string criteria All records or segments of the default record type that do not satisfy the search string criteria are excluded Note that the display of records or segments that are not assigned the default record type is unaffected DB2 table rows may be considered to be formatted records that are all assigend the default record type All occurrences of the search string or numeric value are highlighted in the text Enter the RESET FIND command to turn off the highlighting When the execution time of an ONLY command exceeds 1 second a progress window is opened displaying the number of records processed so far This window also provides the user with the oportunity to interrupt the operation using the Attn key The FORMAT of the SDE display affects the execution of ONLY Unformatted Multi or Single Record Display CHAR or UNFMT By default a character compare for the supplied search string is performed against the entire length of unformatted data records The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define the area of the record within which the search occurs i e the matched data must begin at or aft
132. 4 with records in the current SDE view which fall between defined line label names CDBEG and CDEND inclusively See Also COPY CREATE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 165 Command Line Primary Commands REPLACE REPLACELINE Syntax EE ips Sao v gt gt REPLACE LIne H2 5 Values field value gt lt e E v field col Description Replace data in fields within the record occupying the focus line The record occupying the focus line must not be a shadow line and must contain any specified fields references REPLACELINE is primarily used within SDE Edit REXX macros Parameters field_col A list of field columns into which corresponding field_value values are to be inserted The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 1 or its name e g SeqNUM Specification of multiple field columns must be separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses If the field_col reference is a struct or a union then an error message is returned If the field_col reference is an array then an individual array element must be specified in parentheses as a subscript to the field e g 13 3 for the 3rd element of a single dimension array A subscript entry must exist for each dimension of the array e g RoomSize 6 2 4 an element within a three dimensional array If a list of field columns is not specified then as many of the
133. 75 Command Line Primary Commands TEDIT Examples tedit edit DEV OEM CBL JCL CBLINSO1 Open a data set for CBLe text edit tedit insert lt sdata use IMP_REC when 12 gt 100 Insert a line of text into the current CBLe edit window The line of text is a CBLe edit command that may be executed via the F16 key ACTION TEMPORARY Syntax gt TEMPOTary gt command Ee gt lt Description TEMPORARY is a modal command that may be used as a prefix to SDE primary commands SELECT and SET COLWIDTH TEMPORARY will execute the SELECT or SET COLWIDTH command and suppress any save of the selected columns or new column width value in the SELCOPY i SDO structure used to display the formatted data TEMPORARY is default for both SELECT and SET COLWIDTH Parameters command SDE primary command SELECT or SET COLWIDTH See Also SELECT SET COLWIDTH PERMANENT Description Display the first page of data Equivalent to the UP MAX command Parameters None See Also BOTTOM UP 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 176 Command Line Primary Commands UNDO Syntax gt gt UNDO 22277 Description Undo one level of changes made to the current file Each change level corresponds to an update of a data field within a record UNDO is assigned to PF22 by default and may be executed repeatedly to undo multiple levels of changes The third number following Alt n n m on the status line indi
134. 8 bytes Doubleword as implied by the precision which defines the total number of decimal digits i e precision lt 5 implies halfword precision gt 5 and lt 10 implies word precision gt 10 implies doubleword The scale defines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point Fields of this data type have a data type record header of FB ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Fixed Point Packed Decimal 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 38 SDE Concepts SDE Data Types A Packed Decimal field defined as having a precision and scale specified in number of decimal digits and whose value is displayed as a fixed point decimal number The length of the packed decimal field is implied by the precision which defines the total number of decimal digits The scale defines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point Fields of this data type have a data type record header of PD ppp nn or for DB2 table edit orowse DEC pr sc where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes nn is the length of the field in bytes pris the defined precision and sc the defined scale Fixed Point Zoned Decimal A Zoned Decimal Character field defined as having a precision and scale specified in number of bytes and whose value is displayed as a fixed point decimal number The length of the zoned decimal field is
135. A does not point at the start of a record then the record with the next higher RBA becomes the current line of the display For KSDS data sets a best effort attempt will be made to locate the record with the next higher RBA though this may not be accurate RBA address for each record is displayed as part of the record information columns within an SDE window view Display of these columns is controlled using the SDE SET RECINFO CLI command byte_offset may be specified as a decimal or hexadecimal numeric value e g RBA X 01D5 is equivalentto RBA 469 Specification of parameter keyword RBA is mandatory Parameter keywords RECORD KEY and RBA may be specified before or after their associated locate line target values eg KEY C APE110X5 is equivalent to C APE110X5 KEY If the target line contains a record that is flagged as being EXCLUDED SUPPRESSED or NOTSELECTED then the following message is returned ZZSD177E Requested line record_num key_string byte_offset is not visible relative_line An integer number representing the number of lines through which the display is to be scrolled The lines scrolled include data records and shadow line groups 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 145 Command Line Primary Commands LOCATE relative_line may be preceded by plus or minus which specifies the direction down or up respectively in which the display will be scrolled If omitted is
136. AME char 20 EMP LOYEE NO int 2 unsigned AGE int 2 unsigned SALARY dec 7 MONTH int 4 char 2 use when REC TYPE 01 r REC TYPEO2 struct REC TYPE char 2 NAME char 20 JOB TITLE char 14 ADDR1 char 20 ADDR2 char 20 POSTCODE char 4 use when REC TYPE 02 names COBOL replace case respect dim 12 unsigned PERES BO OL LES PO RE EE EE PE GELES GE GO RO E Sample command as it may appear in the user s HOME CMX file This command will generate a new SDO structure consisting of 2 record type definintions lt sd create structure CBL CBLI SDO FILSTRUC REC TYPEO1 struct REC TYPE NAME EMP LOYEE NO AGE SALARY MONTH use when REC REC TYPE02 struct REC TYPE NAME JOB TITLE ADDR1 ADDR2 POSTCODE use when names COBOL re 2 2 unsigned unsigned 2 Cc c i T d i el 1 TYPE 01 0000000 D Di K REC TYPE lt 02 amp REC TYPE gt 05 REC TYPE lt 22 amp REC TYPE gt 25 place case respect dim 12 unsigned DE gt a O O O E O O O O EE E O a E O wf O E o O po O O e w Sample command as it may appear in the user s HOME CMX file This command will generate a new SDO structure consisting of 2 record type definintions Additional USE WHEN criteria is specified to identify the circumstances under which the particular record mapping is to be used See Also EDIT BROWSE
137. AVEOPTIONS It is therefore recommended that options governing display of the data are set explicitly within the SDEIN control statements prior to executing PRINT Print Records in Single Record View A single record view print of only the current record is achieved using PRINT RECORD Multiple records may be printed in single record view using PRINT FILE For PRINT FILE output of data in single record view the display is scrolled down one page at a time DOWN PAGE to print all displayed fields The display is scrolled right to display the first fields of the next visible record table row or record segment and the process repeated until the print limit or End of Data is reached Page numbers restart at page 1 for each new record segment or table row printed in single record view Record data printed in single record view is restricted to a maximum page width of 255 Print All Records in Multi Record View Print of formatted records displayed in a multi record view is supported whether visible records are assigned the same or different record types For PRINT FILE output of data in multi record view the display is scrolled down one page at a time DOWN PAGE to print all displayed records table rows or record segments until the print limit or End of Data is reached Furthermore if NOTRUNCATE is active and the length of printed data lines exceeds the page width value the print of data lines in the SDE view is also scrolled across to th
138. CHARacter Se HEX Geier Se aa a a hae pS See Se Se ee eo Ho gt T FROM KEY string i FOR n_recs i Ge RBA n ie RECORDS 2 rr K RECord gt A gt FILTer filter fileid Filter Clause 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE DUPLICATE 112 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT Filter Clause pass in Sn nl i i ai v gt INelude rec type ee Re GE a WHere expr a ha Stopafter n_hits me eee eS ee ee v BXelude rec type ab E Wiere expr DB2 Opts gt SOL Query Opts 1 ee gt i USING 2 struct name SS k STRUCTure E COMMITONCLEANSAVE eg Ee i WITH CS COMMITONSAVE h UR COMMITONEXIT i RR Se RS a KEEP EXclusive ie UPDate la SHR e r E japonesas AU gt SKIPLocked i i LOCKTABLE EXclusive a i COMMITONLOAD ay a AUDit E Shr 2 4 PROTECTPRIMEKEY FORMat TABle Kee E an SRS a SHS Se SSS RS Sn Ss SSeS Sas pepe 2 gt 3 EDITPRIMEKEY a be FORMat 4 SINGLE F READonly A Bes FMT Get Ge SNE ess Pee Posse ese RS fap sa ses aa ss Sense hee Jman gt Ges RRE 8 am FOR A_
139. Compute Bridgend Ltd seo Structured Data Editor SDE SELCOPY i Release 3 20 8 Merthyr Mawr Road Bridgend Wales UK CF31 3NH Tel 44 1656 65 2222 Fax 44 1656 65 2227 CBL Web Site http www cbl com This document may be downloaded from http www cbl com documentation php CBL Ref z cd sman c320 SELCOPYi_3 20_Structured_Data_Editor pdf 2013 11 13 11 49 26 Structured Data Environment SDE Contents Documentation NOTES iccisss iisscccscnccssscacsatatscacdascis iecssrecactasansnianendinans ainda uauadasuaeedisdadatintieesdanaed exaabeiauibesssaaisddnaaeiatdeasiead 1 Summary of Chanel 2 First Edition October D lnea arde 2 troduction Ee 4 Re aler e VE 5 Getting Started With SDE es 7 Handling Long Command Stig error e rr aa 7 Il E le EE 7 Display Records wWihout Ee 7 SDE Data Edit VS OBLO Eeer errr rer een ret ty treet renter e errr ver merry tert rece rett eege 8 Display Recotds usinga Single COBOL or PL Copy Ee 8 Create an SDE structure SDO from a single COBOL or PL 1 Copy Book 9 Create an SDE structure SDO Compiler Return Cod t tess scccavesscoes sczcinccesasaas tedssecesleasnezesccnaseter 10 Display Records or Record Segments using multiple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books 10 Create an SDE structure SDO from multiple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books 10 Display Records or Record Segments using an SDO structure 13 Display a Subset of Records or Record SOGMONMS ee ces sscsonscceseesscvesncusevenesuces ii rn 13 SUpSEr
140. Create Replace File panel ZZSGCREO is an interactive panel window opened on executing primary commands CREATE or REPLACE without any parameters 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 69 SDE Menus and Popup Windows SDE CREATE REPLACE File Panel This panel is used to create new or replace existing sequential or VSAM data sets PDS PDSE library members or HFS files Panel Input Fields Fileld gt Specifies the fileid of the target file to be created or replaced If the specified fileid is less than 8 characters in length and is a valid member name the target file will be a member name belonging to the same PDS PDSE library referenced in the focus SDE view If the focus SDE view does not display a library member then the fileid will be treated as an HFS file within the current HFS working directory For a REPLACE operation only if the fileid includes a volume id then the target file may be a cataloged or uncataloged data set or PDS PDSE library which exists in that volume s VTOC e g VOLWKA DEV UNCATLG FILE Start Line gt A label name which includes the preceding target file dot period identifying the first line of the group of lines to be copied to the If not specified then the group of lines must have been marked using C or M line prefix area commands End Line gt A label name which includes the preceding dot period identifying the last line of the group of lines to be copied to the target
141. DED record group delete nx Delete the focus line if the focus line is a visible data record del all x fix fixe Delete all EXCLUDED record groups that exist within the range of lines starting at label name FIX ending at label name FIXE The setting for excluded shadow lines is irrelevant del 20 ex Delete all EXCLUDED record groups that exist within the first 20 lines of data starting at the focus line Each EXCLUDED record group constitutes a single line regardless of whether excluded shadow lines are set on or off Therefore even with excluded shadow lines set off 10 consecutive excluded records are treated as a single line for deletion See Also INSERT Syntax gt gt DISplay List list name he AO gt select_clause gt 4 4 4 4 gt lt where clause Sort Clause Description Open a SELCOPY i List window to display an in storage list generated via the CREATE LIST command The List window displaying the list data will support most of the standard list window features as follow e Field Descriptor Block FDB e Edit View e Selecting Sorting and Filtering e Sorting with the Cursor On exiting the List window display the in storage list is destroyed and storage is freed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 105 Command Line Primary Commands DISPLAY LIST Parameters list_name The
142. DIRAMEMPFP m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapList Help wS wR Command gt Scroll gt Record type AM Fixed S700 Offset 0 Data elements 95 UnMapped 1 20040322 SUPP ALEQUIP 323 SUPPAAEQUIP SUPP AZEQUIP SUPP ABBEYPR SUPP ABD DEM SUPP ABRAXUS SUPP ABRAXU2 SUPP ABSCOMP SUPP ACACTA SUPP ACAD SUPP ACA SUPP ACC SUPP ACD SUPP ACO ees S Siz SCoeeeceoc0cecocco000o Ceoeeecececocececoo0o00no 000000000000000 NHOcoccococcocoocoO MORO Oo Oia oa iS SS Mia 0 Cead Ta 0 10 1 7 la eat E l lel roel e MNocoococococoooooo Mococococoocooooo GG tts mi mU b w e SN Na A 0 Be LS aa La LAS La LAA Laan LAS LAA LAS Lan LES LAA H Fa f Fa Fa C 0 a OO Onpiole OO OO pal e eS Cat Ca Ea a Cg Elon E Figure 27 SDE Character Format Hexadecimal Format Record data in the current multi or single record view is displayed as for character format with the addition that the hexadecimal representation of the data is displayed below the character data Note that the Hex representation occupies an additional 2 lines of the display for each record and consists of characters 0 9 A F indicating 4 bit binary values B 0000 B 1111 The first line contains the high order 4 bits of the byte and the second line contains the low order 4 bits 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 36 SDE Concepts Hexadecimal Format SELCOPY i Edit CBL AMSUPP DA EBCDIC using CBL CBLI SDO DIRAMEMP m File Edit Actio
143. DSN output is to DDname SDEPRINT If SDEPRINT is not already allocated and SYSOUT outputclass is specified SDEPRINT is allocated to a system file instead of to DSN specified by the Print DSN value in the Batch Job Settings 0 6 panel outputclass is a single alpha numeric character or of the specified SYSOUT DDname asterisk representing the data set output class used on allocation COPIES n_copies Applicable only if OUTDSN is not SDEPRINT but is a DDname which is not already allocated n_copies is an integer value between 1 and 255 specifying number of printed copies to be defined on allocation of the specified SYSOUT DDname Default is COPIES 1 OLD SHR SHARE MODIFY APPEND Applicable only if OUTDSN specifies the DSN of an existing sequential VSAM or PDS PDSE library data set One of these parameters may be specified as the disposition used on allocation of the data set 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 160 Command Line Primary Commands QQUIT op O OS Exclusive unshared ENQ for overwrite of any existing file data ISHRISHARE si Shared ENQ for overwrite of any existing file data MODIFY APPEND Exclusive unshared ENQ for appending output to any existing file data Default for sequential and VSAM data sets is OLD Default for PDS PDSE library data sets is SHR PAGEWIDTH PW n_cols Set the print output page width to n_cols columns Default for SYSOUT data sets and HFS files is the value set by
144. E 206 SET QUERY EXTRACT IDSCOPE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Records may be selected for remap if either the ID flag or CHANGED flag is set on Default is ALL which is a synonym for CHANGED FLAGGED Records may be selected for remap only if the ID flag is set on QUERY Response The current setting of the IDSCOPE option CHANGED or FLAGGED EXTRACT Rexx variables lidscope 1 The current setting of IDSCOPE CHANGED or FLAGGED IDWARNING SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt AO IDWarning ON 4 TT gt lt be SET i J OFF gt gt Query IDWarning O gt lt gt gt EXTract IDWarning gt lt Description This option controls whether the prefix area ID warning symbol ID gt is displayed when data in an ID field identified by USE WHEN criteria is changed in any way The ID warning symbol indicates that the IDENTIFY command should be executed to possibly remap data in the record using a different record type definition SET IDWARNING takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether the ID warning symbol is to be displayed QUERY Response The current setting of the IDWARNING option EXTRACT Rexx variables iawarning Thecurrentsetting of IDWARNING option ON or OFF 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 207 SET QUERY EXTRACT IDWARNING SET QU
145. E first establishes whether enough storage is available to load the entire data set For non DB2 table edit if insufficient storage is available or AUXILIARY is specified on the EDIT command AUXILIARY edit will be used instead For DB2 table edit this will result in a storage error Although Full Edit can result in a delay as the data set is loaded into storage subsequent edit operations that involve scrolling or data scanning will operate faster When the data set is saved the entire data set is re written back to disk using the in storage copy of the records If Full Edit is in effect Edit is displayed in the SDE window title bar to the left of the DSN Read Only Edit Supported for sequential data sets PDS E members DB2 tables and VSAM RRDS and ESDS files all records belonging to the data set are loaded into storage prior to display in an SDE window view Read Only edit supports all functionality provided by Full Edit except that changes cannot be saved to disk unless the fileid is first updated using SET DSN FILEID FMODE FNAME FPATH or FTYPE to be a non existing fileid Having done this saving the data will open a dialog window to allocate or IDCAMS DEFINE the data set This allows the user to effectively edit and create sample data before copying it to a new data set whilst being secure in the knowledge that the orginal data set will remain intact 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 40 SDE Concepts SDE E
146. E o A 70 A A eneemrete th ere rt rt etre retrerey tert t reer 70 2013 11 13 13 03 23 ii Structured Data Environment SDE Contents SDE Menus and Popup Windows SE Mee gl TEE 70 Command Line Primary Command 2cccic0c0 c0ceccescccescccescsceccecet a nie 72 Executing SDE Commands froma CBLe Text Edit WINDOW usina 72 Command Reterence syntar Conventos eaten deeg adios pda 72 Howto read the Syntax Disgra MS sicario NAAA A NN AN EE 72 EE EE EE SEN 13 LEE 74 BOTTOM israse ars sarcomere sknterzan E pt NO criar conato E 74 BROW E EE EEN 75 CANGE ir n E a a a lola hai ad 81 EE BEE 81 Ee EE 82 FA E 87 Eet EE e 88 NET DEE 88 OP insistas liinda dio pt idad 88 LA LAA ege e 89 CREATE DS EE 90 CREATE STRUCTURE e 92 CURSOR BEE 104 N I KEE 104 DISPLAY Sd lso oia pic 105 DISPLAY REGU EE 106 DISPLAY STRUCTURE sssmonansasaala rn reia ra anos arras 107 EE 109 DROP DG caian llista id cli ltd 11 DURHCR TE air A E 111 e 112 EDITDIA LO E 120 e WEE 120 EE eege eege AEN EE EE ES 120 ECL UD ses sats ces tanta pa ia iii ernie 121 eA EE 125 A Eed eebe eebe ee Eed SEA SE e Ee 125 EI 126 A A EE 130 POUT EE 131 A A EE 131 El EE 132 ROP Na rs ral vacas 133 el STEE 133 ele 133 ele KIT 134 eege Ee EE 135 IDENTI EE 135 MAEDA EE 136 A coascava evens sntuaenss E E EE T E secu E E SES Ce 136 LAYOUT acuario aiii leas 138 BEE Sadat enee a bi tocada lena sei ideada 139 eessen eebe EE eege eh 140 awe DUES Sa ais 142 A EE 142 IST DO E E E E E
147. E operates on both visible data records not excluded and EXCLUDED record groups Records groups that are NOTSELECTED or are SUPPRESSED are not affected Parameters n_lines Number of times the focus line is to be duplicated The default is 1 line Examples dup 3 Duplicate the focus line 3 times See Also INSERT DELETE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 111 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT Syntax 2 Edit SSS PELE SSeS Sass SDE Opts gt d ee hfs_fileid HFS Opts ZS ge DBA pr table_name DB2 Opts ee 3 ssn a eg view_name Leia PROFile SDEPROF es re ee gt lt e PROFile macro_name SS Ss NOPROFile HFS Opts STD EOL ol ooo 4 j GR LF NL CRLF LFCR CRNL String LRECL recl a A eee ees gt RECFM F 09 2910 223 2 gt 5 Se Vv a off len origin E SDE Opts View gt X AAA E a a pi EE NES 2 USING 2222 SS struct_name sE PSS E 1 STRUCTUre e ech TE e COBOL copybook_name a J View record_type FB SS de ADAta FORMat TABle REUse a EE SCC Ea en RE gt a FORMat SINGle po AUXiliary E i READonly SS ier FMT nan Ge SNGL Se UPDate l jeo
148. E value may be updated by any of the following e SET DRECTYPE explicitly sets the DRECTYPE value e Execution of the VIEW command will update DRECTYPE to be the first non generic record type argument 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 42 SDE Concepts Default Record Type e Execution of any command that supports a record_type argument will update DRECTYPE to be the record type selected for the command This is true whether the record type has been specified explicitly in the command syntax or implied by the record type of focus line e g WHERE LOCATE etc The current value DRECTYPE may be interrogated using the QUERY or EXTRACT DRECTYPE commands DB2 Table Display SELCOPY i CBL APIFUNC 4 Y DB2 D6B9G Table in CBLIAPI APIFUNC m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapLlist Help wS wR Command gt Row mame CBL Variable S3 1127 Columns 7 FUNCNAME FUNCREF FUNCMOD REF FUNCMOD 1 2 HS 4 VARCHAR 20 INT CH 8 h A ebe D CNYWFFORM E CNYWFFORM 16 CNYWFFORM 24 CNYFFORM gz CNYFFORM 40 CNYFFORM 48 CNYFFORM 56 CNYFFORM 64 CNYFFORM CNYFFORM CNYFSTRO CNYFSTRO CNYEPRTE CNYFPRTF CNYFDMPO DONOMNODXDOO NNNNNN A A A MODTAMDOOXO AA AAAAAAAA E2A lt SPrintF lt PrintF lt MoOoco0occoocococcococo 0000000000000 o0o 0000000000000 0Oo 0000000000000 0Oo 000000000000000 HNOS o0ooccocococccocooo SA APPRPRPRPROCDOCODODO WUbONFOVOSVOUSONE oa Figure 30 SDE DB2 Table Edit View
149. EBCDIC character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of BINARY nn where nn is the length of the field in bytes Binary Data Variable A DB2 Binary data field built in data type VARBINARY of variable length contents are interpreted as printable ASCII or EBCDIC character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of VARBIN nn where nn is the maximum length of the field in bytes Character Fixed A Character field of fixed length specified in number of bytes whose contents are interpreted as printable ASCII or EBCDIC character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn or for DB2 table edit browse CH nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Character Variable Field of Varying Length with Nominated Length Field A Character field of variable length specified in number of bytes by a nominated field within the record data The nominated field may be of any numerical data type and the character field contents are interpreted as printable ASCII or EBCDIC character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Character Variable Field of Varying Length with Preceding Length Field A Character field of variable length specif
150. EL Remove all line label names set via the SET POINT command or entered in the prefix area directly 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 167 Command Line Primary Commands RESET RFIND Syntax SS O EE gt lt Description Repeat the search performed by the last FIND command If RFIND is executed following an EXCLUDE or CHANGE command then the search string used will be that specified on the EXCLUDE or CHANGE command The RFIND search will be executed on records that are of the same record type as that used by the last FIND EXCLUDE or CHANGE command Where the last FIND issued was FIND LAST or FIND PREV RFIND will perform a FIND PREV operation otherwise RFIND performs a FIND NEXT operation i e Search forwards NEXT or backwards PREV from the current cursor location to find the next or previous occurrence of the string value respectively If the cursor is not within the window s data display area the forwards or backwards search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the record type used by the last FIND RFIND is assigned to function key PF5 by default Parameters RFIND has no parameters See Also CHANGE EXCLUDE FIND RIGHT Syntax gt gt Right t 735s rr a aa dE gt lt PaaS SSS aS eS are heey CURSOR aaa zb CSR a Keeser Data ALL Half
151. ERY EXTRACT Option KEY QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query KEY p gt lt gt gt EXTract KEY gt lt Description QUERY and EXTRACT KEY reports the data occupying the key field of the KSDS record occupying focus line of the displayed data QUERY Response The string KEY followed by the key field data in printable character and hexadecimal string representation EXTRACT Rexx variables ben hep data in the key field of the record occupying the focus line LASTMSG QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query LAS TISI 2 2 25 2225222222222 E gt lt gt gt EXTract LASTmsg gt lt Description Obtain the last message or error message generated for the current SDE window view Unlike QUERY EXTRACT LASTMSG for CBLe window views the recalled message string is automatically returned as is i e No message number and LASTMSG prefix string QUERY Response Displays the last message or error message generated for the current window view The message may not have been displayed if NOMSG was used or MSGMODE was OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables pastmsg 1 The last message issued See Also EXTRACT MSGMODE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 208 SET QUERY EXTRACT LASTMSG QUERY EXTRACT Option LENGTH SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax PA AZ LENgth n bytes
152. ET STATS Figure 6 SDO Create Structure from COBOL PL1 Copybook s Record Type List 5 For each copybook member name in the table place the cursor anywhere in the table row and press lt PF2 gt to display all associated field entries for that copy book Update associated fields as follow before pressing lt PF2 gt to return to the Define Record Types view and repeating the process for the next copybook entry 1 In the Name field enter the name assigned to the required COBOL group item or PL 1 structure to be used to format record data and which exists in the copy book In a COBOL copybook this is usually a 01 level group item 2 Specify the Type PRI SEC or DEF assigned to the record type generated for this record structure Any invalid value in this field will display a list of selectable entries 0 PRI indicates that the structure applies to an entire record or a primary base segment in a segmented record SEC applies only to segmented records and indicates that the structure applies to a secondary segment in a segmented record 0 DEF may be specified for one record type definition only and indicates that the structure is to be applied to all records or primary record segments that do not satisfy the selection criteria of any other PRI record type 3 Specify the source copy book Language COBOL or PL1 Again any invalid value in this field will display a list of selectable entries 4 Optioanally spec
153. EXIT Saves an SDE DB2 table edit default for option COMMITONCLEANSAVE COMMITONSAVE COMMITONEXIT Specifies when a COMMIT should be executed for changed data COMMITONCLEANSAVE COMMIT only if SAVE is executed without errors commrronsave COMMIT on SAVE regardless of errors commrronextt COMMIT only on exit of the edit session Default is COMMITONCLEANSAVE COMMIT TONLOAD Saves an SDE DB2 table edit default for option COMMITONLOAD Performs a COMMIT following the initial load of rows to be edited thus releasing all DB2 table locks performed during load of the data This includes any explicit table locks applied via the LOCKTABLE parameter Default is not to perform a COMMIT following load of the table rows AUDIT Saves an SDE DB2 table edit default for option AUDIT AUDIT will open a new SELCOPY i DB2 audit data set to record changes to the edited table made during this edit session See DB2 Auditing for details Default is not to perform edit auditing Direct Definition Direct definition syntax provides the method of directly defining an SDO containing one or more record structures RTOs each comprising one or more fields without first having a copy book NAMES Field names specified in the record_definition are verified so that they conform with the naming standards of the specified programming or query language Supported standards are as follow 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 99 Command Line
154. HEN segment identification criteria A primary segment RTO is assigned to primary base segment of the record However if ID fields do not satisfy the segment identification criteria for any of the primary segment RTOs the default segment RTO is used See Record Type Assignment which defines the precedence for assigning primary segment RTOs Unprocessed record data that follows the primary segment is assigned a secondary segment RTO based on associated identification criteria The assignment of secondary segment RTOs is repeated for all remaining record data until the end of record is reached or the remaining data does not satisfy any segment identification criteria belonging to the secondary segment RTOs In the latter case the remaining record data is displayed as unformatted character data with the record type UnmappedSeg Specifying USE WHEN Segment Identification Criteria USE WHEN segment identification criteria is mandatory for non default primary and secondary segment RTO definitions Segment identification criteria associated with each RTO definition is based on an SDE expression This identifies all ID fields within the record data and also values against which those ID fields will be tested in order to determine whether the RTO segment mapping is suitable to be assigned to an individual record segment Within any RTO segment mapping USE WHEN expression ID fields may be referenced using the following methods Unformatted data position an
155. HERE parameters On starting a DB2 table edit a temporary SDO is created reflecting field characteristics obtained from the SQL Descriptor Area return by the prepared SQL SELECT execution Furthermore a new DB2 connection is made and optionally a new SELCOPY i DB2 audit log is allocated for each new SDE edited DB2 base or results table Opening second and subsequent SDE edit views of the same table data does not open a new DB2 connection or audit log data set Parameters fileid The fileid of the data set containing records to be edited fileid may be the DSN of a sequential or VSAM data set or the DSN and member name of a PDS PDSE member hfs_fileid A complete HFS or zFS file path containing data to be edited hfs_fileid is identified as an HFS path if fileid is not a valid DSN for a sequential VSAM or PDS PDSE dataset e g DSN begins with contains invalid special characters e g or contains qualifiers of length greater than 8 HFS Opts The following HFS options may be specified to determine the handling of data within the HFS file EOL STD NL CR LF CRLF LFCR CRNL string Sets the EOLIN input end of line delimiter value used to determine the end of each record for non RECFM F V input EOLIN delimiters are not included in the edited record data or record length EOL parameter elements are as follow Any standard line end Line Feed A 2 byte user specified character or hex string STD is default so that the ED
156. HFS working directory namel A label name identifying the first line of the group of lines to be copied to the target file If not specified then the group of lines must marked using C or M line prefix area commands name2 A label name identifying the last line of the group of lines to be copied to the target file If name1 has been specified name2 is mandatory Examples create DEV USER223 COB COPY QX95R001 GRBEG GREND Create new library member DEV USER223 COB COPY QX95R001 containing records in the current SDE view which fall between defined line label names GRBEG and GREND inclusively See Also COPY REPLACE CREATE LIST Syntax gt gt CREate List Jist_name EROM LA Eeer gt gt gt USING 4 2 2 struct Name gt 2 2 gt 2 Geesse gt lt STRUCTure TITLE title text Description Create an in storage list from records within a structured data set that may then be displayed in a SELCOPY i List window via the DISPLAY LIST command Only records of one record type may be accurately displayed within a list window By default the first record type object RTO within the SDO is used to map all the records within the file when generating the list A list column entry is generated for every field name defined by the RTO Therefore data within named fields that are part of a named group of fields will be repeated in different columns
157. INSERTEDQ _______ LENGTHERROR 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 183 Command Line Primary Commands WINDOW OL NOEOL NOEOL AVE SAVEREQUIRED RNC TRUNCated TRUNCATED ALERRor VALUEERROR Examples where LastName C Jones For records that are of the default record type display only those records for which the field LastName is equal to Jones in mixed case where LastName C Jones amp Salary gt 26000 As above but filter the data records further so that the numeric field Salary is greater than 26 000 where 12 2 7 lt lt RTT Display records that are of the default record type and where the two dimensional character array element belonging to field reference number 12 does not contain the string E77 here PostCode gt gt SW1 amp DispatchDate OrderDate Quantity gt 30 amp Cost lt 2155 53 Display records that are of the default record type where character field PostCode begins with string SW1 AND one of the following conditions are true 1 The contents of fields DispatchDate and OrderDate are equal 2 The numeric field Quantity is greater than 30 AND the numeric field Cost is less than 2155 53 See Also FLIP LESS LOCATE MORE Syntax gt gt Window CAScade has 2253222922 gt lt HOR TILE bo VELL SSeS NEWwindow DOCu
158. IT and BROWSE operations display of record information is set off by default The record information columns are displayed to the left of the record data field columns In order from left to right these are flags that have been set for the record the length of the record and the location identification of the record within the file Note that if records are of variable length and Full Edit KSDS Edit or Auxiliary Edit is in effect then values displayed in the record information Length column may be overtyped to update the length of a record In all other circumstances record information columns are non enterable SET RECINFO values take effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Record information column display is switched on or off ALL Include display of all record information columns unless column display option is specified with the NO prefix FLAGS NOFLAGS Include or suppress display of the record flags column The record flags column has a width of 4 bytes and header Flags Flag bytes and their meanings are from left to right ft Record seqment is original loaded from the disk copy of file Record segment has been inserted during the edit session le Record segment has been changed since being inserted or loaded s Record segment will be saved on execution of a SAVE or equivalent operation Im Record seo ment requires possible remap due to ID field change
159. IT operation scans the input data for any of the standard EOL combinations not string stopping when one is found This EOL combination is used as EOLIN for the file RECFM F V off len origin Specifies that the data is to be treated as containing Fixed or Variable length format records RECFM F indicates that all records are of a fixed length as defined by the LRECL argument RECFM V allows the user to specify the location of the record length fields within the data as follows Offset of the record length field from the start of the record Length of the record length field The start of the record data at which the record length is applied 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 114 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT Default is 0 2 0 which describes standard RECFM V organisation data sets The length field will be displayed as part of the data so unless editing the data using a suitable associated structure SDO the user must take care not to corrupt the length field and also maintain it for any change in record length LRECL lrecl Specifies the maximum record length of input records Records terminated by an EOL sequence will wrap onto the next line of data if the record length exceeds recl Where a record has wrapped the prefix area contains the EOL gt flag Furthermore read only edit is forced in order to suppress save of a wrapped record as multiple individual records For RECFM F dat
160. K EE record type a aS SS SS SO SA RECord PIN SSS SSS struct_name F STRUCTure Description ARRC is equivalent to SET ARRAYASCHARACTER ON and so displays the specified single dimension array field of one byte character fields as an updateable variable length character field of data type XVARCHAR Parameters field_col The individual column identifying the array field to which the option will apply The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID Default is the focus column FOR RECORD record_type Identifies the record type mapping in which the specified field_col is defined 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 73 Command Line Primary Commands ARRC Default is the default record type IN STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the name of the SDO structure in which the specified record_type is defined Required only if a distinction is to be made between multiple data sets displayed in SDE views each using different SDO structure definitions but where the specified record_type is defined in more than one of the structures Default is the SDO structure used to map records in the current SDE view See Also ARRX GRPC GRPX ARRX Syntax gt gt ARRX Ho ooo DEE gt field_col AO O O 5 5 5 5 5 gt lt POR beienee t LE CIA pe Stas SS AAA A Sa RECord SN Sp SOS struct_nam
161. LTIPOINT ee A AAA gt lt gt gt EXTract MULTIPoint gt lt Description This option controls whether or not more than one label name may be assigned to a line in the file display via the SET POINT command or by overtyping a name in the line s prefix area SET MULTIPOINT takes effect at the File level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON Allow multiple label names on a single line OFF Do not allow multiple label names on a single line Default QUERY Response The current setting of the MULTIPOINT option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables multipoint 0 Imultipoint 1 The current setting of the MULTIPOINT option ON or OFF 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 215 SET QUERY EXTRACT MULTIPOINT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option OFFSET OFST SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax A bebe ORBSet COLIMA q AAA A gt lt SET DEST Position ec Hex LZ E e Relative Offset gt gt Query OPPS Et SSS sae SSeS Sees SSS Se See SSS eS gt lt gt gt EXTract OFFSet 1 aa gt lt Description This option controls format of the field offset for SDE EDIT and BROWSE window views in mapped single record view MAP when SHOW OFFSET is in effect SET OFFSET takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is
162. MPORARY is not specified automatically save it to a Structure Definition File SDF An SDO provides the information required to interpret indiviudal logical fields within a file s data records Usually a CREATE STRUCTURE command will refer to a file structure already defined within an existing COBOL or PL 1 copybook but direct definition syntax is also supported see record_definition below Parameters struct_name The name assigned to the structure being created struct_name is the SDF fileid assigned to the SDO which will subsequently be referenced via the USING parameter of EDIT and BROWSE commands Unless parameter TEMPORARY is specified struct_name must be the DSN of a new or existing data set or PDS E member to which the file structure definition is saved TITLE short_title Specifies a title to be assigned to the structure The structure s title is displayed as part of the structure SDO list and may be displayed or updated via the SET QUERY EXTRACT TITLE option 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 95 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE The short_title text string should be no longer than 64 characters and may be enclosed in quotation marks or apostrophes DESCRIPTION long_description Specifies a description to be assigned to the structure The structure s description and may be displayed or updated via the SET QUERY EXTRACT DESCRIPTION option The long_description text string sho
163. P VAR DATTYPES using NBJ CBLI SDOC TY gt File Edit Actions Options Utilities MENA SwapList Help wS wR WE Command Seral tS Record type DATA TYPES 1 le 39 49 Offset 0 Data elements 15 MYREC MYBINTEGER CTER MYDECIMAL 2 5 AN 4 4 PD 8 4 00000002 1 1 0000000E 00 F 6 4100 1 1000 Record type DATA TYPES 2 b MYREC MYZONED MYINTE 2 3 AN 1 1 ZD 2 4 EDO 00000003 2 12 34 F FFFF 2 1234 WO NOD I 0000004 2 _i2 34 Figure 16 SDE Formatted Multiple Record View with HEX ON 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 20 Getting Started with SDE Excluding Records from the Display Excluding Records from the Display By default the contents of records that are flagged as NOT SELECTED or SUPPRESSED are not displayed in the SDE window view Further filtering of the displayed records can be achieved by setting the EXCLUDED flag on those records that are to be excluded from the display If SHADOW EXCLUDED is set on the default consecutive excluded records that are assigned the same record type are represented by a single shadow line of type EXCLUDED The Prefix Area Command X n or XX may be used to exclude a record and optionally n 1 records that follow or a block of records regardless of assigned record type Alternatively the EXCLUDE command may be used to exclude records of a specific record type that fall within a range of records and also match a supplied search string Records that are assigned a diff
164. PREFIX option ON or OFF followed by LEFT or RIGHT followed by the length n_bytes followed by PHYSICAL or LOGICAL EXTRACT Rexx variables Iprefix 1 Thecurrentsetting of the PREFIX option ON or OFF bei The current position of the PREFIX option LEFT or RIGHT T he current length of the PREFIX area a number from 1 8 lprefix 4 sd The current display of record or segment numbers PHYSICAL or LOGICAL QSEPARATOR QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax AA OSEParator char 3 79 5555 gt lt Si SET H gt gt Query QSEPaeratlor EE SSeS SS SS SS SS Saas gt lt gt gt EXTract QSEParator gt lt Description This option controls the separator character to be used in qualified field names By default this is dot The same field name may be defined in more than one nested group with in the record structure Therefore to reference the correct field it should be specified using a qualified field name e g group_name field_name A field s fully qualified field name includes the record type name in which it is defined in addition to the name of every group level in which it is nested e g record_type field_name record_type group_name field_name Using the record type name qualifier is required for segmented record editing where USE WHEN criteria is based on a named formatted field in a previously formatted segment SET QSEPARATOR takes effect a
165. Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE IBM High Level Assembler IBM COBOL pez gt IBMOB2SOL pri pero IBM Enterprise PLA Record Definition Definition of a single record structure RTO within the structure definition object SDO record_type The record type name used to identify the new record type object RTO STRUCTURE The data type of an RTO An RTO may be considered to be a single field of type STRUCTURE which itself comprises a number of individual fields EBCDIC ASCII Unless overridden by EBCDIC or ASCII specified as a parameter on a field definition all character fields within the RTO are to be treated as either EBCDIC or ASCII Default is EBCDIC USE WHEN expression Often an individual record can be assigned a record type by matching on record length Where several record types are potential matches based on record length then USE WHEN should be used to specify criteria that must be satisfied before the record type can be assigned to a particular record expression is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record_type field names and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of the WHEN expression must be numeric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition If a WHEN expression associated with a record type returns a true result for a data record then th
166. QUERY EXTRACT EOLIN SET QUERY EXTRACT Option The current setting of the EOLIN value EXTRACT Rexx variables kein The current setting of the EOLIN value EOLOUT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax See ed EOLOut EE PA AAA gt lt SET CR LF NL CRLF LFCR CRNL SEring gt gt Query POLOWE EE A O EE gt lt gt gt EXTract JEOLQUt gt lt Description EOLOUT determines the output HFS file EOL end of line delimiter string to be used when saving edited data to an HFS fileid which is not fixed format i e RECFM F is not the current setting for the edited data By default the EOLOUT value is equal to the EOLIN value established when the CBLe edit view is initially opened for edit or browse When using SDE Update in place Edit EOLOUT cannot be changed and must equal the EOLIN value when the data was read An EOLOUT value is also set for non HFS files allowing the user to subsequently save the data in the edit view to a new HFS file simply by using the SAVE fileid command where fileid is an HFS path name SET EOLOUT takes effect at the File level SET Values CR LF NL CRLF LFCR CRNL string Identifies the end of line delimiter Delimiter elements are as follow S string J 2 byte user specified character or hex string QUERY Response The c
167. S i OFF ae gt gt Query ARRAYALL gt lt gt gt EXTract ARRAYALL gt lt Description By default SELCOPY i data edit of formatted data containing variable length array OCCURS DEPENDING elements will display the maximum possible number of array elements that may exist within the array 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 188 SET QUERY EXTRACT ARRAYALL SET QUERY Option This option determines whether null elements of the array that are not referenced by the depending on field are displayed in formatted single record MAP view SET ARRAYALL takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF eee unreferenced array fields in formatted single view are displayed ON or suppressed OFF Default is ON QUERY Response The current setting of the ARRAYALL option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables larrayar1 1 Thecurrentsetting of ARRAYALL ON or OFF ARRAYASCHARACTER SET QUERY Option Syntax ON A a ARRAYAscharacter A aa AA gt SET OFF Field_col Sef See SS SS SSS SSS Se SS SSS SSS SSS SS SS SSS SSS SS eee SS SSeS Sees Sa eeseSsSee gt lt FOR Seas Sassen t rocr type O RECord a IN Aaa eae struct_name
168. S takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether display of DB2 column attributes is set ON or OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the COLATTRIBUTES option EXTRACT Rexx variables 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 194 SET QUERY EXTRACT COLATTRIBUTES SET QUERY EXTRACT Option lcolattributes 1 rie current setting of column attributes display ON or OFF COLOUR COLOR SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax NONe gt gt COLOr Block Blue Ae A irae a lo SET E ue CoLOur Si be Vileares Red 2 BLInk ee HEADING Pink a REVerse a HELDData Green Uscore aor HELDTitle Turquoise HIghlight Yellow ben KEY White gt 5 MODified Default Magline NONDisplay Pending Ko bet PRImary RECFlags RECId RECLength RECordtype t Scale SEGment SHadow THIghlight TOLSOL gt gt Query CONOR 2255222242922 AA O gt lt COLOur M gt gt EXTract COLOr gt lt COLOur L Description This option controls the colour display of areas within the SDE window view SET COLOUR t
169. SDE 182 Command Line Primary Commands WHERE WHERE Syntax Ho 1 gt gt WHere ieee PASS SSS SaaS SSS SSS SS eS aa gt lt ALL expression line_flag Description Display only those records data set records record segments or DB2 table rows that satisfy the specified expression or line__ flag criteria The WHERE operation tests each record in turn including excluded records starting at the first record selected for EDIT BROWSE Records that satisfy the specified criteria are included for display whereas records that do not satisfy the specified criteria are excluded The first record that satisfies the specified WHERE criteria becomes the current line otherwise if no records satisfy the criteria the Top of Data line becomes the current line If expression is specified which includes reference to one or more formatted field names or field reference numbers then WHERE will apply only to records that are of the default record type This record type also becomes the new value of the DRECTYPE option Records not assigned the default record type will not be tested and so are unaffected by this type of WHERE operation Note that VIEW may be used to suppress display of records assigned other record types if required If WHERE is executed with no parameters then all non suppressed records are included in the display To include only records assigned a specific record type
170. SDE edit technique and data record management used to edit the data set e g SDE EDIT of a sequential data set may be of a size which is too large to fit comfortably within the defined area of storage resulting in use of Auxiliary Edit If the MAXSTOR value is set to 0 zero it is considered to be unset and no artificial limit is imposed The initial value of MAXSTOR is set by the INI variable SDE MaxStor or where this INI option has not been set defaults to 0 zero When SET MAXSTOR is executed the SDE MaxStor option is set or updated in the User INI file when the SELCOPY i session is closed This means that the maximum storage value will be set across SELCOPY i sessions SET MAXSTOR takes effect at the Global level SET Value n_bytes n_bytesK n_bytesM Amount of storage available for SDE edit of a single data set Setting this value to O zero unsets the MAXSTOR limitation This value may be specified as a number of bytes n_bytes number of kilobytes n_bytesK or a number of megabytes n_bytesM QUERY Response 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 213 SET QUERY EXTRACT MAXSTOR SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Four numeric values indicating the current MAXSTOR value and for the current SDE edited file the MAXSTOR value at the time the file was opened the amount of storage allocated for the file edit so far and of that allocation the amount of unused storage EXTRACT Rexx variables Inaxstor 1 sd The valu
171. SED or if SHADOW OFF EXCLUDED is in effect records flagged as EXCLUDED are not eligible to be replicated Applicable to edit of Segmented Records only Force a secondary segment to be a primary base segment so splitting the record into two No action is taken if the segment is already a primary segment type An IDENTIFY operation is automatically performed on the focus record to remap all segments with appropriate record types Applicable to edit of Segmented Records only Force a primary segment to be a secondary segment so joining the record with the record before No action is taken if the segment is already a secondary segment type An IDENTIFY operation is automatically performed on the focus record to remap all segments with appropriate record types Display only records that are of the same record type as this line V may be specified on a visible data record or on EXCLUDED SUPPRESSED or NOTSELECTED shadow lines The DRECTYPE value is updated to be this record type and this line becomes the first line of the display Add to the display records that are of the same record type as this line V may be specified on a visible data record or on EXCLUDED SUPPRESSED or NOTSELECTED shadow lines Note however that specification on a visible data record or EXCLUDED record group shadow line will not add new record types to the display The DRECTYPE value is updated to be this record type and this line becomes the first line of the disp
172. SERT also supports specification of one or more field columns and the default values to be inserted in each field e g Insert 3 new records of record type DATA TYPES 1 containing some initial values in fields MYCHARACTER 4 MYDECIMAL 5 and MYFLOAT 7 INSERT DATA TYPES 1 4 5 MYFLOAT VALUE TEMP 3569 93 23 0e 12 3 When inserting unformatted records segments the user is prompted to specify a valid length for the new record segment after which the newly inserted unformatted line is intialised to blanks When inserting formatted records segments DB2 table rows then unless otherwise specified fields are initialised as follow e Numeric fields are set to 0 e Alpha numeric character fields are set to blanks Following an insert the cursor is placed on the first character of the first field of the first newly inserted line SELCOPY i CBL DIST CBELI SDE SAMP VAR DATTYPES using NBJ CBLI SDO TY gt x m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapList Help wS wR Command INS DATA TYPES 1 4 5 7 VWVALUE xx 8 27 0005 3 Scroll Record type DATA TYPES 1 Variable 39 49 Offset 0 Data elements 15 MYREC MYBINTEGER MYCHARACTER MYDECIMAL 2 4 5 AN 4 4 AN 4 4 PD 8 4 SOS SSE 8 27 8 27 lo Sir 1234 56 ATA TYPES 2 Variable 42 46 Offset 0 MYZONED MYI MYXWARCHAR MEE 3 5 7 zD 2 4 AN 8 8 PERTE E SSS f gt 12 34 ABCDEFGH 12 34 20000 0000 0000 0000 o 0000 0000 unbunm H FAA
173. SETQUERYEATRACT OPUOlhiasmusnsaasaio ia 236 WINSIZE SE VOUERY EAT RAGT ODIOM EE 236 WRAP 9E QUERY EXTRACT ORO esc carioca sraste tits a E eet ceechagetibecaieetadsbaaadasteemeciiees 236 ZEROS SET OUERY EXTRAGH OPlO Marissa ei n EEN EEEE EAE ES E ESS EErEE 237 Prefix Area Line COmmatiGs conoci innata 238 Function Keys cc o e EE 240 un emcee ca ae cr E ee NTE 241 2013 11 13 13 03 23 H Documentation Notes First Edition October 2013 Information in this document details general features and functionality of the SELCOPY Product Suite 3 20 component SELCOPY i This document replaces the previous edition of SELCOPY i Structured Data Editor SDE applicable to SELCOPY Product Suite 3 10 which is now obsolete Copyright in the whole and every part of this document and of the SELCOPY Products Suite system and programs is owned by Compute Bridgend Ltd hereinafter referred to as CBL whose registered office is located at 8 Merthyr Mawr Road Bridgend Wales UK CF31 3NH and who reserve the right to alter at their convenience the whole or any part of this document and or the SELCOPY Product Suite system and programs SELCOPY Product Suite for z OS z VM CMS and z VSE operating systems which includes SELCOPY SELCOPY i and CBLVCAT is available for download and install from http www cbl com selcdl html The following publications for SELCOPY Product Suite and its component products are available in Adobe Acrobat PDF format
174. STRUCTure Description Applicable only to formatted single dimension array OCCURS fields comprising single character PIC X elements with the number of array elements defined by a value in a separate numeric field DEPENDING ARRAYASCHARACTER option determines whether an array field of this type is displayed as a single updateable variable length character field XVARCHAR or as a number of single character array element fields SET ARRAYASCHARACTER takes effect at the View level SET Value ON OFF Display has field as variable character ON or display its elements as individual single character fields OFF Default is ON field_col The individual column identifying the array field to which the option will apply The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID If field_col does not exist in the specified record_type the following error message is returned ZZSD148E Data element field_col is not defined in record type record_type of structure struct_name Default is the focus column FOR RECORD record_type Identifies the record type mapping in which the specified field_col is defined Default is the default record type IN STRUCTURE struct_name 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 189 SET QUERY EXTRACT ARRAYASCHARACTER SET QUERY Option Identifies the name of the SDO structure in which the specified record_type is defined Required only if a dist
175. TRACT VALUE GROUP SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax ee aaa a Group Seen IR been gt lt i SET i tad OFF Sg Kee Query GXGUpP 5 22 SS gt lt gt gt EXTract Group 2 222 222222222 gt lt Description This option is applicable to singe record view only and is used to control whether or not each occurrence of a group item is displayed Group items correspond to structure union and root array field names SET GROUP takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether GROUP field names are displayed ON or not OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the GROUP option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables srou 1 The current setting of GROUP ON or OFF GROUPASCHARACTER SET QUERY Option Syntax ON A AAA GROUPAscharacter EE Ree gt SET OFF field col AAA Re SR RS RR RR SS RR RS gt lt tt ROR ES 2 record type AAA A ae RECord gt IN ARAS struct_name STRUCTure Description Applicable only to formatted data this option determines whether a specified group structure field defined within a specified record type mapping is to be displayed as a fixed length character field or as a formatted group of its component fields 2013 11 13 13 03 23
176. The null character x 00 char A single byte value represented in character hexadecimal or binary format Character format may be unquoted or enclosed in quotation marks or apostrophes Hex format is a value 0 255 enclosed in apostrophes and prefixed by x or X e g x FE Binary format is a value 00000000 11111111 enclosed in apostrophes and prefixed by b or B e g b 111111110 QUERY Response The current PAD character value displayed in character or NULL and hexadecimal EXTRACT Rexx variables baan O Ire current PAD character setting PAGEDEPTH SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax a a BAGEDepth e SSS ase Seas aS es gt lt a SET i gt gt gt Query 5 ee gt 2 2 399 129 2229 HS OS gt lt gt gt EXTract PAGEDepth gt lt Description Applicable to PRINT output only PAGEDEPTH specifies the number of lines printed per page For batch processing a PAGEDEPTH value may be specified any number of times within the same SYSIN input to change the page depth of pages printed by subsequent PRINT commands SET Value n_cols The number of lines to be printed per page including the page header line minimum 10 default 60 QUERY Response The current PAGEDEPTH value EXTRACT Rexx variables lpagedepth 1 sd The current PAGEDEPTH value setting 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE
177. USE command 2 USE does not affect data in the file only the way in which the data is formatted Unless FOR FOCUS or TEMPORARY is specified USE may update the in storage copy of the SDE structure SDO so that when the structure is dropped the user will be prompted to save the updated SDO to disk Because no data is changed USE is not included in the UNDO REDO chain Description The USE command is not applicable to DB2 Table edit Where individual records are not automatically assigned the required record type RTO defined within the structure SDO then the USE command may be executed to express more sophisticated record type assignment criteria or force a specific record type assignment See Record Type Assignment 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 179 Command Line Primary Commands USE Incorrect record type assignment may occur if the total length of the field definitions within a record type matches that of another record type Similarly no record types may exist that exactly match the length of the data record in which case the first record type in the SDO is assigned by default USE WHEN expression may be specified to one or more RTO definitions in order to sophisticate automatic assignment of record type so matching records with their correct RTO USE NEVER ON will exclude an RTO definition from being eligible for assignment USE ALWAYS ON will force all records to be assigned a single RTO d
178. Utilities Window SwaplList Help wS wR x Command gt SET REF OFF SET TARE QEF Record type REC CUST Fixed 196 Offset 8 Data elements 16 PASS LASTNAME FIRSTNAME A A A A fe fe A A gt 78f j2foa Ramstein Hans chico Richards Denise benj Hill Mike marine boy Coustou jacque Fixed S8 Offset 8 Data elements 13 SEQ CR OR DR COMPANY CARD NUMBER BeOS GR El d et lee 2 Aqua 2890100161893933 40 Joseph B Jones 3 MAST 8965229969967546 Mr Bruce W Howard 4 VISA 1098717650442152 Msr J Cousteau E ype REC ORDER Variable 92 112 Offset 8 Data elements 22 CUST ID ORDER REF QTY See EE oy Sy Sty lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt gt lt 1 gt lt EECH Elo EE 9894238617 ALt 0 0 50 Figure 19 SDE Suppressed Header Lines Searching Data Records SDE supports powerful search commands that allow the user to find and create subsets of records based on specified search criteria FIND LOCATE WHERE MORE and LESS These are covered by the following e Finding Record Data by Search String e Locating Records Using a Search Expression e Creating a Subset of Records for Display Finding Record Data by Search String Like EXCLUDE see Excluding Records from the Display the FIND and RFIND commands are similar to the ISPF style text edit commands with additional syntax to nominate those columns to be searched For formatted records the search scope for FIND is supplied as a list of individual fields and or field
179. a gt gt Query ABBREViation O gt lt gt gt EXTract ABBREViation gt lt Description This option controls whether the group name and field item designators that constitute a field name may be abbreviated starting with the first letter of the designator in SDE commands that reference record fields by name e g FIND CHANGE WHERE For example in formatted records that contain the field name SPROCKET SIZE in a group field MARCX the field may be referenced as M SPR if this name is unique to that field Note that abbreviated field names may always be specified for a LOCATE command regardless of the setting of the ABBREVIATION option SET ABBREVIATION takes effect at the Global level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether use of abbreviated field names is set ON or OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the ABBREVIATION option EXTRACT Rexx variables abbreviation 0 labbreviation 1 The current setting of the ABBREVIATION option ON or OFF ALT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option ALT controls the same options in an SDE window view as those supported by a CBLe edit view See SET ALT in CBLe Text Edit documentation ARRAYALL SET QUERY Option Syntax gt gt A ARRAYALL ON gt lt Ls SET
180. a rec is the fixed length of the records in the edit view If the file size is not a multiple of the fixed format Irecl value then an error occurs and edit is cancelled For display purposes only using BROWSE with any rec value will display the data with the last record padded with blanks up to the rec length If the record length field of a RECFM V record exceeds the rec value then an error is returned RECFM V and EOL delimited records have default rec of 32752 wheras RECFM F records have default rec of 80 SDE Opts The following SDE options are applicable to edit of structured data found in HFS files or z OS data sets only See DB2 Opts for DB2 table edit options USING STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the SDO to be applied to the data records struct_name is the SDF fileid assigned to the SDO ina CREATE STRUCTURE command equals may be specified instead of struct_name to indicate the name of the structure being used in the current SDE window USING COBOL PL1 ADATA copybook_name Identifies the full fileid of copybook_name a COBOL PL1 copy book or COBOL PL1 ADATA output file to be used to format the data records Using copybook_name syntax has a processing overhead in that a CREATE STRUCTURE operation is performed to generate a temporary SDO This overhead is greater if COBOL or PL1 is specified since a compile of the copybook is performed to first obtain the ADATA file output Therefore it is recommended that
181. a non temporary SDO is generated using CREATE STRUCTURE and that this is used for future formatting of the data on EDIT BROWSE FSU etc VIEW record_type VIEW Identifies one or more record types for which records will be displayed in the initial SDE view Records that are associated with other record types are not visible within the display but are displayed as shadow lines instead asterisk indicates all record types including the internal record type UnMapped or UnMappedSeg which is used to map data records that have no associated RTO in the SDO Records within the display may be later suppressed or made visible using the VIEW command Default is VIEW FORMAT EMT Specifies the format in which record data will be displayed in the initial SDE view SINGLE Single record format SNGL TABLE Table format Default CHARACTER Multi record view with all records or record segments mapped as single variable length character fields with field name UnMapped or UnMappedSeg No data conversion is performed HEX Same as CHARACTER with the addition that the data is also displayed in Hex below the character display Note that the Hex display occupies an additional 2 lines of data The data display format may be later altered using the FORMAT and or ZOOM commands READONLY Perform read only edit of the data Unless the fileid of the edited data set is changed attempts to save changes made to the data during the SDE e
182. a a PA ease amen com ae gt I TITLE short titie DESCRiption long_description ege E XRef Definition TER a a a an gt SS aa CopyBook Definition EE DBZ Definition aaa Direct Definition NOREPlace CASE IGNORE gt See a er ce Sa a ee Sasa ese gt lt REPlace TEMPorary CASE RESPECT XRef Definition A RS PA gt v LIBrary copybook_library BEE v RECord RecordType Definition gt RecordType Definition gt NAME record_type O gt COBol gt SOURCE EE member_name ke gt BLI copybook_library member_name DES adata fileid lt SDO sfile_fileid STRUCTure Record Definition PRImary gt A A nanan Kl WHEN expression Ho gt Ac SECondary F USE F TR S DEFault eRe HHS 6 SS SS SS ee SS SESS Posse SS Se ee SS SS SSS Se gt plus F FSE TORES ASADO GE n_bytes minus CopyBook Definition COBOL ppp lov gt FROM ete heaps eigen a epg ete gee
183. a has been reached Where WRAP is OFF and the End of Data or Top of Data is reached then the following message is returned ZZSD176W Top End of file or record range reached SET WRAP takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Specifies whether LOCATE searches are allowed to wrap ON or not OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the WRAP options ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables ken The current setting of the WRAP options ON or OFF 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 236 SET QUERY EXTRACT WRAP SET QUERY EXTRACT Option ZEROS SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax Pa E t Aeros S lt aS ON SS SSS SSeS Se E gt lt a SET ls OFF gt gt Query ASEOS SSS ot en SS gt lt gt gt EXTract Zeros gt lt Description This option causes values in all numeric fields to be prefixed by zeros up to the width of the field display SET ZEROS takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether ZEROS prefixing is in effect ON or not OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the ZEROS option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables zeros 1 The current setting of ZEROS ON or OFF 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 237 Prefix Area Line Commands The following commands can be entered in
184. a item i e no numerical interpretation The length of the field is determined by the quoted p 1_picture_string pl1_picture_string may contain any valid PL 1 picture character for character data If invalid characters e g numeric picture characters E V Z etc are specified then an error will occur Default is PCHAR X Defines a field to be interpreted as a PL 1 style PICTURE string representing a FIXED point numerical character data item The length of the field is determined by the quoted p 1_picture_string pl1_picture_string may contain any valid PL 1 picture character for numeric character data except for exponent characters E and K If invalid characters are specified then an error will occur Default is PFIXED S9 Defines a field to be interpreted as a PL 1 style PICTURE string representing a FLOAT point numerical character data item The length of the field is determined by the quoted p 1_picture_string pl1_picture_string may contain any valid PL 1 picture character for numeric character data If invalid characters are specified then an error will occur Default is PFLOAT S9ES99 STRUCTure TIME Defines a field to be interpreted as a structure containing one or more fields specified using Field Definition syntax One or more of these fields may themselves be structures and so nesting of structures is supported Each field definition should be separated by a comma Defines a time field with the source data interpre
185. able length fields or a variable number of repeating groups e g array elements SDO A Structure Definition Object is a SELCOPY i SDE generated structure comprises one or more RTO and is used by SELCOPY i SDE to map record data If a COBOL PL1 copybook or ADATA file is specified for record mapping then SELCOPY i will automatically generate an SDO from the copybook ADATA source For this reason and unless otherwise stated an SDO is often referenced simply as a structure An SDO is referenced by its structure name which if non temporary is the fileid of the structure definition disk file to which it is saved Segment or Record Segment An area of record data treated as an individual record for Segmented browse edit Mapped segment boundaries are determined by the RTO data length and any offset defined for that RTO An unmapped segment comprises all remaining data in the record that follows the last mapped segment Segmented Browse Edit A type of SDE file edit or browse that treats consecutive non overlapping areas segments of record data as individual records Segmented browse edit invoked when an SDO containing one or more RTO of type SEC is used to format record data Structure A named object that contains one or more record structure Unless otherwise stated structure refers explicitly to a SELCOPY i SDE structured data object SDO 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 5 Introduction to SDE Terminology Whe
186. accomodate all the column s data and header text the column will be truncated Attempting to scroll right beyond the last data column will make the last data column the first column of the display Furthermore if the last data column is of type character AN then scrolling beyond this column will make the last character of the data the first character of the display Parameters CURSOR CSR The focus column becomes the first column of the scrolled display In addition to this if the focus column is type character AN and the cursor is positioned at an offset into the focus column then the character data at the cursor offset will occupy the first position within the first column of the scrolled display If any of the following conditions are true then RIGHT PAGE is executed instead 0 Cursor is positioned anywhere other than within a floating column in a visible data record 0 Focus column is not type AN and is already the first floating column of the display 0 Focus column is type AN is already the first floating column of the display and cursor position is at the first position of the displayed column data ALL Valid only in multi record view ALL indicates that scrolling is to apply to all records in the display and not only those records that are assigned the default record type DATA Scroll right so that the last floating column of the current display area becomes the first floating column of the scrolled display If this c
187. ach line_flag keyword may be found in its equivalent function description ERRor TT CCHANGEERRORQ q 3 NN DATATYPEERROR TT NS VALERRor______ gt gt gt gt VALUEERROR Examples more 5 gt gt X 41 Make visible any EXCLUDED records that are of the default record type where field reference number 5 begins with X 41 ASCII character A more LastName C Evans 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 149 Command Line Primary Commands MORE Make visible any EXCLUDED records that are of the default record type where the contents of field LastName is equal Evans See Also FLIP LESS WHERE MSG Description SDE CLI command MSG performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command MSG See MSG in CBLe Text Edit documentation NEXT Syntax Segmented Record Edit Segment 1 fies ele ai ee ee i lt 4 I gt gt Next y ase esc SS po pos gt ase eses O p SSS Sse seeeS gt lt Base gt n_seg record_type e aa fou EE Pa SS 1 ps Unmapped Ee Non Segmented Record Edit gt gt Next E EE 4 4 gt lt gt Unmapped K sse Description When used in an SDE BROWSE EDIT view of segmented records NEXT scrolls to a segment that follo
188. age is returned ZZSD148E Data element field_col is not defined in record type record_type of structure struct_name Default is the focus column FOR RECORD record_type Identifies the record type mapping in which the specified field_col is defined Default is the default record type IN STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the name of the SDO structure in which the specified record_type is defined Required only if a distinction is to be made between multiple data sets displayed in SDE views each using different SDO structure definitions but where the specified record_type is defined in more than one of the structures Default is the SDO structure used to map records in the current SDE view IDSCOPE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax ALL CHANGED A i ee IDScope EE REES gt lt SET FLAGGED gt gt Query EE 2325222922 SAA gt lt gt gt EXTract IDScope 7771 gt lt Description This option controls which record flag must be set on in order for that record to be selected for remap by the IDENTIFY command Note that for segmented record edit a record may be selected for remap if the required flag is set on for any of its primary or secondary segments SET IDSCOPE takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ALL CHANGED 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SD
189. akes effect at the File level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value BLOCK Text within a marked block field Default colour is BLUE REVERSE FILEAREA Untagged unmarked text within display area Default colour is BLUE HEADING Field Name Field Reference and Field Data Type header lines Default colour is WHITE HELDDATA Field data within the display area belonging to field columns that have been HELD using the SELECT command Default colour is TURQUOISE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 195 SET QUERY EXTRACT COLOUR COLOR SET QUERY EXTRACT Option HELDTITLE Field header and scale lines within the display area belonging to field columns that have been HELD using the SELECT command Default colour is YELLOW HIGHLIGHT Highlighted tagged lines Default colour is YELLOW KEY Data field s occupying the KEY field of a KSDS data set Default colour is BLUE USCORE MODIFIED Supported for DB2 table edit fields containing changed data Default colour is YELLOW MSGLINE Message lines with MSGLINE ON Default colour is RED NONDISPLAY econ type Character or AlphaNumeric AN which contain non printable characters Default colour is DEFAULT U RE PENDING Pending commands in the prefix area Default colour is RED PREFIX Prefix area with PREFIX ON Default colour is GREEN PRIMARY Untagged unmarked primary record segment text within display area Default c
190. alues are swapped field_col1 and field_col2 have the same specifications as field_col 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 86 Command Line Primary Commands CHAR Specification of multiple field column ranges must either be enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and field columns ranges e g FirstName LastName 2 Salary Bonus EmpNo 10 15 If field names are used enclosing parentheses are mandatory namel A label name identifying the first record of a range of data records to be searched The preceding dot is mandatory Default is ZFIRST name2 A label name identifying the last record of a range of data records to be searched The preceding dot is mandatory If name2 occurs before name in the display then the order is reversed If CHANGE PREV is executed and name is specified the default is ZFIRST Otherwise the default is ZLAST DATA DATA as opposed to TEXT indicates that records are to be treated as data so that CHANGE performs no special treatment of any multiple consecutive blanks that follow the replaced string DATA is default TEXT TEXT as opposed to DATA indicates that records are to be treated as formatted text so that CHANGE operaties identically to the ISPF edit style CHANGE command i e blanks following the replaced string may be absorbed or added in order to maintain text position
191. ame or zero or more characters within a member name 9 A single percent sign represents exactly one character within a member name mask Default is library mask is User SDO where user is the user s RACF logon id Examples LIST SDO DEV SBL SDO CC MAN XM J List SDO members that match this library and member masks LIST STORAGE Syntax Description Use the LIST STORAGE command to open a list window containing details of bit mapped storage used for the current SDE edit browse view CBL may request that this command is executed for diagnostic purposes in problem determination Parameters LIST STORAGE has no parameters LIST UKRS Syntax Description For SDE edit of a VSAM KSDS data set use the LIST UKRS command to open a list window containing details of updated KSDS keys for the current SDE edit view CBL may request that this command is executed for diagnostic purposes in problem determination Parameters LIST UKRS has no parameters 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 143 Command Line Primary Commands LIST UKRS LOCATE Syntax Locate Ce eebe EE Record Locate Options A ae gt lt Formatted Column Locate Options Record Locate Options ied T in RT a name o aso s pesonas gt 1 RECord bak gt 3 meie i PERS ho r cord NUM EE 1 KEY seas ee ee k gt po key_string
192. and Line Primary Commands EXCLUDE SUFFIX For non numeric search strings only SUFFIX indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found at the end of a word within the data being searched i e the matched text must be preceded by an alphanumeric character and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field WORD For non numeric search strings only WORD indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found to be a complete word within the data being searched i e the matched text must either be preceded by a non alphanumeric character or be at the start of a line or field and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field posl The first position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched For formatted records this is a position in the expanded record Only those fields or parts of fields that fall within the position range will be searched Fields will be searched in the order that they occur within the display area pos may be a positive or negative integer value not zero and must be a value that is less than or equal to the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data the length of the expanded record A negative value represents a position in the record relative to the end of the record Therefore where position 1 references the 1st character in the record position 1 references the last
193. ange levels that may be undone is represented by the third number in the Alt n n m alteration count displayed in the status line of the MDI parent window If this number has an asterisk appended then this indicates that change levels are available to be re applied with REDO Note If updates are made to field data after undoing changes then those change levels can no longer be re applied and the trailing on the alteration count is dropped The maximum number of change levels that can be stored for each individual file edited with SDE is set by the SET UNDOING option This command also controls the maximum amount of storage that may be allocated for storing information required by SDE to UNDO and REDO a change represented by a change level Once the maximum amount of defined change levels or change storage is reached SDE silently discards as much of the oldest change level information as is required to continue editing data Consequently changes represented by these discarded change levels can no longer be undone 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 29 SDE Concepts Although SELCOPY i SDE runs within the CBLe text edit frame window it is a much more sophisticated method of editing data Presentation and edit of record data within SDE must adhere strictly to precedents defined by the associated file structure In order to do this SDE introduces certain concepts and terminology that are used in its interpretat
194. ap IDENTIFY a line or a block of lines IDENTIFY will action SELCOPY i SDE record type assignment processing to re assign a new record type to the records segments in the selected lines Show the last n records of an excluded record group Mark a line or a block of lines for move Lines may be moved to the clipboard effectively performing a CLIPBOARD CUT operation or moved to another position within the same edited data using prefix commands A or B Only visible not excluded data records and shadow lines representing EXCLUDED record groups are eligible to be moved i e records flagged as NOTSELECTED SUPPRESSED or if SHADOW OFF EXCLUDED is in effect records flagged as EXCLUDED are not eligible to be moved Structured Data Environment SDE 238 Prefix Area Line Commands Prefix Area Line Commands STP STS 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Note that although not eligible for move shadow lines representing NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED records groups are still included within a M n count of lines to be moved If a shadow line is not displayed SHADOW OFF it is not included within a M n line count Display the record or record segment in single record formatted view Prefix commands FMT and MAP are synonyms Replicate duplicate a line or a block of lines n times Only visible not excluded data records and shadow lines representing EXCLUDED record groups are eligible for replication i e records flagged as NOTSELECTED SUPPRES
195. ared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the order by clause USING STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the SDO to be applied to the DB2 data rows struct_name is the SDF fileid assigned to the SDO ina CREATE STRUCTURE command If the USING STRUCTURE option is specified then SELECT WHERE and ORDER BY options are ignored The SDO may contain DB2 SQL query SELECT WHERE and ORDER BY sub clause options which are used to select and display DB2 table rows Other DB2 table edit options apart from LOCKTABLE FORMAT READONLY FROM and FOR may also exist in the SDO and so define default values which may be overridden by specific parameters on the EDIT command e g WITH isolation clause SKIPLOCKED COMMIT SKIPLOCKED Ignored unless an isolation level of Cursor Stability CS or Read Stability RS is in effect SKIPLOCKED specifies that any selected rows that are already locked by another process should be skipped and not be included in the edit display See DB2 SQL Reference for details on the SKIP LOCKED DATA clause Default is to allow display of locked rows whenever possible PROTECTPRIMEKEY EDITPRIMEKEY Specifies whether data occupying columns that comprise the table s primary key is eligible for update EDITPRIMEKEY or is read only PROTECTPRIMEKEY Default is PROTECTPRIMEKEY WITH CS UR RR RS lt KEEP EXCLUSIVE UPDATE SHR gt Specifies a DB2 SQL isolation clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement
196. assigned to a particular record expression is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record_type field names and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of the WHEN expression must be numeric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition If a WHEN expression returns a true result for a data record then the record type to which it is defined is assigned to that record If WHEN is specified with no expression then any existing WHEN expression will be removed from the record type definition NEVER ON OFF NEVER ON indicates that the specified record type should never be assigned to a record and so this record type is removed from record type assignment processing If the specified record type has been assigned to all records with USE ALWAYS ON then USE ALWAYS OFF is set Note that USE NEVER ON will not remove any USE WHEN expression defined to the record type NEVER OFF removes the NEVER ON definition for the specified record type and so reinstates the record type as being eligible for record type assignment processing NEVER ON is default if NEVER is specified without ON or OFF FOR FOCUS RECORD lt ON OFF gt 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 180 Command Line Primary Commands VFMT FOR FOCUS RECORD assigns the specified record type to the record occu
197. assumed e g 18 2 3 Specifying relative_line is equivalent to executing the DOWN n_ ines or UP n_lines commands expression expression is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record_type field names and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of expression must be numeric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition When an expression is applied to the record it must test true in order to be selected as a target of the LOCATE command For LOCATE expression may not be specified as a single field value term with no operators An expression of this sort will be treated as a formatted column locate specification Furthermore if expression involves a function call to a built in function name that matches a subscripted field name in the default record then the function call will be interpreted as a field value To force the function call the internal function name should be used instead i e BIF_function_name By default data records of the selected record type that have been EXCLUDED are included in the locate scan and are made visible if they satisfy expression line_flag ALL FIRST LAST NEXT PREV line_flag may be specified to locate a record or record segment that has been flagged with the requested line flag Each valid line_flag keyword detailed b
198. at a field group exists for the defined maximium number of occurrences of the repeating group All other types of record segment are unexpanded Formatted Record Segment A typed record segment for which the record data has been arranged into discrete fields as defined by the assigned RTO An unformatted record segment is one that is untyped or one that is typed with data arranged as a single character field of length equal to the record length Mapped Record Segment An alternative name for a formatted record segment An unmapped record segment is an alternative name for an untyped record segment PL1 Copybook A data set or PDS PDSE library member that contains one or more Enterprise PL1 structure definitions and is usually included by PL1 source programs to provide a file record layout Record Structure The definition of one or more fields that correspond to areas of a file record or DB2 table row or column A record structure may define the complete or partial layout of fields within a file record or DB2 column Record type The name assigned to a single RTO definition in a SELCOPY i SDO structure Record type is analogous with RTO and is often used to refer to an RTO definition RTO A Record Type Object is a single record structure within an SDO An RTO is referenced by a unique record type name RTO Data Length The sum of all field lengths defined by the RTO The RTO data length may encompass a range of values if the RTO includes vari
199. at record type is assigned to the record Field Definition Definition of a single field within the record RTO field_name The field name identifier PICture picture_string Any COBOL style picture string e g PIC S9 7 This is treated purely as comment data DIMensions Used to define an array of given datatype An integer that defines the fixed number of elements rs An integer that defines the minimum number of elements mar A An integer that defines the maximum number of elements The field name that defines the variable number of elements e g dim 12 dim 0 44 Ob jNum dim 0 10 OutPrtNum 0 10 OutPunNum EBCDIC ASCII For character fields only treat as either EBCDIC or ASCII Default is as defined on the Record Definition otherwise EBCDIC SIGNED UNSIGNED For numeric fields only treat as signed or unsigned Default is SIGNED The sub parameters LEADing TRAILing and SEParate INCluded are applicable to zoned decimal only and correspond directly to the COBOL SIGN clause ALIGNED UNALIGNED Determines whether the field will be boundary aligned for its data type Default is UNALIGNED ZEROS Applicable to numeric fields only ZEROS indicates that leading zeros are to be displayed For alpha numeric fields this parameter is ignored 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 100 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE DEFault REMarks default_value Specifies the
200. ault Record Tupe If mo LEV 01 entry Figure 3 SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel Create SDO Alternatively use the SDE CREATE STRUCTURE command to generate the SDO via the command line interface e g lt SDATA CREATE STRUCT CBL SELCOPYI SDOLIB SAMSALES FROM COBOL CBL SELC310 SZZSSAM1 ZZSCOBSA Note 1 The CREATE STRUCTURE command may be executed from within SELCOPY i via the command line or from a CBLe text edited file using ACTION lt F16 gt Additionally it may be included in SDEIN input for batch execution using the SDEAMAIN executable program 2 Unlike the SDE Edit Browse panel method generating an SDO using CREATE STRUCTURE command supports specification of multiple copy book files each potentially containing one or more record structure definitions group items Create an SDE siructure SDO Compiler Return Code SELCOPY i SDE compiler options exist that nominate the compiler load module and also the maximum compiler return code for which SDE will continue to generate an SDO If the SDO generation fails with the following message then an unexpected return code has been set by the compiler and so SELCOPY i displays the compiler output listing in a text edit view ZZSDO087E COBOL PL1 compile has failed with return code nn decimal To update your maximum acceptable return code currently value 0 select Settings from the Primary Option Menu Then select Data Edit options Review the compiler out
201. ay along the width of the current display of floating columns becomes the last column of the scrolled display If this column is type character AN and the half display position falls on a character that is at an offset into the column then an attempt is made to make that character occupy the last position of the scrolled display MAX Scroll left to display the first floating column of data in a multi record view In single record view the first visible data record is displayed PAGE Scroll left so that the floating column of data to the left of the first floating column in the current display becomes the last column of the scrolled display If this column is type character AN and the first position of the display minus one falls on a character that is at an offset into the column then an attempt is made to make that character occupy the last position of the scrolled display n_cols In a multi record view scroll left a specified number of floating columns The floating column of data that is n_cols to the left of the first floating column becomes the new first floating column of the scrolled display In single record view the visible data record that is n_cols records before the record currently in view gets displayed Examples left page Scroll records of the default record type in a multi record view display area left by a full display area width minus the width of any columns flagged with HOLD See Also DOWN RIGHT UP LESS Syntax gt
202. be searched The preceding dot is mandatory Default is ZFIRST A label name identifying the last record of a range of data records to be searched The preceding dot is mandatory If name2 occurs before name7 in the display then the order is reversed If EXCLUDE PREV is executed and name is specified the default is ZFIRST Otherwise the default is ZLAST 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 124 Command Line Primary Commands Examples exclude last 100 Exclude the last record in the display of the default record type that contains a numeric field with value 100 ora character field containing the string 100 ex c Spec prefix 10 20 TitleTrack Exclude the first record in the display of the default record type that contains the exact string Spec as a word prefix within any of the selected character fields x all Exclude all records of the default record type See Also CHANGE FIND ONLY RFIND SELECT EXTRACT Description See SET QUERY EXTRACT Options FILE Syntax gt gt FILE 22777 Description Close all SDE window views for data displayed in the current SDE view Any unsaved changes are saved If a non temporary structure SDO is used to map the record data and changes have been made to that structure during the EXTRACT course of the edit session e g USE WHEN then the user will be prompted to save the changed structure to its structured data f
203. ber Relational Operators The value returned on evaluating a relational operator is either 1 if the result is true or 0 if the value is false If the terms acted upon by a relational operator are numerical then the comparison will be arithmetic and signed In this case the numerical data type of one or both of the terms may be temporarily converted before performing the evaluation If one of the terms has a character data type then the comparison will be logical so that a simple character by character compare occurs Except for relational operators gt gt lt lt gt gt and lt lt the shorter string is padded on the right with blanks Supported relational operators are Not equal less than or greater than Greater than NOT gt Less than NOT lt 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 50 SDE Concepts Relational Operators Beginning For logical compare only NOT gt gt Contains For logical compare only lt lt ee I lt lt Does not contain For logical compare only NOT lt lt Logical Operators Logical operators are Boolean and so like relational operators return a value of 1 for true and 0 for false The terms acted upon by a logical operator must evaluate to numerical values otherwise error ZZSDO68E is returned Any non zero value is treated as being 1 true Supported logical operators are Operator Description S ls aw Lang Ret
204. ber e g 6 or its name e g JobID If a field name is used enclosing parentheses are mandatory Field names are automatically converted to a field reference and Referencing the same field column more than once will not cause an error If the field is an array then all elements of the array are searched To search an individual element of an array the element occurrence should be specified in parentheses as a subscript to the field reference name e g 13 3 for the 3rd element of a single dimension array An entry must exist for each dimension of the array e g RoomSize 6 2 4 a three dimensional array Specification of multiple field columns must either be enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas The field columns may be specified in any order however the data is always searched from the first column in the display to the last Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and columns ranges e g JobID 6 Tax_Reference 12 15 20 A search is only performed on field columns that are selected for display Therefore any field column specified on the CHANGE command that has not been selected for display will be ignored field_coll field_col2 The first and last fields of a range of field columns to be searched within a formatted record display display field_col1 and field_col2 must be separated by colon and if field_co 1 occurs after field_col2 in the data record then the v
205. ber of rows to be displayed from the DB2 results table returned by the SQL query Rows that fall outside the range of rows specified by FROM n FOR n_rows are not included within the edit session Default is to display all selected rows PROFILE macro_name Specifies the REXX SDE edit macro to be executed as the profile when the data set is edited macro_name must exist in a library within the SDE macro path The PROFILE option only alters the profile used for the file currently being edited It does not define the profile macro to be used for subsequent SDE edit The default is to execute a macro with member name SDEPROF if it exists NOPROFILE Suppresses use of a profile macro when editing the file The NOPROFILE option only suppresses use of a profile for the file currently being edited It does not suppress use of a profile macro for subsequent SDE edit Examples lt sd edit CBL SDE MOD ZJ2202 using CBL CBLI SDO PRODL view ARCX1 PRDMST PRODX Edit data set CBL SDE MOD ZJ2202 using Structure Definintion Object SDO CBL CBLI SDO PRODL to map records Initially all records of type ARCX1 PRDMST and PRODX are displayed lt sd edit CBL SAMP01 KSDS using CBL CBLI SDO SAMPO1 from key XMHW003 for 50 Edit VSAM KSDS data set CBL SAMP01 KSDS using SDO CBL CBLI SDO SAMP01 to map 50 records starting at the record with key XMHW003 or the next record in key sequence if this key is not found lt sd edit db2 CBLA ZZS ZZSSYSMOD w
206. cates the number of change levels If this number is not zero then changes may be undone using UNDO Parameters None See Also REDO UNDOING SET QUERY EXTRACT Undo and Redo Changes UNFMT Syntax gt gt UNFMT gt lt UNMAP Description Display records or record segments in single record unformatted character view by temporarily disabling the record type RTO assigned to each record or record segment TOP Compare with ZOOM of an SDE view set as FORMAT CHAR which displays the records segments in a single record unformatted view but does not disable the assigned record type Note that unformatted records have record type UnMapped unformatted segments of a segmented record have record type UnMappedSeg Parameters UNFMT has no parameters See Also FORMAT CHAR MAP FMT VFMT ZOOM 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 177 Command Line Primary Commands UNFMT UP Syntax gt gt UP PH A gt lt Cursor 2 gt gt CSR t Data SS an foo Had 2 ES Max 220 A F Page 35 A 4 lines Description Scroll the view of the data within the SDE window upwards towards the top of the file data Where no parameter is specified the scroll amount will be the value specified in the Scroll
207. ch field occupies a separate column Vertical scrolling transfers focus between records Horizontal scrolling transfers focus between fields QUERY Response The string FORMAT followed by the current setting of the FORMAT option CHAR HEX SINGLE or TABLE EXTRACT Rexx variables oner T peouent setting of the FORMAT option FPATH SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option FPATH has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET FPATH in CBLe Text Edit documentation FTYPE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option FTYPE has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET FTYPE in CBLe Text Edit documentation FVALUE EXTRACT Option Syntax fieldname gt gt EXTract FVALUE s eege gt lt Description For use in macros EXTRACT FVALUE generates a REXX variable with an assigned value one for each field column selected for display and belonging to the default record type Unnamed field columns are ignored Alternatively if a specific field name fieldname is specified then a REXX variable with assigned value is generated for this field only Note that fieldname must also have been selected for display and must belong to the default record type The generated REXX variable names are the record field column names and their assigned values are the character representa
208. cluded records that contain an occurrence of the string value are made visible if NX is not specified FIND ALL with no other parameters is equivalent to RESET FIND EXCLUDED Search forwards from the top of the file data i e the first position of the first data record to find the first occurrence of the string Search backwards from the bottom of the file data i e the last position of the last data record to find the last occurrence of the string 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 128 Command Line Primary Commands FIND Search forwards from the current cursor location to find the next occurrence of the string If the cursor is not within the window s data display area the search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the default record type PREV Search backwards from the current cursor location to find the previous occurrence of the string If the cursor is not within the window s data display area the backwards search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the default record type CHARS For non numeric search strings only CHARS indicates that a successful match occurs if the search string is found anywhere within the data being searched PREFIX For non numeric search strings only PREFIX indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found at the start of a wor
209. column Where the last column to be displayed is not of type character AN the magnitude by which the display is scrolled to the left is always reduced to display all field data belonging to the last column In addition the display area must contain all column header text belonging to the first column and where the first column is not of type character AN it must also contain all field data rac pe first column Therefore to accomodate this the magnitude by which the display is scrolled to the left may be urther reduced Because of these adjustments it is possible that execution of a LEFT command may result in no change to the displayed data in which case LEFT PAGE is executed instead No adjustment is made for scrolling left into an offset within a character data column i e where the last column of the display is of type character the last position of the column display need not be the last character of the character data If the last column to be displayed is of type character and the display width is too small to accomodate all the column s data and header text the column will be truncated However due to the other adjustments made for scrolling left it may be impossible for some characters within the BN data to occupy the last position of the column display In order to overcome this the user would have to alter the display area dimensions Attempting to scroll left beyond the start of the record will make the first data column the f
210. column heading will appear blank or FILLER The UNNAMED option operates at the View level affects all record types and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Set display of UNNAMED fields ON or OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the UNNAMED option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables lunnamed 1 The current setting of the UNNAMED option ON or OFF USEOFFSET SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax plus A as USEOL Eset o o s jezi EE Se n bytes gt 2 SET E Ge record_type Ee minus gt ALL n Poo dos 2202 22 Kee Kee gt lt 2 LN ai EE struct_name e e STRUCTure al gt gt Query H ft eet 4 EE gt record_type dl gt ALL Poo ooo O SS SO OS T eege gt lt a EN Sie arr ear S struct_name al STRUCTure 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 232 SET QUERY EXTRACT USEOFFSET SET QUERY EXTRACT Option gt gt EXTract USEOffset toe ee Se gt record_type PR ALL Ho E eer gt gt lt IN 2222222222202 struct_name t STRUCTure f Description This option determines the offset into a record at which data mapping by the associated record type object RTO is to begin This offset may be a negative
211. cord segments regardless of segment type and assigned RTO PREV SEGMENT the default for segmented record display restricts scrolling to only those secondary segments belonging to the current segmented record If the specified secondary segment cannot be found within the current record e g PREV 6 for a record containing only 5 secondary segments then the last segment to match the PREV parameter criteria becomes the current segment and the following message is returned ZZSD441E Base record exhausted Final match nn of mm displayed Where nn is the last occurrence of the segment assigned record type record_type to be found previous to the current segment and mm is the requested number of matching segments to be scrolled n_seg If using the default parameter values to simply scroll to the previous secondary segment this message will contain 0 of 1 where an attempt has been made to scroll to the first secondary segment prior to the first secondary segment in the record Parameters SEGMENT BASE UNMAPPED Specifies the type of segment to be selected as the current segment SEGMENT indicates a secondary segment BASE indicates a primary base segment and UNMAPPED indicates an unformatted primary or secondary segment Note that unformatted primary segments i e records have record type Unmapped and unformatted secondary segments have record type UnmappedSeg Default is SEGMENT for segmented record browse edit and BASE otherwis
212. ction will be made Before a connection can be made to the DB2 sub system the SELCOPY i DB2 plan must have been bound to that sub system Default for ssn is the users default DB2 sub system name as set by the DB2 Primary Options menu table_name 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 98 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE A DB2 base table name specified as table_owner table_name containing the columns that constitute the structure s only record type RTO definition view_name A DB2 table view specified as view_owner view_name which references an SQL query used to generate a results table containing the columns that constitute the structure s only record type RTO definition DB2 Opts The following DB2 options are saved in the structure and are used to generate the dynamic SQL query statement apply further mapping to DB2 column data and also set default values for SDE DB2 table edit These options are invoked if the structure is applied on edit or browse via the USING STRUCTNAME parameter SELECT select clause Specifies a DB2 SQL SELECT clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the select clause WHERE where clause Specifies a DB2 SQL WHERE clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the where clause SORT ORDER BY order by clause Specifies a DB2 SQL ORDER BY clause to be included in
213. ctured Data Environment SDE 235 SET QUERY EXTRACT VIEW SET QUERY EXTRACT Option WINNAME SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option WINNAME have the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET WINNAME in CBLe Text Edit documentation WINPOS SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option WINPOS have the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET WINPOS in CBLe Text Edit documentation WINSIZE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option WINSIZE have the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET WINSIZE in CBLe Text Edit documentation WRAP SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt WRap ON gt lt Se SET Lo OFF gt gt Query WEE i te gt lt gt gt EXTract WRap gt lt Description WRAP defines whether a LOCATE where_clause search wraps around the end of the range of displayable records to continue searching until either the condition is found or the original focus line is encountered i e when WRAP is set ON searching forwards through the data continues from the Top of Data after End of Data has been reached Likewise searching backwards through the data continues from the End of Data when Top of Dat
214. ctured Data Environment SDE 87 Command Line Primary Commands CLIPBOARD VFMT ZOOM CLIPBOARD Description SDE CLI command CLIPBOARD performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command CLIPBOARD See CLIPBOARD in CBLe Text Edit documentation CMSG Description SDE CLI command CMSG performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command CMSG See CMSG in CBLe Text Edit documentation COPY Syntax FROM 1 TO gt gt COPY fileid S EE EE pes Ren SSeS EE EE bebe pit OI FROM TO E ae Ss start_line e o E end_line to e E S H Sr n_lines AFTER gt A LS Ge See eebe gt lt l BEFORE e name 2 Note 1 TO is mandatory if start_line is not specified Description Copy lines from an existing sequential or VSAM data set PDS PDSE library member or HFS file into the focus SDE Edit view The line within the focus SDE edit data which identifies the target of the copy is specified by a line label name If no line label name is specified the target line is the first line containing line prefix area command A AFTER or B BEFORE otherwise the focus line COPY supports copy of lines belonging to files that can be loaded entirely in available storage Beware that if an attempt is made to copy lines from a file which cannot be loaded in available storage a shortage of storage error will be displayed and the focus SDE edit view will b
215. current edit session DUPE gt 2 Following a SAVE operation the focus record was flagged as having a duplicate key with another unchanged record whithin the file DUPF gt Because DUPLICATEKEY has no arguments it may be expressed simply as DUPLICATEKEY EMPTYSLOT gt gt EMPTYSLOT gt lt EMPTYSLOT or BIFEMPTYSLOT has no arguments It applies to edit of VSAM RRDS and VRDS only and returns 1 if on load the focus record was flagged as being an empty slot and 0 otherwise Because EMPTYSLOT has no arguments it may be expressed simply as EMPTYSLOT EXCLUDED gt gt EXCLUDED gt lt EXCLUDED or BIFEXCLUDED has no arguments It returns 1 if the focus record segment or DB2 table row belongs to a group of one or more excluded lines in the current edit session and 0 otherwise Because EXCLUDED has no arguments it may be expressed simply as EXCLUDED FIND gt gt FIND find syntax eier gt lt FIND or BIFFIND supports a single argument find_syntax which is a literal or charcter string comprising a structured data edit FIND command parameter string Note that the parameter string will be upper cased unless specified as a character string i e specified in quotation marks or apostrophes and prefixed with c or C If successful FIND ret
216. d Data Environment Structured Data Environment that runs under SELCOPY i and includes MDI display windows processing options and CLI commands SDE enables users to browse edit update copy and compare data in records that are mapped by a SELCOPY i defined structure or COBOL PL1 copybook SDE Edit View An SDE MDI document window that contains a display of structured data If the same file is displayed in multiple windows then the user has multiple SDE edit or CBLe text edit views of the file SDO Structure Definition Object An in storage structure definition consisting of one or more record type objects RTO that map records in a structured file An SDO is created by a CREATE STRUCTURE command or an EDIT or BROWSE command if the SDF is not already loaded in storage SELCOPY i The Interactive environment developed by CBL and supplied as part of SELCOPY and CBLVCAT licensable software products Structured Data Set A data set containing structured records Structured Records Records that consist of one or more data fields each with a defined field start position length and data type 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 242
217. d has wrapped the prefix area contains the EOL gt flag For RECFM F data recl is the fixed length of the records in the edit view The data within the last record is padded with blanks up to the rec length if necessary If the record length field of a RECFM V record exceeds the rec value then an error is returned RECFM V and EOL delimited records have default rec of 32752 wheras RECFM F records have default rec of 80 SDE Opts The following SDE options are applicable to browse of structured data found in HFS files or z OS data sets only See DB2 Opts for DB2 table browse options USING STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the SDO to be applied to the data records struct_name is the SDF fileid assigned to the SDO ina CREATE STRUCTURE command equals may be specified instead of struct_name to indicate the name of the structure being used in the current SDE window USING COBOL PL1 ADATA copybook_name Identifies the full fileid of copybook_name a COBOL PL1 copy book or COBOL PL1 ADATA output file to be used to format the data records Using copybook_name syntax has a processing overhead in that a CREATE STRUCTURE operation is performed to generate a temporary SDO This overhead is greater if COBOL or PL1 is specified since a compile of the copybook is performed to first obtain the ADATA file output Therefore it is recommended that a non temporary SDO is generated using CREATE STRUCTURE and that this is used for fu
218. d length Built in function SEGPOS may be used in the USE WHEN expression record type identification criteria to reference a data field in the current segment or the segment immediately preceding the current segment Similarly BASPOS may be used to reference a data field in the primary base segment only e g The following identification criterion is based on an ID field of length 3 characters located 10 bytes before the end of the segment immediately preceding the current segment USE WHEN SegPos 10 3 C X12 If the ID field is a Packed Decimal value then LEFTDEC may be used to obtain the numeric value with or without a scale e g The following ID field is a packed decimal field located at position 12 of the primary segment USE WHEN LeftDec BasPos 12 gt 31 Formatted data field A formatted ID field references a field in the current segment or within a previous segment of a specific structure record type name If referencing a field in a previous segment the record type name which maps that segment must be specified as a high level qualifier to the field name i e record type field_name If more than one preceding segment is mapped using record type then the the one closest to the current segment is tested Because formatted fields have a specific data type the USE WHEN expression may involve operators and terms based on the data type of the ID field e g The following identification criterion is based on a floating point ID fi
219. d of a record the flag LGTH gt is displayed in the prefix area Structured Data Fields Records that have been assigned a record type RTO are displayed with the record data presented in individual formatted field columns The names assigned to each field are those defined by the SDO COBOL copybook or PL1 include file Similarly the assigned field reference number reflects the order in which the field occurs in the record structure hierarchy Both are displayed in the record type headers see SDE Window Views SDE commands and expressions may reference a field via its field name or its field reference number Field Name If unique the field may be identified simply by specifying its defined field name However if the field name is non unique occuring in one or more sub structures COBOL data description groups that exist in the record type definition then the field name must be fully or partially qualified by the the structure names of each level of structure in the hierarchy to which the field belongs The default qualifier separator symbol is dot period but this may be tailored using the SET QSEPARATOR option e g structA structN fieldX The number of preceding structure name qualifiers specified before the field name need only be enough to uniquely identify the required field e g structN fieldX is enough to destinguish it from structM fieldX If desired the field name may contain qualifiers of every level in the h
220. d reference and Referencing the same field column more than once will not cause an error If the field is an array then all elements of the array are searched To search an individual element of an array the element occurrence should be specified in parentheses as a subscript to the field reference name e g 13 3 for the 3rd element of a single dimension array An entry must exist for each dimension of the array e g RoomSize 6 2 4 a three dimensional array Specification of multiple field columns must either be enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas The field columns may be specified in any order however the data is always searched from the first column in the display to the last 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 129 Command Line Primary Commands FLIP Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and columns ranges e g JobID 6 Tax_Reference 12 15 20 A search is only performed on field columns that are selected for display Therefore any field column specified on the FIND command that has not been selected for display will be ignored field_coll field_col2 The first and last fields of a range of field columns to be searched within a formatted record display display field_col1 and field_col2 must be separated by colon and if field_co 1 occurs after field_col2 in the data record then the values are swapped field_col1 and field_col2 have the
221. d within the data being searched i e the matched text must precede an alphanumeric character and either be preceded by a non alphanumeric character or be at the start of a line or field SUFFIX For non numeric search strings only SUFFIX indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found at the end of a word within the data being searched i e the matched text must be preceded by an alphanumeric character and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field WORD For non numeric search strings only WORD indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found to be a complete word within the data being searched i e the matched text must either be preceded by a non alphanumeric character or be at the start of a line or field and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field EX X Search EXCLUDED data records only FIND does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED NX Search only visible data records i e not EXCLUDED FIND does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED pasi The first position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched For formatted records this is a position in the expanded record Only those fields or parts of fields that fall within the position range will be searched Fields will be searched in the order that they occur within the display area pos1 may be a posit
222. ded in parentheses Alternatively if SHOW LEVEL is in effect then by default Field header occupies the first two column headers replacing the Ref header and for each field entry that follows a hierarchical level number is displayed to the left of the field name Indentation occurs for each successive level number to highlight the record structure In this way the Field column entries resemble a COBOL copy book definition Note that the Ref header may be redisplayed in addition to this hierarchical format of the Field data by setting option REFERENCE on Type If SHOW TYPE is in effect the Type header is displayed to the right of the Field header For each field entry that follows the field s 2 character data type code its position within the record type definition and its maximum width is displayed as for Header Line 4 Field Type in a multi record view code pos length Format If SHOW FORMAT is in effect the Format header is displayed to the right of the Field header For each field entry that follows the field s maximum width and data type Is displayed as width type Picture If SHOW PICTURE is in effect the Picture header is displayed to the right of the Field header For each field entry that follows the COBOL or PL 1 field definition PICTURE string If the field was defined without a PICTURE string entries are displayed using the Type column data format Offset Position HexOff If SHOW OFFSET is in effect one of the foll
223. des records only if a character field contains the string 67 2 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are specified the search string is interpreted as being a character string and so a string compare is performed against the unformatted representation of the field data for fields falling entirely or partly within the range of record positions Although the range of positions may span a number of fields the search is still performed against individual fields within the range i e a match for the search string will not occur for data that spans a field boundary A match for the search string may occur on just part of the unformatted data representation of a numeric field e g EXCLUDE 476 21 100 This will find a match in any numeric field where unformatted representation of the data contains the string 476 and exclude the record e g a zoned decimal field with value 14760 or 4762 Parameters op A relational operator used in the compare operation which determines the relationship that the data must have with the EXCLUDE search string in order for it to be identified as a successful match Valid values for op are as follow If a character string compare is performed the EBCDIC values assigned to characters in the search and data strings determine the relationship equal to greater than or less than between the two strings string The EXCLUDE search string The seach string may be any of the following 0 An unquoted numeric
224. display Equivalent to the TOP command 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 178 Command Line Primary Commands UP PAGE Scroll up to display the next whole page of data The data record shadow line or field data line before the first line of the current display area becomes the last line of the scrolled display n_lines Scroll up a specified number of lines The data record shadow line or field data line that is n_lines lines above the current line becomes the first line of the scrolled display Examples up page Scroll the display area up one page See Also DOWN LEFT RIGHT USE Syntax gt gt USE record type SS SP O O AAA gt TEMPORARY IN struct_name STRUCTURE ON ALWAYS Ho pop ASE OFF gt WHEN Pose do noo es gt lt expression ON NEVER Hon SS oo l OFF ON l 4 FOCUS l l FOR RECord OFF Note 1 A user interface to the USE command allowing the user to list and set USE WHEN ALWAYS NEVER conditions is available from the SDE Edit Browse Utility Window menu accessed using lt F16 gt in any SDE edit browse session Items 6 and 7 Modify record type Identification criteria and Override record type for focus line respectively relate directly to the
225. display area which is wide enough to display all the field data or for numeric fields the largest possible numeric value Where the display field is wider than 2 bytes a scale begins with lt less than as position 1 and ends with gt greater than as the last position of the field The scale characters displayed and the the ability to switch this header line on and off is controlled by the SET SCALE command Prefix Area By default the record prefix is set on and so the prefix area is displayed containing the record sequence numbers The record prefix area may tailored or set on off using the SET PREFIX command Data Records By default all records of the file regardless of assigned record type are selected for display Records that have been selected for display are identified as data records Using the VIEW command records of different record types may be displayed or suppressed within a multi record view Where multiple record types are visible each record in the window display area that is of a different record type to the previous record will be immediately preceded by its column headers Therefore when viewing a mixture of records of different record types the display area may contain multiple groups of column header lines It is also possible that only part of a group of column header lines is displayed at the bottom of the display area Within formatted data records the display of character AN CH or VARCHAR fiel
226. dit Techniques Read Only edit is invoked by specifying READONLY on the SDE EDIT CLI command Like Full Edit AUXILIARY edit will be used if insufficient storage is available or AUXILIARY is specified on the EDIT command If Read Only Edit is in effect Edit RO is displayed in the SDE window title bar to the left of the DSN If AUXILIARY edit is used for read only editing Edit AUXRO is displayed instead Update in place Edit Not supported for DB2 table edit this edit technique allows in place record update only Records cannot be inserted deleted moved or copied and record lengths cannot be altered The exception to this is RRDS update in place edit where empty slots may be created by record delete and made enterable by record insert Update in place edit is invoked or implied by the following 1 Specification of parameter UPDATE on the SDE EDIT CLI command 2 Parameter FROM and or FOR indicating start record and number of records is specified on the SDE EDIT CLI command 3 Data set is a VSAM ESDS or RRDS file with IDCAMS DEFINE CLUSTER option NOREUSE 4 Data set is not VSAM KSDS and load of the data set into storage has been interrupted by the user following receipt of the Load Threshold break in modal window Before a data set is opened for Update in place Edit SDE first establishes whether enough storage is available to load the entire data set If insufficient storage is available SDE will only load a single page of records fo
227. dit session will give an error REUSE Where possible full edit capabilities of record move copy insert change and delete are to be permitted for the data set being edited Also where the data set organisation and SDO structure permits data changes may result 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 115 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT in changes to record lengths SELCOPY i SDE first determines whether the entire data set may be comfortably loaded into available storage If not parameter REUSE is ignored and AUXILIARY edit becomes default Full REUSE edit is not possible for VSAM RRDS and ESDS data sets defined with NOREUSE in which case parameter REUSE is ignored and the ESDS RRDS data set is edited using Update in place edit For all other data sets parameter REUSE is the default UPDATE Update in place Edit is to be used so that existing records may only be altered and replaced without changing the record length Records cannot be moved copied inserted or deleted Use of Update in place Edit has significant performance advantages over full REUSE edit when editing large non KSDS data sets UPDATE is default if the edited data set is a VSAM ESDS or RRDS file defined with NOREUSE or the data set is non KSDS and its load into storage has been interrupted by the user via the Load Threshold break in modal window AUXILIARY Select Auxiliary edit for non KSDS data sets AUXILIARY is ignored for edit of a KSDS data
228. dos TEN SEERE EST 198 DRECIVYPE SE QUERY EAMRACT OPIO estacas E E E 199 DSN SETOVE RY TMA GM ODIOM EE 200 DSORG SET QUERY EXMRAGCT ODIO irssi essnee pinn ia aiT ea 200 EOLIN SEHQUER VIET AGT OPNO ii 200 EOLOUT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option 201 FIELD EXTRACT Opto Wis arasinan 202 FILEID SET QUERV EXTRACT Option e ot 202 FMODE SET QUERY EX TRACT OptOM icons 202 SES RE ON ee E 202 FOCUS a EXT RAG ODIO EE 203 FORMAT SET QUERY EXTRACT Opti icons ia 203 EPATH SE VOQUERYVE X TRACT OPIO eege iaa oia Oo 204 FIYPE s SETOUVERY EE TEE 204 EVALUE EXTRACTO Oscar iia 204 GROUP SE QUERY EXTRACT ODIOM srl ia 205 GROUPASCHARACTER SET QUERY Ee TEE 205 IDSCOPE SET OUERY EXTRACT Optom a emisario 206 IDWARNING SE VOUERYEX H NEE 207 KEY QUERY EX TRAC T Opthos ET 208 LASTMSG QUERWEXTRACT ODIOM specs sseni aos da 208 LENGTH SE TOU BR EXTRAS ge 209 LEVEL SEVQOQUERYEXTRAC T ODIO E 209 LOADWARNING Re Eh eeler 210 LRECL SE Ke E de EE 211 MACROPATH SE T QUERY E XTRAGT TEE 211 MAPPING SE OQUER NEE EE 211 MAXCOBOLRCG SEI QUERY EXTRACT Opio 212 MAXPLIRG SE VQUER VEX TRACT OPON da G aad 212 2013 11 13 13 03 23 iv Structured Data Environment SDE Contents SET QUERY EXTRACT MAXSTOR SETQUERYWEXTRACT Opcion ii 213 MSGLINE E EE EIER estate a cceauccapeacies arica dee 214 MSGMOBDE SENOUERWEXTRACI Opt EE 215 RAW ECT SE TUES Yi XTRA Oh iis cs i ahs lets elo id Les dE dE eee 215 OFFSET OFST SET QUERY EXTRACT Opt
229. ds assigned record type REC PAYMENT to this display execute the following VIEW REC PAYMENT To re display all records execute the following VIEW Unmapped Untyped records have internal record type UnMapped whereas unmapped secondary segments have internal record type UnMappedSeg If these unmapped records or segments are not selected for display by a VIEW operation they are flagged as being NOT SELECTED If SHADOW NOTSELECTED is set on the default then consecutive occurrences of these records are represented by a single shadow line of type NOT SELECTED Typed records or segments that are not selected for display by a VIEW operation are flagged as being SUPPRESSED If SHADOW SUPPRESSED is set on the default consecutive suppressed records of the same record type are represented by a single shadow line of type SUPPRESSED 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 18 Getting Started with SDE SELCOPY i R 1 ae M2 ZZSDATSA File Edit Actions Options Utilities TETTEI SwapList Help Command VIEW REC CUST REC ORDER Record type REC CUST Fixed 196 Offset 8 Data elements 16 PASS LASTNAME FIRSTNAME HS 6 7 AN 5 15 AN 20 45 AN 35 15 EE 78f j2foa Ramstein Hans chico Richards Denise benj Hill Mike 2 line s suppressed tupe REC CARD REC ORDER Variable 92 112 Offset 8 Data elements 22 CUST ID ORDER REF QTY ITEM CODE UNIT PRICE DELIVERY 4 5 6 7 8 9 FB 1 4 FB S 4 FB 11 4 PD 15 4 PD 19
230. ds or segments including the focus line to be scanned searching for records segments to be selected for remap The default is 1 line ALL Specifies that all lines in the file are to be scanned searching for records segments to be selected for remap namel A label name identifying the first line of a range of lines to be scanned searching for records segments to be selected for remap The preceding dot is mandatory name2 A label name identifying the last line of a range of lines to be scanned searching for records segments to be selected for remap The preceding dot is mandatory If name2 occurs before name in the display then the order is reversed If name1 is specified without name2 then ZLAST is the default EX X Search for records segments occupying EXCLUDED lines only NX Search for records segments occupying visible non EXCLUDED lines only Default is to search for records segments in both EXCLUDED and non EXCLUDED lines See Also SET QUERY EXTRACT IDSCOPE IMMEDIATE Description SDE CLI command IMMEDIATE performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command IMMEDIATE See IMMEDIATE in CBLe Text Edit documentation INSERT Syntax gt gt Insert t s s Keelen passo poso pss pos gt record_type doa ap EE v field gol E A ho do E gt lt PS SSS SSS n lines v Values field_valu
231. ds that contain non printable characters differs from the rest of the displayed fields in both multi record and single record views Printable characters in these fields are displayed in a different colour with underscore highlighting so that non printable characters appear as immoveable gaps effectively fixing the length of printable character data before them Only printable characters in these fields may be overtyped Non printable characters may only be updated using the CHANGE command or by setting HEX ON so allowing overtype of the hex display of the data Scrolling left and right will scroll the fields within all records of the default record type only Scrolling up and down will scroll through all records of the file 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 33 SDE Concepts Shadow Lines Shadow Lines A record or group of consecutive records that are not displayed because they are suppressed specifically excluded by the user or have no associated RTO not selected are by default replaced by a shadow line A shadow line specifies the number of consecutive records excluded from the display the reason for their exclusion suppressed excluded or not selected and if applicable the associated record type Shadow lines may be set on off using the SET SHADOW command Single Record View An SDE MDI child window containing data from a single record displayed vertically so that each field of the record occupies a single
232. ds that involve a search on character data for complex pattern matching These commands are FIND CHANGE EXCLUDE and ONLY For details see 0 Regular Expressions in CBLe text editer documentation 0 CHANGE 0 EXCLUDE 0 FIND 0 ONLY XML Generation In a SDE data edit display of formatted data support primary command XMLGEN with no input DSN to generate XML source using the names of the selected columns as XML tags For details see 0 XMLGEN Enhancements to SDE Expressions SDE expressions used to identify and select records have been enhanced to support named COBOL level 88 condition name VALUE clause definitions For details see 0 Expression Terms Text Edit lt gt Structured Data Edit Browse Easily switch display of the loaded data between the text edit and SDE data edit utilities For details see 0 GO COBOL an PL1 Picture String Enhancement Correctly interpret and display a COBOL copy book formatted field that is defined by a PICTURE string which includes the P character to represent an assumed decimal scaling position Specifically the P character is used to specify the location of an assumed decimal point when the point is not within the number that appears in the data item Correctly interpret and display a PL1 copy book formatted field that is defined by a PICTURE string which includes one of the picture string characters T I or R in the junior byte position so representing an overpunch digit and
233. e STRUCTure Description ARRX is equivalent to SET ARRAYASCHARACTER OFF and so redisplays an array field which has been displayed as a single variable length character field ARRC as a number of individual single character fields Parameters field_col The individual column identifying the array field to which the option will apply The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID Default is the focus column FOR RECORD record_type Identifies the record type mapping in which the specified field_col is defined Default is the default record type IN STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the name of the SDO structure in which the specified record_type is defined Required only if a distinction is to be made between multiple data sets displayed in SDE views each using different SDO structure definitions but where the specified record_type is defined in more than one of the structures Default is the SDO structure used to map records in the current SDE view See Also ARRC GRPC GRPX BOTTOM Syntax gt gt BOTOM gt lt Description 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 74 Command Line Primary Commands Displ ay the last page of data Equivalent to the DOWN MAX command Para meters None See Also DOWN TOP BROWSE Syntax gt gt Browse flsid SDE Opts gt en h
234. e Description Insert one or more new records following the focus line optionally providing explicit values to be inserted into specified fields Insert of new records is not allowed for Update in place editing unless the data set is an RRDS or VRDS For these types of files records that are empty slots may be activated using the INSERT command where starting from the focus line n_lines represents the number of lines to be searched for empty slots All empty slots found within this range of lines will be activated 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 136 Command Line Primary Commands INSERT Fields within the inserted records do not require explicitly assigned values This occurs either when no list of field values is specified or when the default record type contains more fields than there are values in the specified list of field values If fields are not explicitly assigned values either because no list of field values is specified or because the default record type contains more fields than there are values in the specified list of field values then they are assigned default values as follow e 0 zero for numeric fields e Nulls for bit and hex fields e Blanks for all other field types If a USE WHEN expression has been defined for the chosed record type then an attempt is made to populate any fields specified in that expression with values which satisfy the expression INSERT with no parameters inser
235. e Lines of data records record segments or DB2 table rows may be moved as follow 1 Enter prefix line command M n on the line and n 1 lines that follow to be moved 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 27 Getting Started with SDE Moving Records 2 Enter prefix line command MM on the first and last line of a block of lines to be moved The move operation treats typed and untyped lines of data identically i e it is not sensitve to any assigned record type Following a move operation record type assignment processing occurs for all records affected by the operation Having marked a line or block of lines to be moved position the cursor in the prefix area of the line where the lines are to be moved and enter A After or B Before The marked line or block of lines are moved after or before the target line respectively and the cursor is placed on the first character of the first line moved If the target of the move operation is within the block of lines marked for move then an error message is returned Only excluded or non excluded records or segments may be moved Records that are SUPPRESSED or NOT SELECTED are unaffected by move operations Copying Records Copying records record segments and DB2 table rows is not supported by Update in place edit technique Lines of data records record segments or DB2 table rows may be copied as follow 1 Enter prefix line command C n on the line and n 1
236. e FECOTEG EY DE Shas Sasa A A Se A RECord SIN ee struct_name l STRUCTure Description GRPC is equivalent to SET GROUPASCHARACTER ON and so displays the specified group structure field defined within a specified record type mapping as a fixed length character field Parameters field_col The individual column identifying the group field to which the option will apply This may be the group field itself or a field contained within The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID Default is the focus column FOR RECORD record_type Identifies the record type mapping in which the specified field_col is defined Default is the default record type IN STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the name of the SDO structure in which the specified record_type is defined Required only if a distinction is to be made between multiple data sets displayed in SDE views each using different SDO structure definitions but where the specified record_type is defined in more than one of the structures Default is the SDO structure used to map records in the current SDE view See Also GRPX ARRC ARRX 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 132 Command Line Primary Commands GRPC Syntax gt gt GRPX HO gt gt field col Dp SS SS RR RE SE gt lt FOR gt p TECOTO_Ey pe Sasa A eee
237. e n_seg Specifies the occurrence of a segment preceding the current segment that matches the optionally specified record_type Default is 1 record type 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 157 Command Line Primary Commands PREVIOUS Specifies the record type RTO of the segment that is to become the new current segment Only segments assigned this record type will be included in the count of segments to be scrolled asterisk indicates that segments may be of any record type record_type nominates a specific record type and or indicates that segments are to be of the record type assigned to the current segment Default is Examples PREV For segmented record browse edit scroll to the segment within the same record that immediately precedes the current secondary segment Fot non segmented browse edit scroll to the previous record P B Scroll to the first primary segment record that precedes the current segment PB2 Scroll backwards to the 2nd occurrence of a primary segment record which is assigned the same record type as the current primary segment P U Scroll backwards to the 1st unformatted primary or secondary segment that precedes the current segment See Also NEXT LEFT RIGHT Syntax Record Limit 100 Pages l l gt gt PRINT E ee eS SS eee dee gt l l Page 3 Pages pol File gt Stopi
238. e EDIT 5 Display records in single record view SDE supports alternating between multi record and single record format display Single record format displays the focus record so that its data wraps over several lines of the display if necessary This is particularly useful when editing long records SELCOPY i s multiple views of the same data means that records may be displayed in both multi record and single record views simultanously CBLe Text Edit supports multiple record views only 6 Preserve Record Lengths Unlike the CBLe text editor which automatically strips trailing blanks from records belonging to variable length record files SDE preserves a record s length and so any trailing blanks In SDE edit a record s length may only be updated using a CHANGE command or by manually changing the record length value in the Length field displayed in multi record format using the RECLEN command 7 Search and Exclude Records In addition to more function rich CHANGE EXCLUDE FIND and ONLY commands SDE supports built in functions for use in expressions on WHERE MORE and LESS commands for including and excluding records from the current display and also on the LOCATE command for scrolling to individual records 8 Support for RRDS data set empty slots SDE supports insert of records into empty slots of an RRDS data set defined with REUSE Display Records using a single COBOL or PL 1 Copy Book File records may be possess the same or d
239. e SQL code column displays the last SQL code received from a an INSERT DELETE or UPDATE statement performed on a row as a result of a SAVE operation For non DB2 table edit the SQLCODE column is not applicable and so is suppressed QUERY Response The current settings for RECINFO in order of display status ON or OFF column selections FLAGS or NOFLAGS followed by ID or NOID followed by LENGTH or NOLENGTH ID display format HEX or DEC and SQL code display SQLCODE or NOSQLCODE EXTRACT Rexx variables Irecinfo l sd The current setting of the record information column display ON or OFF lrecinfo 2 The current value for selection of the record flags column FLAGS or NOFLAGS Irecinfo 3 The current value for selection of the record identification column ID or NOID recintos he current value for selection of the record length column LENGTH or NOLENGTH Irecinfo 5 rie current value for display of ID information HEX or DEC Irecinfo 6 Ire current value for selection of the SQL code column SQLCODE or NOSQLCODE RECTYPES QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query REC Types 7727 D O gt lt gt gt EXTract RECTypes gt lt Description Obtain all record type object RTO names in the current SDO QUERY Response Displays all the RTO names on a single message line EXTRACT Rexx variables lrectypes 0 Number of RTOs in the current SDO rectypes i The
240. e closed without saving any outstanding changes Specify COPY with no parameters to open the SDE COPY File panel Parameters fileid Specifies the fileid of the source file from which records are to be copied If fileid is a less than 8 characters in length and is a valid member name the target file will be a member of member name fileid belonging to the same PDS PDSE library referenced in the focus SDE view If the focus SDE view does not display a 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 88 Command Line Primary Commands COPY library member the fileid will be treated as an HFS file within the current HFS working directory If fileid includes a volume id then the source file may be a cataloged or uncataloged data set or PDS PDSE library which exists in that volume s VTOC e g VOLWKA DEV UNCATLG FILE FROM start_line Identifies the first record number in the group of records belonging to fileid to be copied into the focus SDE edit view Default is record 1 TO end_line Identifies the last record number in the group of records belonging to fileid to be copied into the focus SDE edit view If no start_line value has been specified the TO keyword is required if end_line is to be specified If start_line has been specified then end_line must be greater than the start_line value men Default is asterisk the last record belonging to fileid FOR n_lines Specifies the number of consecutive lines in
241. e command Assigned to F16 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default SDE Browse Edit Utilities Menu The SDE Browse Edit Utilities Menu may be opened from any SDE file edit or browse window view by executing the SDEUTIL macro which is assigned to lt F16 gt by default 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 64 SDE Menus and Popup Windows SDE Browse Edit Utilities Menu SDEUTIL d Structured Br Edit Utilities menu option by entering number or by PF key Record Type options VIEW CompUnit records only Remove CompUnit records from current VIEW Exit utilities menu without action Select from list of available record types Modify record type OFFSET values Modify record type Identification criteria Override record type for focus line PF Field options Select YExclude Order visible field names PFS Record Information Jou SNe w Configure display of record length RBA and flags PF39 Shadow line options Configure display of SHADOWed records PF10 Window options Open single record Z00M view in new window PF11 KSDS options Locate record by KEY PF12 Figure 32 SDE Browse Edit Utilities Window This menu provides a user friendly method of executing commonly used SDE commands that alter the display of record data within the SDE w
242. e cursor is positioned If the cursor is positioned on a header line the focus line is the first line that immediately follows the header line If the cursor is positioned outside the display area e g the command line then the focus line is defined as being the current line Focus Record Group The record group occupying the focus line Header Line A line within the SDE window display area that contains column header information for the record group that follows A header line constitutes one line within a group of header lines which scroll with the record data display INI file File containing configuration options for SELCOPY i The System INI file is processed on startup of SELCOPY i and contains options that apply to all users The User INI file contains options specific to each user that may where appropriate override options set in the System INI file List Window A SELCOPY i window containing rows of associated information List windows support point and shoot column sorting select sort and filter CLI commands and prefix area commands MDI Multiple Document Interface is a Microsoft specification for PC applications that enable the user to work with multiple documents at the same time Each document is displayed in a separate child window within the client area of the application s main frame window Typical MDI applications on PCs include word processing and spread sheet applications MDI Client Area window The MDI client a
243. e g the default record type after execution of WHERE with an expression involving references to formatted fields execute VIEW to suppress all other record types before executing WHERE with no parameters In single record view the display area will be scrolled to the first data record that satisfies the specified criteria Note that while WHERE filters records that have already been loaded by SDE edit browse the FILTER parameter of SDE EDIT and BROWSE operations will filter records before being loaded into storage Parameters expression expression is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record_type field names and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of expression must be numeric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition If the result of expression is true then the record being tested is selected for display Default expression is 1 indicating that all non suppressed records are selected for display line _flag line_flag may be specified to locate a record or record segment that has been flagged with the requested line flag Each valid line_flag keyword detailed below corresponds to a built in function A description of each line_flag keyword may be found in its equivalent function description ERRor______________________________ CHANGEERRORY q 3 3 NN New
244. e in the SDE view containing line prefix area command A or B otherwise the first line of the SDE view Before After Target Line gt Indicates whether the copied lines are to be copied before or after the line assigned the specified line label 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 71 Command Line Primary Commands SDE commands may be issued from 1 The SDE command line 2 A CBLe text edit window command line using the SDATA command 3 A CBLe edited text file using the SDATA command and ACTION facility 4 A CBLe SDE REXX edit macro 5 A programmable function key Multiple SDE commands may be issued in a single invocation by separating each command with the line end character set to semi colon by default Executing SDE Commands from a CBLe Text Edit Window The CBLe CLI command SData may be used to prefix a command stream to be passed to the Structured Data Environment SDE On using this method to execute an SDE command that updates the display of data within an SDE edit view the current SDE window display gets updated and the focus remains on the current focus CBLe edit view EDIT and BROWSE commands will pass focus to the current SDE window lt sdata create structure CBL CBLI STRUCT COMPSTR from cobol CBL COPYBOOK COBOL COMPDEF lt sd edit CBL SDE EMP using CBL CBLI STRUCT COMPSTR lt sd select Key InvNumb DeliveryDate from Orders in CBL CBLI STRUCT COMPSTR Command Reference Syn
245. e right one page at a time RIGHT ALL PAGE until all data in the longest line has been printed The order in which these pages are printed i e print all pages scrolling down first or across first is determined by specification of parameter ACROSSTHENDOWN or DOWNTHENACROSS Note that DOWNTHENACROSS is supported only if all visible records are assigned the same record type Because this type of print exhibits a two dimensional quality page numbers assigned to multi record view pages printed using PRINT FILE are of the format x y x 1 2 3 and represents the page number when scrolled down y 1 2 3 and represents the page number when scrolled across Default Output By default PRINT output is written to DDname SDEPRINT When executed interactively if SDEPRINT has not already been allocated and parameter SYSOUT is not specified PRINT will allocate SDEPRINT to a DSN specified by the SDE Print File in the Batch Job Settings 0 6 panel In batch SDEPRINT is output for all SDE commands including other PRINT commands that are run as part of the same SDEAMAIN execution OUTDSN fileid may be specified to print the output to a specified DDname sequential or VSAM DSN PDS PDSE library DSN and member name or HFS fileid 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 159 Command Line Primary Commands PRINT Parameters PAGE Print a single page containing only the currently displayed data in the SDE view FILE Print the curren
246. e that is the current setting of the MAXSTOR option Inaxstor 2 he MAXSTOR value at the time the current file was opened for SDE edit Inaxstor 3 sd The amount of storage allocated so far for SDE edit of the current file maxstor 4 Of the storage allocated so far for SDE edit of the current file the amount of storage that is unused MSGLINE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt AO MSGLine ON line_num gt lt t SEE IE ee OVERLAY gt gt Query MSGLine O gt lt gt gt EXTract MSGLine gt lt Description This option controls the location and number of lines used to display messages in the SDE display window and also display properties of the first message line The line number is specified as being relative to the top middle or bottom of the data display area SET MSGLINE takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value line_num Line number of first message line relative to the top middle or bottom of the document window Line numbers relative to the top of the document window are specified as positive integers e g 2 8 Line numbers relative to the middle of the document window are specified as offsets from M e g M 1 M 3 Line numbers relative to the bottom of the document window are specified as negative integers e g 6 10
247. e the relationship equal to greater than or less than between the two strings stringl The CHANGE search string The seach string may be any of the following 0 An unquoted numeric value The search string is treated as a numeric value when a numeric field is searched in a formatted record view In all other cases a numeric search string is treated as a character string 0 An unquoted character string containing no commas or blanks The search for the character string will be case insensitive so that uppercase and lowercase characters are treated as being the same 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks The search string may contain embedded commas and blanks and the character string will be case insensitive A string enclosed in quotes may still be interpreted as a numeric value Two adjacent quotation mark characters that are embedded in a search string which is enclosed by the same quotation mark characters will be treated as a single occurrence of the character e g CHANGE Jim O Brien James O Brien Find the character string Jim O Brien and replaces it with James O Brien 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix C This is equivalent to specifying a quoted search string but that the string search will be case sensitive e g C Book 0 A hexadecimal string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix X 0 A picture
248. e updated by overtyping the hexadecimal representation of the data On inserting data in the variable length character field of a formatted record the new length of the field data will automatically be updated in the accompanying length field Similarly any alteration to the value in the length field will automatically be reflected in the variable length character data i e the data will be truncated or padded with blanks 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 25 Getting Started with SDE Typing New Record Data On entering data in formatted numeric fields the following occurs 1 The field is scanned from left to right and leading blanks ignored 2 The numeric data is identified as being the non blank text terminated by the end of the field or a blank character 3 Data within the field that is to the right of a terminating blank is ignored 4 The numeric data is interpreted and validated to establish whether it complies with the field s defined data type precision and scale If an invalid value is entered in a numeric field then a warning popup window is opened giving the reason for rejecting the value and prompting the user to either enter a valid numeric value or discard the change for that particular field This occurs for each field that has been updated with an invalid numeric value since the last transaction ay Ed a a YAR DATTYPES using NBJ CBLI SDO TYX lities Window SwapList Help wS wR as Schol
249. each table edit session This isolates SQL insert delete and update operations performed against an individual results tables from other SQL operations performed in the same SELCOPY i session Note that multiple DB2 tables may be edited in the same SELCOPY i session potentially from different DB2 subsystems See description of the Audit Trail Functions panel for details of SELCOPY i DB2 auditing DB2 Table Edit Browse Differences between the SDE window display of structured data set records and that of DB2 tables are detailed below Header Lines The Record Type header line displays the row record type name assigned to the table rows and the number of columns defined in the results table The Field Type header line displays the the DB2 built in data type as specified in the results table column definition i e no field position is displayed and any applicable field length or field precision and scale are represented in parentheses See SDE Data Types for descriptions of each of the supported data types and their representation in the Field Type header line 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 43 SDE Concepts DB2 Table Edit Browse Window View Format DB2 table SDE views support multi record and single record views as displayed for parameters TABLE and SINGLE of the FORMAT command Display of table data in unformatted character or hex FORMAT CHAR HEX is not sensible However HEX ON OFF may be used to display
250. ecord or shadow line displayed within the current display area view Current Record Group The record group occupying the current line Current SDE Window The SDE Edit View which received focus last The current SDE window prevails even if the current focus window is not an SDE view The concept of a current SDE window is important when executing CBLe SDE editor REXX macros or when executing SDE commands from a CBLe edit view via the SDATA command Default Record The focus line if it contains a visible data record otherwise the first visible data record following the focus line that is of the default record type Default Record Type The default record type is defined as being the record type of the focus line if the focus line is a visible or EXCLUDED record group shadow line otherwise it is the record type defined by DRECTYPE setting See section Default Record Type Focus Column The field column on which the cursor is positioned within the focus line If the focus line is not a visible or EXCLUDED record group or if the cursor is positioned outside the display area e g the command line or within the prefix area the focus column is defined as being the current column The focus column references the same field within all data records that are of the same record type as the focus line Focus Field The individual field within the focus line referenced by the focus column Focus Line The line within the display area on which th
251. ecords of all record types Following execution of this command execute one or more of the VIEW record_type commands that follow to display only records of the selected record types sd view Record View only records not assigned a record type i e NOT SELECTED records sd view _record_type Add all records of record type record_type to the existing view of records One of these VIEW commands is generated for every record type RTO defined in the structure SDO Execution of any of these VIEW commands will immediately update the display of the records in the current SDE window view The text edit window containing the CMX file remains open to allow execution of other VIEW commands until closed using lt PF3 lt Modify record type OFFSET values 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 65 SDE Menus and Popup Windows Record Type Options Opens the SDEUTOF sub window which prompts the user to enter a positive or negative numeric offset against any or all of the record types RTOs defined in the current SDO Where an offset value is assigned to a record type record mapping starts at that offset into or before the record data See the USEOFFSET SET QUERY EXTRACT option for details Structured Brows rd tupe OFFSET vw ALL Record ty Record tuype Record type Record type REC ORDER Record type REC PAYMENT Record type REC NOTE Figure 33 SDE Browse Edit Modify Offsets Window lt Enter gt upda
252. ed on the command line SWAP The ISPF SWAP command LEFT Scroll the window display to the left by an amount determined by the scroll field or specified on the command line RIGHT Scroll the window display to the right by an amount determined by the scroll field or specified on the command line F13 17 MACRO Open a new view window of the same file window ZOOMed mode MAP FMT SDEZOOMW SWAP LIST The ISPF SWAP LIST comamnd UNDO Press repeatedly to UNDO your changes one at a time F23 REDO Press repeatedly to REDO your changes one at a time Note that the contents of the command line is concatenated to the definition of the function key and the result executed as a single command 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 240 Glossary The following is a glossary of terms used in this document CLI Command Line Interface A Command Line Interface is a text based method by which users can execute functions supported by the application CBLe A powerful text editor that runs as an MDI application under SELCOPY i CBLe supports its own CLI and has been developed based on specifications found in Mansfield Software s KEDIT for Windows Current Column The first field column visible within the current display area belonging to records of the default record type The current column references the same field within all data records that are of the default record type Current Line The first record group data r
253. efault is to display records within the SDE window view starting at the first record in the data set FOR n_recs lt RECORDS gt Specifies the number of data set records to be included within the SDE window edit session Specification of parameter keyword RECORDS is optional If FILTER is specified then record filtering occurs only on records selected using the FROM and FOR parameters Use of the FOR parameter will force Update in place Edit Default is to include all records FILTER filter_fileid Filter Clause FILTER specifies additional record filtering criteria to further reduce the display of records for edit All record filters are applied only to records that have been selected using the FROM and or FOR parameters otherwise it applies to all records in the structured data file Enough available storage must exist to load all records selected by the filter otherwise a storage error occurs and the edit is terminated FILTER parameters are specified via a filter clause which may be supplied as part of the EDIT command or referenced via filter_fileid a separate sequential data set PDS PDSE member or HFS file filter_fileid must contain the keyword FILTER followed by a valid filter clause The filter is applied only once during initial load of the data A record will not be excluded from the display of edited records if its record type or data is changed in a way that no longer satisfies the filter criteria 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structu
254. efinition USE FOR FOCUS RECORD will force temporary assignment of a specific RTO definition to the record occupying the focus line Unless TEMPORARY or FOR FOCUS RECORD is specified execution of the USE command will affect a change to the RTO record type definition identified by record_type in the specified SDO If not already loaded the required SDO is loaded from its structured data file SDF and updated accordingly If the SDO containing this record type is a non temporary structure then the change may be saved to the structure definition file when the structure is dropped or on execution of the SAVESTRUCTURE command Any update to record type assignment criteria via the USE command is immediately applied to in storage records belonging to the current SDE window that are assigned record types from the updated structure Except for USE FOR FOCUS RECORD execution of the USE command will force record type assessment of all the in storage records based on the standard RTO assignment precedence Records in an active SDE edit or browse session that use an updated structure but are not in the current SDE window will be unaffected by the update until record type assessment is forced for that SDE window i e via another USE command Any new SDE edit or browse session that uses an updated structure will obey the updated record selection criteria If either USE ALWAYS ON or USE NEVER ON are executed then a USE WHEN expression defined in the RTO is
255. eger value not zero and must be a value that is less than or equal to the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data the length of the expanded record A negative value represents a position in the record relative to the end of the record Therefore where position 1 references the 1st character in the record position 1 references the last character For all display formats the string is treated as being non numeric and the search is actioned on the character representation of the record data The last position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched Like pos1 pos2 may be a positive or negative integer value not zero If pos references a position within the record data which is higher than that referenced by pos2 then the pos and pos2 values are swapped If pos2 is greater than the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data greater than the length of the expanded record then pos2 is set equal to the maximum or expanded record length Default is pos plus the length of the search string minus 1 Search all eligible field columns in the current formatted display field_col An individual field column to be searched within a formatted display The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID If a field name is used enclosing parentheses are mandatory Field names are automatically converted to a field reference and Re
256. eld XVAL ina preceding segment of record type MAPBASE1 USE WHEN MAPBASE1 XVAL gt 27 83 Segmented Records SDE Browse Edit View As for display of non segmented records files containing segmented records may be displayed in multi record FORMAT TABLE CHAR HEX or single record FORMAT SINGLE view Primary commands CHAR MAP FMT VFMT and UNFMT are supported to display the current segment in multi record unformatted character view single record formatted view multi record formatted view and single record unformatted character view respectively Data in record segments is displayed in exactly the same way as non segmented records Prefix area record type headers and record information is also displayed as for non segmented records with the following exceptions 1 Segmented record header display differs from that of non segmented records only in that instead of Record Type header line 1 of each group of matching segment types displays either Base for primary segments Base D for 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 45 SDE Concepts Segmented Records SDE Browse Edit View default primary segments or Segment for secondary segments In order to easily distinguish between primary and secondary segments the header line 1 of secondary segments is coloured yellow by default See SET QUERY EXTRACT option COLOUR or COLOR SEGMENT 2 For secondary segments only the record information id column displayed u
257. eld reference number 3 to be 15 characters and save this setting the the prevailing SDO structure file See Also SELECT SET COLWIDTH TEMPORARY 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 156 Command Line Primary Commands PERMANENT PREVIOUS Syntax Segmented Record Edit Segment 1 te Chey es SSeS I gt gt Previous bel dE AO HO AO dE AO gt lt 1 1 Base n seg record type Batti SaaS a il to N anann 1 S A A Unmapped lt A A al a AE iess Unmapped lt EE Description When used in an SDE BROWSE EDIT view of segmented records PREVIOUS or PREV scrolls to a segment that occurs before the current segment making it the new current segment For non segmented record BROWSE EDIT every record is considered to be a primary base segment with no secondary segments Therefore using PREV SEGMENT to scroll to secondary segments is invalid and will always return ZZSD441E error message In multi record view the view of the data within the SDE window is scrolled upwards to a previous segment In single record view PREV will display a previous segment PREV scrolls only to segments of a specific type primary secondary or unmapped and optionally segments assigned a specifically named record type RTO In contrast UP in multi record view and LEFT in single record view scroll to preceding records or re
258. elete Insert an entry in the Copybook Library Dataset name for each copybook PDS PDSE library containing the source copybooks for this SDO Note that the order in which the library DSNs occur defines the library search order for copybook member names When all required librar lt DSNs have been entered press lt PF3 gt to return to the main panel view SELCOPY i sre STRUCTURE from COBOL PL41 copubook s wS wR Command gt ZSGSDOL Ceeate Structure Copybook Library List Copybook Library Dataset name a a aa a aa oo Soo oo CRL COBOL XxXUWADO12 COPY CBL COBOL XXUWO4324 COPY CBL COBOL XxXW04350 COPY End of Data Figure 5 SDO Create Structure from COBOL PL1 Copybook s Library List 4 Select option 2 Record Type to open the Define Record Types panel view This panel view also contains an embedded table which should be updated first to contain a row for each copy book member record structure record type definition included in the SDO 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 11 Getting Started with SDE Create an SDE structure SDO from multiple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books SELCUPYZE de STRUCTURE from COBOL PL1 copubook s gm File Help wS wR x Command gt ACA ZZSGSDOR Add a table row then press PF2 to specify its record identification criteria Create Structure Define Record Types Copybook Type Record Type Name 01 Lev Library Garo See BG ceca GET HEAD G
259. elow corresponds to a built in function Because field column name location will take precedence if the line ag keyword conflicts with a field_name in the default record type then the equivalent built in function name should be used instead A description of each line_flag keyword may be found in its equivalent function description ERRor____________________________ CHANGEERROR CHAnge Chg cHanaeok ALTered UPDated CHANGED DATATYPEERROR DUPkey TC UPLICATEKEY EXcuded X CSEXCLUDEDN CCC ICOMmand CMa HASPREFIXCMD NEW INSERTED KEYCHANGED LENgtherror SC ILENGTHERROR VALUEERROR VALERRor VALUEERROR Locate all records that match the specified expression expression and position the display at the first matching record All records for which expression test true are made visible if NX is not specified Search forwards from the first record in the file with the selected record type to locate the first record that satisfies the specified expression Search backwards from the last record in the file with the selected record type to locate the last record that satisfies the specified expression Search forwards from the focus line to locate the next record that satisfies the specified expression Search backwards from the focus line to locate the previous record that satisfies the specified expression Locate EXCLUDED data records only LOCATE does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Str
260. emain excluded therefore execution of successive EXCLUDE commands has a cumulative effect Records groups that are of a different record type or are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED are excluded from the search Note that DB2 table rows may be considered to be formatted records that are all assigend the default record type EXCLUDE employs the same string search and field highlighting methods as the FIND command All occurrences of the search string or numeric value that are not excluded by the EXCLUDE command are highlighted in the text A record group which has been excluded via the EXCLUDE command will contain the highlighted field matching the search string if it is subsequently redisplayed e g using RESET EXCLUDED Enter the RESET FIND command to turn off the highlighting Use of EXCLUDE with no parameters repeats the last EXCLUDE command executed including all its specified parameters The FORMAT of the SDE display affects the execution of EXCLUDE Unformatted Multi or Single Record Display CHAR or UNFMT By default a character compare for the supplied search string is performed against the entire length of unformatted data records The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define the area of the record within which the search occurs i e the matched data must begin at or after the left bound and not exceed the right bound The BOUNDS columns may be overridden using pos and pos2 positional parameters field_col and ALL paramete
261. enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and field columns ranges e g FirstName LastName 2 Salary Bonus EmpNo 10 15 If field names are used enclosing parentheses are mandatory A label name identifying the first record of a range of data records to be searched The preceding dot is mandatory Default is ZFIRST 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 155 Command Line Primary Commands OPTIONS A label name identifying the last record of a range of data records to be searched The preceding dot is mandatory If name2 occurs before name in the display then the order is reversed See Also EXCLUDE FIND SELECT OPTIONS Description OPTIONS displays the current setting of all SDE options in a message window OPTIONS is equivalent to executing QUERY option for every SET QUERY EXTRACT option supported by SDE Parameters OPTIONS has no parameters PERMANENT Syntax 222s PERManent VE gt lt Description PERMANENT is a modal command that may be used as a prefix to SDE primary commands SELECT and SET COLWIDTH PERMANENT will execute the SELECT or SET COLWIDTH command and save its settings in the SELCOPY i SDO structure used to display the formatted data Parameters command SDE primary command SELECT or SET COLWIDTH Example permanent set colwidth 3 15 Set the column width for fi
262. ength field or repeating group However a filter may not combine the two methods If the filter is to reference unformatted record data then select option 2 Specify Unformatted Selection Criteria from scratch to build a single filter expression If the filter is to reference formatted record data fields then 1 If the Structure File input fileds are not already configured enter the fileid and type of the structure file SDO COBOL PL1 copybook etc to which this filter will apply 2 Select option 3 Specify Formatted Selection Criteria from scratch to begin building filter expressions based on record type definitions in the structure file 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 14 Getting Started with SDE Create a record FILTER dataset 6 Having configured filter expressions select option 4 Create FILTER object to open a text edit view of the generated filter file containing filter syntax Press lt PF3 gt to save this file and again to exit the Cretae Filter File panel Filter Unformatted Record Data The FILTER unformatted Selection Criteria panel view contains an embedded table which supports a number of primary and line prefix commands including insert R replicate and D Delete Using these table editing commands insert a row entry in the table for each logical sub expression in the order in which they are to appear within the filter expression SELCOPY i FILTER unformatted S Cri
263. ents 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 46 SDE Concepts Full Edit Functionality When segments are displayed in multi record view individual segments or blocks of consecutive segments may be replicated deleted inserted moved or copied using standard SDE edit primary and line commands In single record view segments may only be deleted duplicated or inserted using primary commands DELETE DUPLICATE and INSERT respectively Edit actions that affect the location of a primary segment within the file directly affects the location of the record to which it belongs In contrast secondary segments may be deleted moved copied duplicated and inserted without affecting the location of a record within the file For secondary segments these edit operations may only increase or decrease the length of existing records Record Truncation Beware that full edit operations involving primary segments can potentially split and join together records in the file If as a result of adding secondary segments to a record the length of that record exceeds the maximum defined logical record length of the file LRECL then remapping the record or executing a save operation will truncate the excess data For variable record format files if data at the end of the truncated record represents an incomplete record segment map then that data is also truncated Following an execution of IDENTIFY in which record truncation occurs the trunca
264. er the left bound and not exceed the right bound The BOUNDS columns may be overridden using pos and pos2 positional parameters field_col and ALL parameters are not applicable to these display formats and are ignored 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 152 Command Line Primary Commands ONLY Formatted Multi or Single Record Display VFMT or FMT For formatted records the search string is compared against individual fields that have been selected for display in the formatted data record See SELECT Fields are searched from left to right in the order that they appear in the display This is true regardless of the order in which field columns are specified on the ONLY command or the order in which fields are encountered within the unformatted record The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define which of the fields within the formatted records are eligible to be searched i e Fields are eligible only if they exist within the left and right bounds when applied to the expanded record data which is not necessarily the same as the unformatted record data Where a BOUNDS column occurs within a field definition then the following rules apply 1 For character data type fields only the area of the field that falls within the BOUNDS columns is eligible for the search 2 For numeric data type fields the field is not eligible to be included in the search If one or more field columns are specified on the ONLY
265. eration i e Search forwards NEXT or backwards PREV from the current cursor location to find the next or previous occurrence of the string value respectively If the cursor is not within the window s data display area the forwards or backwards search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the record type used by the last CHANGE RCHANGE is assigned to function key PF6 by default Parameters RCHANGE has no parameters See Also CHANGE EXCLUDE FIND RFIND Find and Replace Data RCOLOUR Syntax gt gt RCOlour record_type rr gt es EN EE struct_name SS E STRUCTure ay NONe gt Blue hal EE ie WHEN expression do gt lt Red ln BLInk A Pink REVvideo o Chen Green ee E Uscore ee Turquoise Yellow Fo White Default do OFF 777 Description RCOLOUR may be used to apply preferred colouring to records assigned specific record types RTO based on selection criteria Record colouring definitions specified by the RCOLOUR command are stored in the record type definition within the relevant structure SDO If not already loaded the required SDO is loaded from its structured data file SDF and updated accordingly If a non temporary SDO then this change to the SDO may be saved written back to the SDF by the user when the
266. erent record type are unaffected EXCLUDE is similar to the ISPF style text edit command with additional syntax to nominate those columns to be searched e g Exclude all records assigned the same record type as the focus record and contain the character string London any case within either of the fields named X_City or X_County EXCLUDE ALL London X_City X_County SELCOPY i NBJ CBLINST CBL11091 S SSAM2 ZZSDATSA using NBJ CBLI SDOx m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwaplList Help wS wR Command gt Scroll gt Csr Record type REC CUST Fixed 196 Offset 8 Data elements 16 CUST ID PASS LASTNAME FIRSTNAME COUNTRY PO 4 5 6 He FB 1 4 AN 5 15 AN 20 15 AN 35 15 A 9156 78f j2foa Ramstein Hans 2 line s excluded record type REC CUST REC CARD Fixed S8 Offset 8 Data elements 13 CUST 1D SEQ CR OR DR COMPANY CARD NUMBER 4 5 7 9 10 FB 1 4 FB Siz AN 7 1 PD 15 9 AN 24 25 k 1 gt A AA A a a L 0 D 8754875676474656 CARL SLAIN line s excluded record type REC CARD line s excluded record tupe REC ORDER REC PAYMENT Fixed 26 Offset 8 Data elements 8 CUST ID RECEIVED DATE ARD NUMBER ORDER REF desir E 4 7 Figure 17 SDE Excluded Records The FLIP command will flip the EXCLUDED flag on all records of a specific record type so that visible records are excluded and excluded records are brought back into view Excluded records may also be brought back into view using the Prefix Area Commands F
267. erformed against the unformatted representation of the field data for fields falling entirely or partly within the range of record positions Although the range of positions may span a number of fields the search is still performed against individual fields within the range i e a match for the search string will not occur for data that spans a field boundary A match for the search string may occur on just part of the unformatted data representation of a numeric field e g FIND 476 21 100 This will find a match in any numeric field where unformatted representation of the data contains the string 476 e g a zoned decimal field with value 14760 or 4762 Any match of the search string on data in a numeric field will highlight the entire formatted display of the field If the numeric field is also the current identified occurrence of the search string the cursor is positioned at the start of the formatted numeric field display Parameters op A relational operator used in the compare operation which determines the relationship that the data must have with the search string in order for it to be identified as a successful match Valid values for op are as follow If a character string compare is performed the EBCDIC values assigned to characters in the search and data strings determine the relationship equal to greater than or less than between the two strings 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 127 Comma
268. eric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition The WHEN expression is applied to each record assigned the record type record_type and if the result is true the specified record colouring is applied To apply record colouring for all records of record type record_type simply specify WHEN 1 OFF Remove all specified record type RTO colouring from the SDO definition reverting back to the default record colouring settings Examples lt sd rcol SRC in CBL SDO ADATA red uscore when substr 21 2 gt gt USING Define colouring of record data assigned to record type SRC in structure CBL SDO ADATA when data starting in position 2 of field number 21 begins with USING See Also SET QUERY EXTRACT COLOUR COLOR DROP SAVESTRUCTURE USE RECLEN Syntax gt gt RECLength EE gt lt Description RECLENGTH controls the display of the Record Information Length column If the records are variable length and Full Edit KSDS Edit or Auxiliary Edit is in effect then the length of each record displayed in this column may be altered simply by overtyping the existing value If the length of a record is increased then pad characters are appended to the record The pad character used is that defined by the current value for PAD Reducing a record s length will truncate record data If a structure has bee
269. es copybook_name gt de BLA Sah ASS SS ta 1 devell name t LEVel ADAta gt REGULA gt de TYPe a as pores nS Rae Pas SS SS SESS gt v II SELECT levell_entry 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 92 Command Line Primary Commands DB2 Definition gt FROM DB2 SS be name EE gt ssn t wiew pame DB2 Opts DB2 Opts SELect select clause WHERE where clause Pope aaa ee gt ORDER orderby clause BY F SORT COMMITONCLEANSAVE eege Kee Seeerei Ge e WITH 4 CS ee le COMMITONSAVE e UI L COMMITONEXIT S a RS KEEP EXclusive UPDate lt gt PROTECTPRIMEKEY COMMITONLOAD AUDit SKIPLocked EDITPRIMEKEY Direct Definition po NAMES ASM v gt Record Definition 1 25 K NAMES COBOL DBE Sasa PL1 Record Definition Ho v gt record_type STRUCTure Field Definition gt EBCdic gt Ho EZ AO Ho gt ASCII dodo WHEN expre
270. evel to each updated line in ascending order of line number The UNDOING option operates at the File level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Set UNDOING ON or OFF Default is ON n_levels Number of change levels maintained by SDE for the file If this value is exceeded SDE drops the oldest undoable change level Default is 100 n_kbytes Maximum amount of storage KB that may be obtained by SDE for storing undo information for the file Default is 64K QUERY Response The current setting of the UNDOING option ON or OFF followed by number of change levels and maximum storage allocation in KBytes EXTRACT Rexx variables lundoing 1 The ON or OFF setting for UNDO lundoing 2 The number of change levels lundoing 3 dhe maximum storage allocation in KBytes 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 231 SET QUERY EXTRACT UNDOING SET QUERY EXTRACT Option UNNAMED SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax A tS ENEE Sats UN A EE gt lt a SET o OFF gt gt Query UNNamed O O O a gt lt gt gt EXTract UNNamed gt lt Description This option controls whether unnamed fields appear in the display Note that COBOL FILLER fields are treated as unnamed With UNNAMED 0N in effect unnamed fields will appear as a normal column of data in table type display except that the field name
271. existing SELCOPY i structures SDOs and or in line record type definition syntax 4 Specification of a default record type 5 Assignment of USE WHEN selection criteria to each non default primary and secondary record type definition generated from COBOL PL1 source This is mandatory LIBRARY copybook_library Specifies a library search chain for COBOL or PL1 copybook lookup If a library containing a required source copy book is in the search chain then copybook_library need not be specified following the SOURCE COBOL PL1 parameter One or more blank separated copybook_library PDS PDSE library data set names are specified in parentheses RECORD RecordType Definition A separate RECORD specification is required for each record type to be defined within the structure RecordType Definition RecordType Definition incorporates all parameters supported by each RECORD parameter specification in XRef Definition NAME record_type Identifies the name of the record type to be defined in the SDO Unless SOURCE references SELCOPY i SDE record definition syntax via the STRUCTURE sub parameter Pean ype must match the name of a group major or minor structure field in the source copybook ADATA DO object PRIMARY Identifies the record type as being a non default primary base segment A primary segment maps data at the start first segment of a segmented record or for non segmented records maps all data in a record P
272. f the currently assigned fileid is a PDS PDSE library member If necessary SAVEAS will invoke the appropriate Allocate NonVSAM or Define VSAM data set dialog window to create the new data set with the same data set organisation as the currently assigned fileid SAVEAS is not valid for SDE edit techniques KSDS Edit and Update in place Edit where not all records are loaded into storage Parameters SAVEAS has no parameters See Also SAVE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 170 Command Line Primary Commands SAVEAS SAVESTRUCTURE Syntax gt SAVESECEUCLULE 22222 A ea gt lt struct name Description Save an in storage Structure Definition Object SDO to a Structure Definition File SDF on disk If changes have been made to the structure e g USE WHEN or RCOLOUR criteria have been applied and not saved then the user will be automatically prompted to save the SDO following execution of the DROP command or when the structure is automayically dropped on exit from the parent CBLe frame window Parameters struct_name The name of the non temporary in storage structure to be saved Default is to save the current i e last referenced structure This is the structure used in the current SDE window view or explicitly referenced by an SDE command SDATA Description SDE CLI command SDATA performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command SDATA See SDATA in CBLe Text Edi
273. fault record type where numeric field reference number 14 is greater than or equal to 255 less OrderDate lt PaymentReceivedDate Exclude any records that are of the default record type where the contents of field OrderDate is less than or equal to the contents of field PaymentReceivedDate See Also FLIP MORE WHERE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 141 Command Line Primary Commands LIST MODULES LIST MODULES Syntax SDELIB gt gt gt lst MODules bebe i Sc ec a ct A GCN REE RR gt lt LM libname Description Use the LIST MODULES command to display a list window containing details of modules in the specified SELCOPY i function library LIST MODULES may be executed to determine the level of any currently installed SELCOPY i function module CBL may request that this command is executed for diagnostic purposes in problem determination Parameters libname The name of a SELCOPYii library Valid entries include VCILIB WINLIB EDTLIB SDELIB TABLIB etc Default is SDELIB LIST RPOS Syntax Description Use the LIST RPOS command to display a list window containing details of RPOs Record Position Objects for the current SDE edit browse view CBL may request that this command is executed for diagnostic purposes in problem determination Parameters LIST RPOS has no parameters LIST SDO Syntax KEE Ee EH gt gt
274. ferencing the same field column more than once will not cause an error If the field is an array then all elements of the array are searched To search an individual element of an array the element occurrence should be specified in parentheses as a subscript to the field reference name e g 13 3 for the 3rd element of a single dimension array An entry must exist for each dimension of the array e g RoomSize 6 2 4 a three dimensional array Specification of multiple field columns must either be enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas The field columns may be specified in any order however the data is always searched from the first column in the display to the last Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and columns ranges e g JobID 6 Tax_Reference 12 15 20 A search is only performed on field columns that are selected for display Therefore any field column specified on the ONLY command that has not been selected for display will be ignored field_coli field_col2 namel name2 The first and last fields of a range of field columns to be searched within a formatted record display display field_col1 and field_col2 must be separated by colon and if Geld Col occurs after field_col2 in the data record then the values are swapped field_col1 and field_col2 have the same specifications as field_col Specification of multiple field column ranges must either be
275. fied by a USE record_type ALWAYS ON condition If the USE NEVER condition is ON for this RTO it will be set OFF 2 Use the first RTO in the structure definition SDO for which a USE WHEN expression tests true 3 Use the first RTO in the SDO defined as being DEFAULT 4 Use the first RTO defined in the SDO for which the unexpanded record length matches the RTO data length For an RTO of variable data length the unexpanded record length is considered a match if it falls within the minimum and maximum RTO data length values Note that having found a match no other RTOs in the SDO are tested 5 Use the first RTO in the SDO that is of a fixed RTO data length 6 Use the first RTO in the SDO 7 Use the default record type UnMapped which consists of a single field UnMapped of maximum length equal to the data set s LRECL value and with a data type AN alpha numeric Specification of USE record type criteria allows assignment of that RTO to a record having a length that does not necessarily match the RTO data length If this is the case only areas of the record that are formatted by the assigned RTO will be displayed Any unformatted record data that follows the formatted data of the same record is not displayed but is preserved if changes are made to the formatted data The unformatted data may be displayed and changed at any time using a different display format e g FORMAT CHAR or FORMAT HEX Where unformatted data exists at the en
276. fied on the FIND command that is not part of the display e g a group field or a field that has been removed from display by a SELECT commana then the following error message is returned ZZSD179E Data element field_col is not selected in the current view of record type record type of structure struct_name For character data type fields a string compare is performed For numeric data type fields binary packed decimal floating point zoned etc then the following will occur 1 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are not specified the search string is interpreted as a signed numeric value and an arithmetic compare is performed against the field s formatted numeric value The length and data type of the numeric field and the number of digits in the search value are not significant e g FIND 67 Finds numeric fields with value 67 e g 0067 67 00 0 0670E 03 and character fields containing the string 67 e g 167 Baker Street If the search string is non numeric then numeric data type fields are not searched Therefore to bypass searching numeric data type fields explicitly set the search string to be character or hex using string C string or X string formats respectively e g FIND 67 FIND C 67 FIND X F6F7 Finds only character fields containing the string 67 2 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are specified the search string is interpreted as being a character string and so a string compare is p
277. fs_fileid HFS Opts ham q DB2 ote table name DB2 Opts jaa Ao ssn BR Sep view name Set PROFile SDEPROF a a E aere gt lt Ba PROFile macro_name foot SE NOPROFile HFS Opts STD EOL ooo i ooo a i LF NL CRLF LFCR CRNL string LRECL lrecl EE eee ee gt RECFM F 0 2 0 vV Ki off len origin EA SDE Opts View 5 EE ea A A RS Se ee ii e EE 1s e USING 5222222 struct_name A FRS qe PRE FROG ee de e a ee Keesen a COBOL copybook_name 4 J View record_type O a be ADAta FORMat TABle een ee gt e FORMat SINGle Gs FMT eee e SNGL pl 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE BOTTOM 75 Command Line Primary Commands BROWSE gt AO HO AO 4 gt Ge FROM KEY string na L FOR n_recs g a RBA n SS e RECORDS a 4 n RECord aba SS SS SSS SS SSSR SS SSS RSS SSSR SSS SSS gt FILTer filter fileid Se DS Filter Clause E Filter Clause See v gt INclude reg type kees e a a Na O gt e WHere expr a Stopafter n_ bits ee si v gt Exclude reg type 8 i ttet ki WHere expr E DB2 Opts gt
278. ft right may also be executed selected lines using the and line prefix area commands respectively Variable Length Records Shifting variable length record data left or right has different effects on each record depending on location of BOUNDS columns relative to the individual record s record length 1 If the left bounds column number and therefore the right bounds column number is greater than the record length then shifting data left or right will have no effect on the record 2 If the left bounds column number is less than or equal to the record length then shifting data left will have the following affect on that record If the right bounds column number is less than or equal to the record length data is truncated at the left bounds column the record length is preserved and a pad character is inserted at the right bounds column for each character truncated at the left See SDE PAD option If the right bounds column number is greater than the record length data is truncated at the left bounds column and the record length is reduced by the number of truncated characters 3 Shifting data right will have the following affect on a record If the right bounds column number is less than or equal to the record length data is truncated at the right bounds column the record length is preserved and a pad character is inserted at the left bounds column for each character truncated at the right If the right b
279. gt Mak t Page 25 eege Description In multi record view and unless parameter ALL is specified scroll towards the right the display of field and header lines belonging to records that are of the default record type The display of all other visible records header lines and shadow lines remains unchanged In single record view RIGHT will display the fields belonging to a visible data record that has a higher line number than the record or record segment that is in the current view For display of segmented records LEFT and RIGHT scroll through each segment in the file regardless of the record to which it belongs NEXT and PREV may be used to scroll between secondary segments of the current record only RIGHT CURSOR DATA HALF PAGE are not applicable in single record view RIGHT is assigned to PF11 by default Any characters specified on the command line when the PFKey is hit will be concatenated to the command and treated as a parameter string Where no parameter is specified the scroll amount will be the value specified in the Scroll gt field Multi Record View Scrolling Columns may have the HOLD flag set on by the SELECT command These columns are static in the display and like the prefix area and Lrecl column are unaffected by LEFT and RIGHT scrolling Columns that have the HOLD flag set off are referred to as floating columns 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 168 Command L
280. gth occupying a field of a fixed predefined length The end of the variable length character data is determined by at least one null x 00 termination character Therefore in order to support a character strings of the maximum field length the predefined fixed field length is always 1 byte longer than the maximum length requested This data type is equivalent to PL 1 fields declared as CHARACTER VARYINGZ The character field contents are interpreted as printable ASCII or EBCDIC character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes This value includes the additional 1 byte Date A Date field displayed in ISO format with separator character yyyy mm dd or for DB2 table edit browse in the locally defined DB2 date string format The internal format of the date string for non DB2 edit browse may be that returned by the TIME Assembler macro for packed or binary data or the internal date format of ICF catalog records or VTOC format 1 3 records Fields of this data type have a data type record header of DT or for DB2 table edit browse DATE Fixed Point Binary A Binary field defined as having a precision and scale specified in number of decimal digits and whose value is displayed as a fixed point decimal number The length of the binary field is either 2 bytes Halfword 4 bytes Word or
281. h then the following error message is returned ZZSD280E No fields selected within the current bounds for the EXCLUDE command If a field column is specified on the EXCLUDE command that is not part of the display e g a group field or a field that has been removed from display by a SELECT commana then the following error message is returned ZZSD179E Data element field_col is not selected in the current view of record type record type of structure struct_name For character data type fields a string compare is performed For numeric data type fields binary packed decimal floating point zoned etc then the following will occur 1 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are not specified the search string is interpreted as a signed numeric value and an arithmetic compare is performed against the field s formatted numeric value The length and data type of the numeric field and the number of digits in the search value are not significant e g EXCLUDE 67 Excludes records containing a numeric field with value 67 e g 0067 67 00 0 0670E 03 or a character field containing the string 67 e g 167 Baker Street If the search string is non numeric then numeric data type fields are not searched Therefore to bypass searching numeric data type fields explicitly set the search string to be character or hex using string C string or X string formats respectively e g EXCLUDE EN EXCLUDE Geert EXCLUDE X FOFT7 Exclu
282. h consecutive occurrence of char at the start and or end of string will be stripped until a character other than char is encountered at which point the strip algorithm stops Note that the data type of string1 option and char must be character with option and char being of length 1 otherwise Z7ZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field reference 2 in the focus record type contains character datac Time to go STRIP Hello World HELLO WORLD 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 59 SDE Concepts STRIP CPU Seconds CPU Seconds Time to go STRIP c CPU Seconds L STRIP c CPU Seconds t STRIP 2 B SUBSTR gt gt SUBSTR string gt start t gt x H p Length St yp pad F SUBSTR or BIFSUBSTR returns a character string which is a sub string of string starting at position start within string for length length If start is greater than the length of string then a blank character string is returned If length is greater than the length of string the returned character string is padded on the left with the pad character If not specified length defaults to be the length of string from position start to the end of string and pad defaults to be character blank Note that the data type of string must be character start and length must be a positive integer and pad must be a character string of
283. h forwards from the first field in the default record to locate the first field that matches the specified field name or reference LAST Search backwards from the last field in the default record to locate the last field that matches the specified field name or reference NEXT Search forwards from the field that is currently displayed first in the visible display to locate the next field that matches the specified field name or reference PREV Search backwards from the field that is currently displayed first in the visible display to locate the previous field that matches the specified field name or reference Examples locate 3 Scroll the display area so that the line that is 3 lines below the focus line becomes the new current line 18 Scroll the display area so that the line that is 18 lines above the focus line becomes the new current line 18 Scroll the display area so that the visible record at line number 18 becomes the new current line locate LastName Jones amp Salary gt 21950 Dept gt gt Tech prev Scroll the display area so that the first record before the focus line that is of the default record type and also satisfies the specified expression becomes the new current line locate 15 Scroll to field number 15 in the default record See Also DOWN FIND UP WHERE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 147 Command Line Primary Commands MACRO Syntax gt gt MACRO macro_name
284. h of a variable length record may be altered in the following circumstances 1 Execution of the CHANGE command results in a change to the record length This may be a change to a numerical field value that represents the current length of a variable length field or a change to the length of character data in a variable length field In particular use of CHANGE with parameter DATA and different length search and replace strings will result in a field length change Note that for variable length records record type UnMapped is used for unformatted data and comprises a single field field name UnMapped which is of variable length 2 When the record information Length field is displayed RECLENGTH ON or SET RECINFO ON LENGTH then the length of a record may be altered by simply overtyping the Length value with the new record length Altering the record length in this way will force a re assessment of the record type assigned to the record data This is done using standard record type RTO assignment rules 3 When a structure SDO or copybook has been applied to the record data and the assigned record type contains length or array vector fields then overtyping the values in any of these fields will also update the record length accordingly Attempting to alter the record length will fail if the new length is greater than the maximum LRECL defined for the file SDE Current Window The current SDE window is the SDE window view on which
285. han the length of the record then a blank character string is returned If length is greater than the length of the record the returned character string is padded on the left with the blank character If not specified length defaults to be the length of data from position start to the end of the segment in which start is located Note that the data type of the segment is character start must be a positive or negative integer value and ength must be a positive integer value otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following the segment previous to the segment currently being mapped contains the 11 character record type name of the next segment starting 16 characters before the end of that segment c REC CUST 01 Similarly the current segment data contains this name at position 31 of the segment SEGPOS 16 11 REC CUST 01 SEGPOS 31 8 REC CUST STRIP gt gt STRIP string p option been A ve gt lt Pes yp HS Nee SS STRIP or BIFSTRIP returns character string string with leading and or trailing char characters removed The option argument may be specified as character string L T or B upper or lower case to indicate respectively that Leading Trailing or Both leading and trailing characters are to be stripped If not specified option defaults to B The char argument nominates the character to be stripped and if not specified defaults to be character blank Eac
286. he string TITLE followed by the complete structure title text EXTRACT Rexx variables kitien Ire complete structure title text 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 229 SET QUERY EXTRACT TITLE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option TYPE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax Pa ra E TY pe SS4 ON EE gt lt t SET Sasa FS ORK ees Default FORMat EMT Ze OFFSet PICEUES gt gt Query LA AAA A a A AS gt lt gt gt EXTract TYpe 2 2 22222 gt lt Description This option controls display of the field data type location and length display for SDE EDIT and BROWSE window views in either mapped table view VFMT or mapped single record view MAP The format and content is controlled by the TYPE option specified See also the SHOW command which may be used as a shortcut combining control of the TYPE and OFFSET set options SET TYPE takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect If multiple SDE edit views are open for the same file then this option may be individually controlled for each view SET Value OFF Removes TYPE from display for the current view ON Default For non DB2 display is of the format data type position length where position and length identify the field s position and length within the unformatted record e g AN 111 30 indicates an Alpha Numeric cha
287. headings are displayed at each change of record type In a single record view horizontal scrolling occurs beteween visible records only VIEW is assigned to F16 by default Parameters plus Add records of the specified record type to the display of existing visible record types minus Remove records of the specified record type from the display of existing visible record types record_type The record type of any RTO defined within the current structure definition object SDO or the internal record type Record or UnMapped If no plus or minus qualifier is specified then all other record types will be suppressed unless they are also named as parameters on the same VIEW command If no record_type is specified the default record type is used asterisk Generic record type indicating that records of all record types within the SDO are to be made visible including the internal record type Record UnMapped which is used to map data records that have no associated RTO within the SDO If supplied this must be the only parameter Examples view CompUnit Source Instruction View records of the specified record types only All other records will be suppressed view View records of all record types v REC_CARD REC_CUST Add records of record type REC_CARD to the current display of records and suppress records of record type REC_CUST 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment
288. here SYSMOD LIKE RS editprimekey Edit filtered rows of DB2 table ZZS ZZSSYSMOD in subsystem CBLA allowing update of the table s primary key columns See Also BROWSE CREATE STRUCTURE EDITDIALOG 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 119 Command Line Primary Commands EDITDIALOG EDITDIALOG Syntax gt gt EDITDialog O O O a gt lt Description Open the Structured Edit dialog window to edit or browse a data set using an SDE structure SDO This dialog window may also be opened by selecting Structured Edit from the File menu in the CBLe frame window menu bar Parameters None EMSG Description SDE CLI command EMSG performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command EMSG See EMSG in CBLe Text Edit documentation END Syntax gt gt END gt lt QUIT Description Close an SDE window view opened for EDIT or BROWSE of data Set on PF3 by default If additional SDE views exist for the data then these will remain open For EDIT only if only one SDE view exists for the data and that data includes unsaved changes then one of the following will occur depending on the status of the AUTOSAVE option AUTOSAVE Action Taken ada dl or Changes to the data are saved without prompting the user before doing so OFF NOPROMPT Changes to the data are discarded Same as QQUIT User is prompted to save
289. his data type have a data type record header of TS or for DB2 table edit orowse TIMESTAMP Union A Union of one or more fields of any of the supported data types Each field in the union occupies the same start position in the data record The union field length is defined as being the length of the longest field in the union Unions allow the same data to be interpreted as more than one data type SDE Edit Techniques SDE data edit employs sophisticated techniques for in storage record data management These techniques allow for more control over the data being edited and also allows the user to edit data sets that would not otherwise fit in storage Prior to edit SELCOPY i SDE establishes the user supplied edit options the data set organisation and size and the amount of storage available Based on these SDE will perform the appropriate editing technique as follows Full Edit Supported for sequential data sets PDS E members DB2 tables and VSAM RRDS and ESDS files defined with option REUSE all records belonging to the data set are loaded into storage prior to display in an SDE window view Full edit supports change insert delete copy and move of data records Furthermore records may be updated to alter the record length if supported by the data set organisation or structure SDO This edit technique will be used where conditions for Update in place and KSDS edit are not satisfied Before a data set is opened for Full Edit SD
290. his is becuase the data set is completely re written using a combination of records obtained from the auxiliary data set and records held in storage Note that SAVE is not supported using this edit technique Auxiliary edit is used to provide full edit capabilities for sequential data sets PDS E members and VSAM RRDS and ESDS files defined with option REUSE when one of the following is true 1 The data set is too large to be loaded into available storage 2 Parameter AUXILIARY is specified on the SDE EDIT CLI command If Auxiliary Edit is in effect Edit AUX is displayed in the SDE window title bar to the left of the DSN The auxiliary data set is allocated by SDE and subsequently deleted after the edited file is closed The generated data set name has HLQ prefix as defined by the SDE AUXDSNPREFIX INI variable default 8USER CBLI SDEAUX followed by qualifiers of the format Dyyyyjjj Thhmmsst Note that the HLQ prefix may be updated using the SDE SET AUXDSNPREFIX command 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 41 SDE Concepts Changing Record Lengths Changing Record Lengths The SDE is a structured data editor and so in order to preserve the structure of record data the lengths of updated records are unchanged when the data is saved This occurs whether or not a structure SDO or copybook has been applied to the record data and has the effect of preserving any trailing blanks that exist in the records However the lengt
291. hut Uniaes canoa isa 33 Data RECORDS EE 33 XS ieee Lov El 34 lei EE 34 SDE Data FEO Mas A ieee 35 TADE FOM EE 35 o 35 Character Eo Mates ina io ada 36 Hexadecimal Calma eebe Ehe eier 36 Hexadecimal DUMpPIRO Malos meros erica ori ri e 37 SE DIE a tener reer cere rater pecans 37 SPASE ale A0 Changing Record Length esas ro ra ia 42 SDE CUTE VV NOW alas barba 42 Default Record PO ui ti dd a e 42 DBZ Table Display acusando ES EE EES 43 ELIE EE 43 DBZ Table Edi Browse A A 43 So E 44 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE Contents SDE Concepts Structure Definition and Record Type ASSIGN ment cnc da 45 Specifying USE WHEN Segment Identification Klees cccccescatsescosseseeseessecnciecs ii aia 45 Segmented Records SDE Browse Edit VEW EE 45 Navigating Seamen tee Recordi Disparos 46 SOOM GMS CAC CONN NEE 46 Data Updates that affect Record Seg Ment Mapping cascara rc a ataans 46 LS UR ECU GT Te EE 46 Record UNC OM ti dd lp dia 47 BCE Gelee le 47 EXPO eege EE 48 Expression Rn 48 Expression Do e treet prettier crete era cos mere tere rer 50 O ce EE A A E AE E Stacaanaeastdeas cn set etdteascteawuutd 50 Relational Operator Sian eae e E ae KO e ais 50 A E Ee 51 Parentheses and Operator Precedente ceci corras isa roo es iaa 51 Funcion NS uses scooters ii cs ia 52 SUBSP eA Fod Name COM ler acne ica lid in 52 ABBRE V eege Eed EE geed E Eet E A E E 52 Se Ol a daba 52 Eege 53 E Ee TE 53 Ey INC SO EE 53 DATAT PEERROR EE
292. icable and so is suppressed CBLe Edit NBEBJ2 CBLI SDE SAMP YVYARCDATSALES using NBJ2 CBLI SDOCCOBSALES EBx File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapList Help wS wR 3 Command gt SSES ECOLE Record type REC CUST F 192 Flags LRecL TER Offset CUST ID PASS LASTNAME 2 3 4 FB 1 2 AN 3 15 AN 18 15 MERA SS SS Sl O SOS O O 9 8 9156 78f j2foa Ramstein Si 0 0 3 204 7037 chico Richards 3 400 712 benj Hill Offset CUST ID COMPANY 6 AN 6 7 gt VISA VISA DELTA Figure 43 Record Info Decimal for single volume non VSAM Data Set For VSAM data sets the record identification is by Relative Byte Address RBA The column is displayed as a decimal or hexadecimal value with header RBA CBL CBLI MBRLIST KSDS using LAC CBLI SDO MBRLISTC 12000 File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapLlList Help Command gt Record type MBRLIST V 31 10031 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006 000007 000008 000009 000010 800011 000012 000013 Flags LRecL RBA SSO SS ey APEATRAC XVACTRAC APEATRAC APEATRAC APEATRAC APEATRAC APEATRAC APEATRAC APEATRAC APEATRAC FAW lt ult sem SY OUD pa ER LU e UI H un He UI Hl du O Hl ul O Hl ul O a v 00 00 10 10 10 10 E 1 00 00 bot UT CH eje KEKEEKEKWEWI omtttztobOmmtztu 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000
293. ied in number of bytes by an Integer Binary Byte field located immediately before the character data The Integer Binary field is of a predefined length which may be defined as being included with or excluded from the character field length The character field contents are interpreted as printable ASCII or EBCDIC character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn or for DB2 table edit browse VARCHAR nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Character Variable Field of Static Length with Preceding Length Field A Character field of variable length padded with blanks to occupy a field of a fixed predefined length The variable length of the character data is determined by a 2 byte Integer Binary Byte field located immediately before the character data The 2 byte Integer Binary field length is not included within the stored length This data type is equivalent to PL 1 fields declared as CHARACTER VARYING The character field contents are interpreted as printable ASCII or EBCDIC character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes This value includes the 2 byte length field Character Variable Field of Static Length with Null Termination A Character field of variable len
294. ierarchy including the record type name which is itself a structure definition e g OrderRec structA structN fieldX 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 31 SDE Concepts Structured Data Fields Note that unless parameter CASE RESPECT was used to create the structure SDO the field name and any of its qualifier structure names may be typed in any character case Field Reference The field reference number is unique in the record type definition The required field may be identified by specifying its field reference number prefixed by a hash symbol Field Subscripts Fields that constitute elements of an array COBOL OCCURS clause may be individually identified using a parenthesised comma separated list of array vectors as a subscript to the array field name or field reference One array vector value must be specified for each dimension defined to the array Each vector is an integer value identifying the field s position in that dimension of the array e g 13 3 is element 3 of a single dimension field array RoomArea 6 2 is the x y coordinate of an element in a two dimensional field array SDE Window Views An SDE window is an MDI child window view that may be opened from within the CBLe Text Editor or SELCOPY Interactive application parent window Data within an SDE window is presented as either a multi record or single record view Multi Record View This is an SDE MDI child window containing mul
295. iew multi or single is unchanged To display records as unformatted and untyped then execute UNFMT to display the data in single record view or CHAR to display the data in multi record view To further display both character and hex representation of the data use HEX ON OFF Unformatted record data is displayed as a single character field of length equal to the record length and with field name UnMapped or UnMappedSeg Notes 1 FORMAT HEX is equivalent to FORMAT CHAR with HEX set on 2 If the record data contains non printable characters then the CHAR representation of the data is non enterable This protects the user from accidental update of the non printable text that would otherwise occur as a result of 3270 I O Update of record data may still be achieved by updating the HEX representation of the text or using the CHANGE command Displaying a Record Segment in Single Record View A single record view arranges the fields vertically If formatted the field names and formatted data types is displayed to the left of the associated field data Once the SDE window view has been opened a single record view of a data record may be displayed using any of the following e Where the current display is a multi record view and current record type formatting and hex display is to be preserved execute the ZOOM operation as follows 1 Enter primary command ZOOM SDE window command prompt then position the cursor on the required record
296. ifferent structures as defined by COBOL group items or PL 1 structures referenced by or within a single copybook data set or PDS PDSE library member If this is the case a formatted display of the file s records may be opened in an SDE edit or browse view simply by referencing the appropriate copy book file as described below 1 Open the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel by selecting Data Edit from the Primary Option Menu or simply entering command SDE at any command prompt 2 Enter the fileid of your data set HFS file or PDS PDSE library member in the appropriate INPUT field s 3 Select Browse or Edit options and for Edit select the type of Edit to be performed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 8 Getting Started with SDE Display Records using a single COBOL or PL 1 Copy Book 4 Activate the USING Copybook option field by selecting it with then enter the copy book type COBOL or PL1 in the field between USING and Copybook 5 Enter the fileid of the copy book in the input field following USING Copybook This may be a sequential file DSN or PDS PDSE library DSN and member name 6 For COBOL copy books only if the copy book includes fields which comprise variable pseudo text strings then select REPLACE from the menu bar to open the COBOL Compiler Options panel Review and if necessary add COBOL replacing options that convert the pseudo text strings in your copy book 7 Press lt Enter gt
297. ify an Offset into record or record segment data at which formatting will begin This may be a positive or negative integer value with default zero 0 5 For record types PRI or SEC activate the Id with and specify an SDE expression that must be satisfied in order for this record type to be assigned to the record data Selection criteria expressions may be very complex and you should first familiarise yourself with available built in functions e g substr basepos and segpos formatted field value referencing techniques and operators supported by SDE expressions Press lt PF2 gt with the cursor in the Id field to expand it into a text edit view Having completed edit of the selection criteria expression press lt PF3 gt to close the edit view and copy the text to the ld field You may also use lt PF10 gt and lt PF11 gt to scroll the text in expandable input fields 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 12 Getting Started with SDE Display Records or Record Segments using an SDO structure STRUCTURE Define wS wR Command gt Sie ieee CSF ZZSGSDOR Lineas 1 16 of 16 XZPARTOI Copybook Member Name PART H1 Record Tupe Name Normally defined by O1 Level Name PRI Default Primary or Secondary COBOL Compiler Language D Offset within record at which to start mapping SUBSTRCRECORD S 3 C PA1 Use PF2 to expand Record identification criteria Press PF3 to return to the record types
298. ile SDF See command SAVESTRUCTURE Parameters FILE has no parameters See Also CANCEL END QQUIT 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 125 Command Line Primary Commands FILE FIND Syntax EQ NEXT CHARs gt gt Find ae PO A string ere gt e nosni ten gt i ae e op A E ALL ie PREfix R EX a la VALID A a FIRST a SUFfix a NX INVALID i ee LAST le WORD oe x ss PREV ALL ZFIRST ZLAST AAA A AAA i es O n geg db POST Sasa see ase SS O Named 3 pos2 s D name2 de pesos hesesssees persas eS p eee v field_col E E i field_coll field_col2 l Description Search DB2 table rows or data records in the current edit or browse view for the specified character string or numeric value Only DB2 table rows records or record segments assigned the default record type visible and EXCLUDED records are included in the search Records groups that are of a different record type or are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED are excluded from the search Note that DB2 table rows may be considered to be formatted records that are all assigend the default record type If the specified occurrence all first last next or previous of the search string or numeric value is found within a record then 1
299. ill text to the right of the replaced string be shifted right If a structure has been applied to the edited records and a CHANGE operation alters the length of a record or updates a field referenced by a USE record_type WHEN condition then the IDENTIFY command may be used to re evaluate the record type RTO assigened to the changed record When the duration of a CHANGE or RCHANGE execution exceeds 1 second a progress window is opened displaying the number of records processed so far This window also provides the user with the oportunity to interrupt the operation using the Attn key The FORMAT of the SDE display affects the execution of CHANGE Unformatted Multi or Single Record Display CHAR or UNFMT By default a character compare for the supplied search string is performed against the entire length of unformatted data records The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define the area of the record within which the search occurs i e the matched data must begin at or after the left bound and not exceed the right bound The BOUNDS columns may be overridden using pos and pos2 positional parameters field_col and ALL parameters are not applicable to these display formats and are ignored Formatted Multi or Single Record Display VFMT or FMT For formatted records the search string is compared against individual fields that have been selected for display in the formatted data record See SELECT Fields are searched from
300. implied by the precision which defines the total number of decimal digits The scale defines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point Fields of this data type have a data type record header of ZD ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Floating Point Hexadecimal A Hexadecimal Floating Point field of length 4 bytes short or 8 bytes long whose value is displayed as a decimal number consisting of a normalised mantissa and exponent Fields of this data type have a data type record header of FP ppp nn or for DB2 table edit browse REAL for short fields and FLOAT for long fields where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Floating Point Binary A Binary Floating Point IEEE 754 field of length 4 bytes short or 8 bytes long whose value is displayed as a decimal number consisting of a normalised mantissa and exponent Fields of this data type have a data type record header of FP ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Floating Point Decimal A Decimal Floating Point IEEE 754r field of length 8 bytes or 16 bytes whose value is displayed as a decimal number consisting of a normalised mantissa and exponent Fields of this data type have a data type record header of FP p
301. imply upper cased as for the UPPER function call If not specified pad defaults to be character blank Note that the data type of string tabo and tabi must be character and pad must be a character string of length 1 otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Usage Note It is recommended that when expressed as a literal string translate tables tabi or tabo be prefixed with C or c to avoid unintentional upper casing of lower case translate table alpha characters 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 60 SDE Concepts TRANSLATE Examples In the following field reference 6 in the focus record type contains character data c 111 met by moonlight proud Titania TRANSLATE 6 ILL MET BY MOONLIGHT PROUD TITANIA TRANSLATE 6 c SsXx c TtOo Ill met by mxxnlighs prxud Sisania TRANSLATE 6 c LlAa c I met by moon ight proud Tit ni TRANSLATE c 321 c abc c 123 oba gt gt TRUNCATED gt lt TRUNCATED or BIFTRUNCATED has no arguments and applies to edit of segmented records only It returns 1 if the focus segment is a primary base segment which has been flagged as belonging to a record that has been truncated by an IDENTIFY or a SAVE FILE or END operation TRNC gt Otherwise 0 is returned Because TRUNCATED has no arguments it may be expressed simply as TRUNCATED UPPER gt gt UPPER string
302. in effect i e if multiple SDE views are open for the same file then this option may be individually controlled for each view SET Value Columns Position Displays the location of the start of each field as a decimal position Hex X Displays the location of the start of each field as a hexadecimal offset Relative Offset Displays the location of the start of each field as a decimal offset QUERY Response The current setting of the OFFSET option POSITION HEX OFFSET EXTRACT Rexx variables loftset 1 The current setting of the OFFSET option POSITION HEX OFFSET PAD SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax EE EE PAD BLank pS sess ss se gt lt SET Ho NUL oy see oe char aaa aS SSS Sea gt gt Query PEU A a aaa eer gt lt gt gt EXTract PAD gt lt Description This option defines the PAD character to be used when a new record is inserted or when the length of a variable length record is increased via a CHANGE command or by updating the Record information Length field The initial value for PAD is BLANK SET PAD takes effect at the File level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 216 SET QUERY EXTRACT PAD SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SET Value BLANK The blank character x 40 NULL
303. in the DB2 results table returned by the SQL query The first row displayed becomes row 1 within the SDE window browse view Rows that occur before this row number are not included within the browse session Default is row 1 FOR n_rows lt ROWS gt Equivalent to FOR n_recs RECORDS FOR n_rows ROWS specifies the maximum number of rows to be displayed from the DB2 results table returned by the SQL query Rows that fall outside the range of rows specified by FROM n FOR n_rows are not included within the browse session Default is to display all selected rows PROFILE macro_name Specifies the REXX SDE edit macro to be executed as the profile when the data set is browsed macro_name must exist in a library within the SDE macro path The PROFILE option only alters the profile used for the file currently being browsed lt does not define the profile macro to be used for subsequent SDE edit or browse The default is to execute a macro with member name SDEPROF if it exists NOPROFILE Suppresses use of a profile macro when browsing the file The NOPROFILE option only suppresses use of a profile for the file currently being browsed It does not suppress use of a profile macro for subsequent SDE edit or browse Examples lt sd browse CBL SDE MOD ZJ2202 using CBL CBLI SDO PRODL view ARCX1 PRODX Browse records from data set CBL SDE MOD ZJ2202 within the SDE Initially display all records of type ARCX1 and PRODX where the record type objects
304. in the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Compare with Binary Integer Bit data type which is a binary integer field with length expressed in number of bits PL 1 Picture String Character A PL 1 style PICTURE string representing a character data item i e no numerical interpretation of length determined by the specified picture string The picture string may contain any valid PL 1 picture character for character data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes PL 1 Picture String Fixed Point Numerical A PL 1 style PICTURE string representing a FIXED numerical character data item of length determined by the specified picture string The picture string may contain any valid PL 1 picture character for numeric character data except for exponent characters E and K Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 39 SDE Concepts SDE Edit Techniques PL 1 Picture String Floating Point Numerical Not Yet Supported A PL 1 style PICTURE string representing a FLOAT numerical character data item of length determined by the specified picture string The picture
305. inction is to be made between multiple data sets displayed in SDE views each using different SDO structure definitions but where the specified record_type is defined in more than one of the structures Default is the SDO structure used to map records in the current SDE view ASCIl SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt AZ ASCii A ON ARRA gt lt SET a OFF BS gt gt Query AG Gad E a gt lt gt gt EXTract KRELL eege gt lt Description This option causes data in all character AN fields to be interpreted in ASCII format SET ASCII takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Controls whether ASCII interpretation is in effect ON or not OFF Note that setting ASCII OFF does not interpret as EBCDIC data fields defined as being ASCII in the record type definition i e these types of character field are always interpreted as being ASCII QUERY Response The current setting of the ASCII option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables lascii 1 pe current setting of ASCII ON or OFF AUTOSAVE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt 4h AUTOSave ON 4 4 gt lt SET OFF PROMPT NOPROMPT gt gt Query AUTO Save tee aS Se RS SRS esa gt lt gt gt EXTract AUTOSave
306. indow view Options are selected by entering the required option number at the prompt or by pressing the appropriate PFKey Note that items in the menu are sensitive to the prevailing default record type Record Type Options VIEW record_type records only Executes the following SDE VIEW command to make visible only records that are associated with the specified record type RTO VIEW record_type Add Remove record_type records to from current VIEW If the focus line is a shadow line representing a suppressed record group then this option is Add records to the display otherwise this option is Remove records from the display The following SDE VIEW command is executed to add to or remove from the display of visible records all records that are associated with the specified record type RTO VIEW record_type Select from list of available record types Generates a temporary CMX command centre file containing a number of SDE VIEW commands that enables the user to easily add or remove records assigned individual record types from the current display of visible records The temporary CMX file is displayed in a CBLe text edit window which allows the user to execute the VIEW commands simply by placing the cursor on the required command line beginning with lt and pressing lt F16 lt The CMX file contains the following VIEW commands sd view View all records of any record type sd view Suppress all r
307. ine Primary Commands RIGHT The following interpretation of cursor location applies so that RIGHT CURSOR can operate successfully on the appropriate data e Cursor is located at an offset within a column header line The cursor position is interpreted as being at the same offset within the data record that immediately follows the group of header lines e Cursor is located within a column of type character AN but beyond the width of the character data The cursor position is interpreted as being the last position of the displayed character data e Cursor is located immediately to the left of a column of any type The cursor position is interpreted as being the the first position of the data displayed within that column Where the first column to be displayed is not of type character AN the magnitude by which the display is scrolled to the right is always reduced to display all field data belonging to the first column Similaraly if the last column to be displayed is not of type character and the display width is too small to accomodate all the column s data and header text the column will not be displayed No adjustment is made when scrolling right into an offset within a character data column i e where the first column of the display is of type character the first position of the column display need not be the first character of the character data If the last column to be displayed is of type character and the display width is too small to
308. ing but that the string search will be case sensitive e g C Book 0 A hexadecimal string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix X 0 A picture string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix P Picture strings use special characters to represent a generic group of characters as described below Any character in a picture string that is not one of these special characters is untranslated De An no Any numeri ge a0 GE a A regular expression enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix R Regular expressions use special characters for complex pattern matching See Regular Expressions in CBLe text edit documentation for detailed description Intended for use with formatted records VALID will search fields for valid data i e data that satisfies the field s assigned data type Intended for use with formatted records INVALID will search fields for invalid data i e data that does not satisfy the field s assigned data type For non numeric search strings only CHARS indicates that a successful match occurs if the search string is found anywhere within the data being searched For non numeric search strings only PREFIX indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found at the start of a word within the data being searched i e the matched text must precede an alphanumeric character and either be preceded by a non alphanu
309. ing primary command SPM SHOWPOPUPMENDU Record type REC CARD Fixed 66 Offset 0 Data elements 13 Record gt 00000008 Flags f Length 66 1 00000000 00000008 0000061C 0001C3C4 gt 17 C5D3E340 40400675 48756764 74656CD4 ELT CTAAR M 33 D940C340 E2D3C1C9 D5404040 40404040 R C SLAIN 49 40404040 40404040 0200409C 0200501C E 65 719C Ee Unlike other storage display windows altering the number of fullwords displayed per line and or including display of the data s address in storage will not attempt to resize the window display For EDIT both the hexadecimal and character representations of the data may be updated whereby changes to one representation of the data are automatically reflected in the other Beware however that overtyping the character representation of the data will update all fullwords in the updated line so they reflect the character data In the character representation a null character x 00 is represented by blank EBCDIC x 40 and other non printable characters are represented by dots EBCDIC x 4B Therefore updating the character representation will result in these characters replacing the original hexadecimal values If parameter NEW is specified the hex dump display is opened in a new window view allowing the user to preserve the current data display format in the original window view Parameters NEW Open the hex dump display in a new SDE EDIT BROWSE window view See Also 2013 11 13 13 03 23 S
310. ion se coats 216 PAD SET QUERY EXTRACT Option 216 PAGEDEPTH SET QUERY EXTRACT Option ae cere eee 217 PAGEWIDTA SETOUERWEX TRACI OPUOM cae cceccneexicet siete deceive E ted 218 PEKEY SE He Ee e A eeler EE 218 POINT SEWQUERYEX TRACT ODO uscar dtvactenasdchasacseianccaseestessaunesosateaadavetsauacteiancesasesnczeandte maacnczeeuseteuanceitees 218 PREFIX SEI QUERY EXTRAG O a aa a Dis 219 OSEPARATOR QUER VEXTRACIOP EE 220 REGEN SETOQUERY EX TRACT ODIOM EE 221 REGCINFO SETQUERYEXTRAGT OPO iscrio sarosar iad ien aeaiee EEEE sett EER a EENES NES 221 Si ER deen II EE e an lanas ret rer 223 REFERENCE SEMOVERYEXIRACT OPIOM oerni estelares tooo eege 224 REGION QUERY EXTRACT OPON easier 224 RESERVED SETQUERY EXTRACT OPON scooter ii tree 225 RESERVEDLEVEL SEVCUERVEXIRACT er EE 225 SAVEOPTIONS SE QUERY EX TRAG T lala ee tae o o 225 SCALE SEMQUERWEXTRACT OPlO Mccain ist Eege deed deeg 226 SESSION QUERY EXTRACT SiG Messiaen aaa 227 SHADOW SETOUERY EX TRAGT Op dea aiii 228 SIZE QUER VEN IRAC EE 229 TILE SE VOUERYEXTRAC T ODIOM EE 229 TYPE SEVOUERVEX TRACT EE 230 Ile Lee lee Kl lee Te 231 UNNAMED SE Ke Ch ERAS OPHION Peete eee meee eer ere ee eae daa er ees Oh acen ere re 232 USEOFFSET SET QUERY EXTRACT Option 232 USERNAME QUERY EXTRACT Option 234 USING QUERY EXTRACT Option eg Sec 234 VALUE EXTRACT ODUM EE 235 VIEW e Ke AR el E 235 WINNAME SET QUER deele dE 236 WINPOS
311. ion 1 of string2 and the start position If string1 is not found 0 is returned If not specified or a value greater than the length of string2 start defaults to be the last position i e length of string2 Note that the data type of both string1 and string2 must be character and the data type of start must be a positive integer otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field name SourceText exists in the focus record type and contains character data c To be or not to be LASTPOS be SourceText LASTPOS c be SourceText 17 LASTPOS c be SourceText 17 4 gt gt LEFT string length hos AA SSSR SSeS ea gt lt LEFT or BIFLEFT returns a character string equal to the left most length characters of string H length is greater than the length of string the returned character string is padded on the right with the pad character If not specified pad defaults to be character blank Note that the data type of string must be character length must be a positive integer and pad must be a character string of length 1 otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples LEFT Hello World 5 LEFT c Hello World 15 LEFT c Hello World 13 HELLO Hello World i Hello World LENGTH gt gt LENGTH string eth n a Snee ss ee gt lt LENGTH or BIFLENGTH returns the length of string Note that the data type of string must be character otherw
312. ion of data and are referenced throughout this documentation It is recommended that users familiarise themselves with the terms detailed in this section prior to performing any advanced edit operations Record Structure Definition In order to display a file s data records correctly within SELCOPY i SDE an appropriate data definition must exist that accurately defines fields within the data records For SELCOPY i SDE a data definition is called the structure and must exist in an internal SDE format generated by the CREATE STRUCTURE command Any existing COBOL or PL1 copybooks that map the file s data records may be used to generate the SDE structure Structure Definition Object The Structure Definition Object SDO is an in storage copy of an SDE structure comprising one or more Record Type Objects used to format data records within a file An SDO may be temporary or non temporary and is referenced by its structure name If non temporary the structure name is the fileid of the Structure Definition File from which the SDO is loaded and to which any changes to the SDO will be saved An SDO is created or loaded into storage when a structure is created explicitly or implicitly via a CREATE STRUCTURE operation or when a structure is nominated on an EDIT or BROWSE command If updates are made to Record Type Objects belonging to a non temporary SDO then a prompt to save the SDO will be displayed when an attempt is made to drop the SDO from
313. irst column of the display Parameters CURSOR CSR The focus column becomes the last column of the scrolled display In addition to this if the focus column is type character AN and the cursor is positioned on a character that is at an offset 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 139 Command Line Primary Commands LESS into the focus column data then an attempt is made to make that character occupy the last position of the scrolled display If any of the following conditions are true then LEFT PAGE is executed instead Cursor is positioned anywhere other than within a floating column in a visible data record 0 Focus column is not type AN and is already the last column of the display 0 Focus column is type AN is already the last column of the display and cursor position is at the last position of the displayed column data ALL Valid only in multi record view ALL indicates that scrolling is to apply to all records in the display and not only those records that are assigned the default record type DATA Scroll left so that the first floating column in the current display area becomes the last column of the scrolled display If this column is type character AN and the first position of the display falls on a character that is at an offset into the column then an attempt is made to make that character occupy the last position of the scrolled display HALF Scroll a number of columns so that the column situated half w
314. is to be used regularly to format file record data for Edit browse File search or File Compare then a non temporary SDO should created saved and used by these operations instead of the copy book Create an SDE structure SDO from a single COBOL or PL 1 Copy Book A non temporary SDE structure definition object SDO may be generated and saved to a sequential data set or PDS PDSE library member for subsequent use by any operation that formats structured record data e g SDE BROWSE EDIT File Search Update Copy Remap FSU and File Compare COMPFILE Ifthe SDO is to be generated from a single COBOL or PL 1 copy book source then the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel may be used If multiple source copy books are to be used for generating an SDO containing either multiple record structure record type definitions or segmented record record type definitions then the Create Structure from COBOL PL1 Copybook s panel should be used See Create an SDE structure SDO from a multipple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books To generate an SDO from a single copy book source 1 Open the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel as described previously 2 Enter the fileid of the SDO file to be created in the input field following USING SDO Structure This may be a sequential file DSN or PDS PDSE library DSN and member name Note that the field option does not need to be activated 3 In field option USING Copybook enter the copy book type COBOL or PL
315. ise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field reference 13 contains character data c James Joyce LENGTH Hello LENGTH 13 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 56 SDE Concepts LENGTH LENGTHERROR gt gt LENGTHERROR gt lt LENGTHERROR or BIFLENGTHERROR has no arguments lt returns 1 if the focus record or segment is flagged as having been assigned a record type whereby the length of the record segment falls outside the limits of possible lengths for the record type LGTH gt Otherwise 0 is returned Because LENGTHERROR has no arguments it may be expressed simply as LENGTHERROR LOWER gt gt LOWER string n gt lt LOWER or BIFLOWER returns the string with all upper case alpha characters lower cased and all other characters unchanged Note that the data type of string must be character otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field array element Email 2 contains character data c Mark123 CBL COM LOWER HELLO LOWER email 2 hello mark123 cbl com LRECL gt gt LRECL gt lt LRECL or BIFLRECL has no arguments It returns the length of the focus record segment or DB2 table row Because LRECL has no arguments it may be expressed simply as LRECL NOEOL
316. ive or negative integer value not zero and must be a value that is less than or equal to the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data the length of the expanded record A negative value represents a position in the record relative to the end of the record Therefore where position 1 references the 1st character in the record position 1 references the last character For all display formats the string is treated as being non numeric and the search is actioned on the character representation of the record data pos2 The last position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched Like pos1 pos2 may be a positive or negative integer value not zero If pos1 references a position within the record data which is higher than that referenced by pos2 then the pos and pos2 values are swapped If pos2 is greater than the maximum length of the data records or for formatted record data greater than the length of the expanded record then pos2 is set equal to the maximum or expanded record length Default is pos plus the length of the search string minus 1 ALL Search all eligible field columns in the current formatted display field_col An individual field column to be searched within a formatted display The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 6 or its name e g JobID If a field name is used enclosing parentheses are mandatory Field names are automatically converted to a fiel
317. lay Remove from the display records that are of the same record type as this line V may be specified on a visible data record or on EXCLUDED SUPPRESSED or NOTSELECTED shadow lines Note however that specification on a SUPPRESSED or NOTSELECTED record group shadow line will not remove record types from the display The DRECTYPE value is updated to be this record type and this line becomes the first line of the display Mark a line or a block of lines for exclusion from the display Only visible not excluded data records are eligible to be excluded i e records flagged as NOTSELECTED SUPPRESSED or EXCLUDED are not eligible to be excluded Note that although not eligible for exclusion shadow lines representing NOTSELECTED SUPPRESSED or EXCLUDED records groups are still included within an X n count of lines to be excluded If a shadow line is not displayed SHADOW OFF it is not included within an X n line count Switch to a zoomed single record view display of the record occupying this line Structured Data Environment SDE 239 Function Keys 3270 Program Function Keys PFKeys may be assigned to SDE commands The default keylist for SDE browse edit views is DATAEDIT The SDE program default function keys are Scroll the window display upwards by an amount determined by the scroll field or specified on the command line DOWN Scroll the window display downwards by an amount determined by the scroll field or specifi
318. lay format on or off Issued without the ON or OFF parameter the display format is toggled 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 133 Command Line Primary Commands HEX If the current display format has been set using FORMAT CHAR or FORMAT HEX then HEX ON is the equivalent of issuing FORMAT HEX If the current display format has been set using FORMAT SINGLE or FORMAT TABLE then for each line displayed HEX ON will add two further lines to show the hexadecimal representation of the raw unformatted data below each formatted field e g SRCRecOff SRCRecLen SRCMbr 44 45 47 BN 121 4 BN 125 4 AN 137 8 gmn Segen eege erg 192 80 APEZLINK 0009 0005 CDCEDCDD 0008 0000 17593952 144 80 SDEFCMD1 0009 0005 ECCCCDCF 0000 0000 24563441 Parameters ON OFF HEX display format is set ON or OFF HEXDUMP Syntax gt gt HEXDUMp hee SSS SS SS gt lt se New Ser Description Display the focus record or record segment in single record unformatted hex dump view HEXDUMP may also be executed for an individual record record segment using prefix command HEX or HEXD The hex dump view is a storage display window which displays a number of fullwords of data in both long hexadecimal and character representation The hex dump display supports the storage window options popup menu opened by positioning the cursor in the character or hex representation of the data and pressing lt F16 gt or execut
319. le CSF e 39 49 Offset 0 Data elements 15 TER MYDECIMAL MYFIXED MYFLOAT HS 6 Ho PD 8 4 FB 12 4 FP 16 4 lento lt i lt i 1234 56 1234567 89 1 0500000E D001 1234 56 1234567 3939 1 080000EtT0 06 1 L Command gt Record type DATA TYPES 1 Variabl MYREC MYBINTEGER MYCHARAC DATA TYP Field input error REC MYZON 7 Input of Led ZD 2 input lt 12 Do you want 12 e ju zZ N DATA TYP MYBIN Figure 22 SDE Field Input Error Find and Replace Data The CHANGE command allows users to selectively change occurrences of a supplied character string or numeric value to another string value for records of a specific record type The CHANGE command will search for the first specified string value using the same specifications used for a FIND command see Finding Record Data by Search String then replace it with the second specified string value e g To find and change the next occurrence of the value 1234 56 to 9876 54 in the numeric field MYDECIMAL in records of the same record type as the focus record enter the following CHANGE 1234 56 9876 54 MYDECIMAL To find and change the next occurrence of the search string value execute the RCHANGE SDE CLI command assigned to PF6 by default To find and optionally change the next occurrence of the search string value execute a combination of RFIND assigned to PF5 by default and then RCHANGE CHANGE ALL will change all occurrences of the
320. le storage In place for edit browse of file records that need not be loaded into storage until required for processing Auxiliary for files that are too large to be loaded entirely in available storage CBLe Text Edit supports only In storage edit so excluding the ability to edit large data sets 2 Select the type of EDIT to be performed on the data SDE supports Full EDIT allowing change of record length as well as move insert copy and delete of records or the more restrictive Update in place EDIT allowing only update of existing records without changing record length The benefit of Update in place EDIT is that unless record subsetting is performed on load see below file records need only be loaded into storage when required for display or CHANGE processing CBLe Text Edit supports Full EDIT only 3 VSAM Edit SDE supports full VSAM editing capabilities including edit of VSAM data sets defined with the NOREUSE attribute and location of records by KEY RBA or record number as appropriate CBLe text edit of VSAM data sets is restricted to data sets defined with the REUSE attribute and consequently re writes all records when the data set is saved 4 Subset on records to be loaded for edit SDE supports use of a FILTER expression to select only records that satisfy the expression and or FROM FOR to select a range of records from the file Specifying FILTER FROM and or FOR forces In storage EDIT technique and Update in plac
321. left to right in the order that they appear in the display This is true regardless of the order in which field columns are specified on the CHANGE command or the order in which fields are encountered within the unformatted record The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define which of the fields within the formatted records are eligible to be searched i e Fields are eligible only if they exist within the left and right bounds when applied to the expanded record data which is not necessarily the same as the unformatted record data Where a BOUNDS column occurs within a field definition then the following rules apply 1 For character data type fields only the area of the field that falls within the BOUNDS columns is eligible for the search 2 For numeric data type fields the field is not eligible to be included in the search If one or more field columns are specified on the CHANGE command using Geld color field_col1 field_col2 that do not reference at least one field defined by the BOUNDS columns as being eligible for search then the following error message is returned ZZSD280E No fields selected within the current bounds for the CHANGE command If a field column is specified on the CHANGE command that is not part of the display e g a group field or a field that has been removed from display by a SELECT command then the following error message is returned ZZSD179E Data element field_col is not selected in the current vie
322. less of the record to which it belongs NEXT and PREV may be used to scroll between secondary segments of the current record only LEFT CURSOR DATA HALF PAGE are not applicable in single record view LEFT is assigned to PF10 by default Any characters specified on the command line when the PFKey is hit will be concatenated to the command and treated as a parameter string Where no parameter is specified the scroll amount will be the value specified in the Scroll gt field Multi Record View Scrolling Columns may have the HOLD flag set on by the SELECT command These columns are static in the display and like the prefix area and Lrecl column are unaffected by LEFT and RIGHT scrolling Columns that have the HOLD flag set off are referred to as floating columns The following interpretation of cursor location applies so that LEFT CURSOR can operate successfully on the appropriate data e Cursor is located at an offset within a column header line The cursor position is interpreted as being at the same offset within the data record that immediately follows the group of header lines e Cursor is located within a column of type character AN but beyond the width of the character data The cursor position is interpreted as being the last position of the displayed character data e Cursor is located immediately to the left of a column of any type The cursor position is interpreted as being the the first position of the data displayed within that
323. lines that follow to be copied 2 Enter prefix line command CC on the first and last line of a block of lines to be copied The copy operation treats typed and untyped lines of data identically i e it is not sensitve to any assigned record type Following a copy operation record type assignment processing occurs for all records affected by the operation Having marked a line or block of lines to be copied position the cursor in the prefix area of the line where the lines are to be copied and enter A After or B Before The marked line or block of lines are copied after or before the target line respectively and the cursor is placed on the first character of the first line copied If the target of the copy operation is within the block of lines marked for copy then an error message is returned Only excluded or non excluded records or segments may be copied Records that are SUPPRESSED or NOT SELECTED are unaffected by copy operations Duplicating Records Duplicating records record segments and DB2 table rows is not supported by Update in place edit technique Lines of data records record segments or DB2 table rows may be duplicated as follow 1 Enter prefix line command R n on the line to be duplicated n number of times 2 Enter prefix line command RR n on the first line RR on the last line of a block of lines to be duplicated n number of times 3 Enter prefix line command RR n on the first line RR
324. list table Figure 7 SDO Create Structure from COBOL PL1 Copybook s Record Type View 6 When all record type definitions have been configured press lt PF3 gt to return to the main panel view 7 For COBOL copy books only if any of the copy books include fields which comprise variable pseudo text strings then select option 3 Replace to open the COBOL Compiler Options panel Review and if necessary add COBOL replacing options that convert the pseudo text strings in your copy books 8 Select option 4 Create to generate the SDO in the foreground Alternatively select option 5 Batch to create an SDEAMAIN batch job for generating the SDO and display it in a text edit view Display Records or Record Segments using an SDO structure The fileid of the saved SDO may be specified in the USING SDO Structure input field of the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel for any Edit or Browse of the file containing the record data to which it applies Note that the same SDO may be used to format the file s records in other SELCOPY i applications including Formatted File Search Update Remap and also Formatted or Hierarchical File Compare SS ee Structured Dats Browse Edit File Run Command SDO REPLACE FILTER Help wS wR ommand gt Scrolls SS DER Lines 1 20 of 23 INPUT Fileid CBL XXRDSO3S DATN109 KSDS or Fileid format ivolser dataset name member Volume For uncataloged datasets DSN Member Hrs Rectm cul
325. ly position the cursor within the record at which text is to be entered and begin typing Existing data may be overtyped and deleted or new text may be inserted within the existing record data Note that the length of a record record segment or DB2 table row cannot be updated simply by inserting or deleting data Record length changes may be achieved by manually updating the Record information Length field See command RECLENGTH or via a CHANGE operation Beware when editing typed unformatted data that the integrity of the data when formatted is preserved i e Inserting deleting or overtyping data so that when formatted unintended or invalid data exists within the formatted fields When editing formatted data text entered within a field is restricted by the size of that field On encountering the end of a field the cursor is automatically positioned at the next field in the display Therefore users should beware not to accidentally overtype data in subsequent fields Note however that inserting text before existing data in a field will not propagate that data into subsequent fields in the display If character field data contains non printable text then areas of the field containing printable text are highlighted using underscore characters by default and areas of non printable text are fixed within the field data Only areas of printable text are enterable However if HEX ON or FORMAT HEx is in effect then non printable text may b
326. m alternative WHERE expr filters for the same record type If INCLUDE is specified then all record types that are not referenced by an INCLUDE parameter will be excluded by default record_type Record with field name UnMapped may be used to perform a filter on the unformatted record data whether or not a structure USING struct_name has been specified In this way a filter may test all records regardless of their assigned record type INCLUDE and EXCLUDE parameters are mutually exclusive EXCLUDE record_type Exclude only records that are assigned the specified record type record_type by SDE browse This parameter may be specified repeatedly to exclude a number of record types or to perform alternative WHERE expr filters for the same record type If EXCLUDE is specified then all record types that are not referenced by an EXCLUDE parameter will be included by default record_type Record with field name UnMapped may be used to perform a filter on the unformatted record data whether or not a structure USING struct_name has been specified In this way a filter may test all records regardless of their assigned record type INCLUDE and EXCLUDE parameters are mutually exclusive WHERE expr WHERE applies further filter conditions to records assigned to the record type specified by the last INCLUDE record_type or EXCLUDE record_type parameter processed expr is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record_type field na
327. matted representation of the field data for fields falling entirely or partly within the range of record positions Although the range of positions may span a number of fields the search is still performed against individual fields within the range i e a match for the search string will not occur for data that spans a field boundary A match for the search string may occur on just part of the unformatted data representation of a numeric field e g CHANGE 476 850 21 100 This will find a match in any numeric field where unformatted representation of the data contains the string 476 and replaces it with 850 e g a zoned decimal field with value 14760 would become 18500 Any match of the search string on data in a numeric field will highlight the entire formatted display of the field If the numeric field is also the current identified occurrence of the search string the cursor is positioned at the start of the formatted numeric field display If replacing a string in a character field would exceed the defined maximum length of the field then no update will take place Parameters op A relational operator used in the compare operation which determines the relationship that the data must have with the search string in order for it to be identified as a successful match Valid values for op are as follow If a character string compare is performed the EBCDIC values assigned to characters in the search and data strings determin
328. me Identifies a COBOL or PL1 copy book PDS PDSE library and member name copybook_library member_name ADATA adata_fileid Identifies a COBOL or PL1 ADATA output file adata_fileid NUMWIDTH fwidth Specifies the displayed width of numeric columns RefNo Start End and Length in the layout list output The default and minimum width of these fields is 5 characters EXPAND NOEXPAND Specifies whether or not array OCCURS fields are to be expanded to display every repeating instance of a field within that array Default is NOEXPAND 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 138 Command Line Primary Commands LEFT LEFT Syntax oo Let ASS aS aaa ee ee SSS SS aS Ss ar ar oa gt lt i EE ho TEE EE EEN KS CSR 1 ooo Data ALL S e Half i Mass gt 2 Ge Page T mocos 2 Description In multi record view and unless parameter ALL is specified scroll to the left the display of field and header lines belonging to records that are of the default record type The display of all other visible records header lines and shadow lines remains unchanged In single record view LEFT will display the fields belonging to a visible data record that has a lower line number than the record or record segment that is in the current view For display of segmented records LEFT and RIGHT scroll through each segment in the file regard
329. me level within the copy book then these entries are treated as 01 levels and a new record type RTO mapping generated for each 3 For COBOL copy books only if either of the following are true then an 01 level entry with name SELCOPY 01 or level1_name see parameter LEVEL 1 or RECORD TYPE below is generated by SDE at the start of the copy book concatenation The first data declaration statement is not an 01 level entry but at least one 01 level entry exists within the concatenation of copy books No 01 level entry exists within the entire concatenation of copy books and the next available lowest level entry is not redefined by all entries of the same level within the copy book In this case the created structure will contain a single record type RTO mapping FROM COBOL PL1 ADATA Identifies the input as a copy book with programming language COBOL or PL 1 Alternatively identifies input as a COBOL or PL 1 ADATA file COBOL and PL 1 copy books that have been compiled using the following compiler options generate ADATA output ADATA COBOL compiler option XINFO SYN SYM PL 1 compiler option Using an already generated ADATA output reduces the inevitable overhead that occurs if SELCOPY itself has to re compile a copy book in order to create the SDO Default is COBOL LEVEL 1 levell_name RECORD TYPE level1_name Insert an appropriate COBOL or PL 1 level 01 record Record Type with the field name specified by
330. me may be immediately followed by a subscript in a left and right parenthesis This references the value of an individual entry within a field array If the field array contains multiple dimensions then a subscript must exist for each dimension of the array in order to identify a single field value e g 12 5 RoomSize 6 2 4 The nominated field is evaluated to be that field s value within the next data record assigned the identified record type The data type assigned to the evaluated value is that of the nominated field If record data is unformatted the record data belongs to a single field of field name UnMapped or for unformatted record segments UnMappedSeg and field reference number 1 To reference record data in its unformatted state whether or not a record type mapping is assigned the buit in function RECORD may be used Condition name VALUE clause A condition name VALUE clause is an unquoted character string that matches the name of a COBOL level 88 data item defined in the named or focus record type This type of expression term applies only to SELCOPY i SDO structures that have been generated from a COBOL copy book that contains condition name values See Enterprise COBOL for z OS V4 2 Language Reference description of the VALUE clause Format 2 The level 88 condition name VALUE clause associates a condition name with an associated value or range of values that may be assigned to the conditional variable that
331. ment gt Eeen aa a ges MINimise FRAme MINimize MAXimise MAXimize Description Perform window focusing positioning and sizing operations on the current SDE document window view or CBLe MDI parent frame window Parameters CASCADE Cascade all MDI child windows within the CBLe MDI parent window TILE Tile all MDI child windows within the CBLe MDI parent window horizontally HOR the default or vertically VERT NEWWINDOW Open an new SDE window view for the data in the current SDE window view 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 184 Command Line Primary Commands XREF MAXIMISE MAXIMIZE Maximise the current SDE window view DOCUMENT the default or the CBLe MDI parent FRAME window MINIMISE MINIMIZE Minimise the current SDE window view DOCUMENT the default or the CBLe MDI parent FRAME window RESTORE Restore the current SDE window view DOCUMENT the default or the CBLe MDI parent FRAME window back to its original state prior to being maximised or minimised Syntax gt gt XREF gt lt t Xref A A Foreground sdo_file iS Batch max_rc Description Supplied as an edit macro the XREF utility may be used to generate a SELCOPY i structure SDO from an XREF file
332. meric character or be at the start of a line or field For non numeric search strings only SUFFIX indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found at the end of a word within the data being searched i e the matched text must be preceded by an alphanumeric character and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 154 Command Line Primary Commands ONLY WORD NX posl pos2 ALL For non numeric search strings only WORD indicates that a successful match only occurs if the search string is found to be a complete word within the data being searched i e the matched text must either be preceded by a non alphanumeric character or be at the start of a line or field and either precede a non alphanumeric character or be at the end of a line or field Search EXCLUDED data records only ONLY does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED Search only visible data records i e not EXCLUDED ONLY does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED The first position of a range of positions within the data record to be searched For formatted records this is a position in the expanded record Only those fields or parts of fields that fall within the position range will be searched Fields will be searched in the order that they occur within the display area pos may be a positive or negative int
333. mes and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of the WHERE expression must be numeric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition The WHERE expression is applied to each record assigned the record type record_type and if the result is true the record is selected for include or exclude as indicated by the prevailing INCLUDE or EXCLUDE filter If multiple INCLUDE EXCLUDE record_type WHERE expressions exist for the same record type then a logical OR is implied for all the expressions relating to that record type STOPAFTER n_hits 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 79 Command Line Primary Commands BROWSE When the number of records selected by the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE filter reaches the value specified by STOPAFTER n_hits then no further filter testing occurs If an INCLUDE filter then all remaining untested records are excluded If an EXCLUDE filter then all remaining untested records are included DB2 lt ssn gt Indicates that browse is for a DB2 base or results table ssn is optional and identifies the local DB2 sub system name to which a connection will be made Before a connection can be made to the DB2 sub system the SELCOPY i DB2 plan must have been bound to that sub system Default for ssn is the users default DB2 sub system name as set by the DB2 Primary O
334. mns Displayed DISPLAY STRUCTURE Syntax gt gt Display STRUCTUre 4 2 ao apo SSS Sere gt lt e EE SSeS struct name Description SE a SELCOPY i List window to display the field definitions for each record jupe in the specified structure definition object DO The List window displaying supports the standard list window features as follow e Field Descriptor Block FDB e Edit View e Selecting Sorting and Filtering e Sorting with the Cursor Parameters struct_name The name of the SDO structure Default is the name of the SDO structure used in the current SDE window Examples display structure NBJ2 CBLI SDO COBSALESC Open a list window for the structure definition PDSE member NBJ2 CBLI SDO COBSALES 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 107 Command Line Primary Commands DISPLAY STRUCTURE SELCOPY i Structure nbj2 cbli sdofcobs m lew Refresh Back Forward FDB Text Help Command gt Scio Lily MaxLen MinLen 58 Name REC CARD CUST 1D SEQ CARD TYPE CR OR DR COMPANY CARD NUMBER NAME VALID FROM EXPIRES SEC REC CUST CUST ID PASS LASTNAME FIRSTNAME COUNTRY POSTCODE r 0 m H RecType RefNo REC CARD REC CARD REC CARD REC CARD REC CARD REC CARD CARD ARD RD RD RD St PR MN NNUUUS ONES VE ONE N e PPP y e PPP y E R x x R A A C H C C c R x A ARACTER A n a AA IA A A CoOc0o0co0o
335. mpiler Options 0 4 2 panel Examples xref OEM FAID XREF XZ01556 OEM SELC320 SDO XZ01556 batch Generate and display JCL to create a SELCOPY i structure SDO member from an XREF member allowing possible return code 8 set by the COBOL compiler See Also XREFLIB CREATE STRUCTURE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 185 Command Line Primary Commands XREFLIB Syntax gt gt XREFLIB xref_library RE gt lt as p Esm vV member_mask Description Supplied as an edit macro XREFLIB executes XREF once for each selected member of an XREF PDS or PDSE library in order to create a batch job to convert multiple XREF library members to their corresponding SELCOPY i structures SDO On execution of this utility a temporary data set is displayed in a text edit window containing JCL to execute the SDEAMAIN SELCOPY i data edit batch program The job will include one job step for each selected XREF member which executes the SELCOPY i CREATE STRUCTURE command Parameters xref_library Identifies a single PDS or PDSE library DSN containing XREF members member_mask A member name mask which identifies one or more members within the selected library The mask supports the following wild cards A single asterisk represents an entire member name or zero or more characters within a member name mask A single percent sign represent
336. n applied to the edited records then the record type RTO associated with the updated record is re evaluated and the contents of the SDE edit view updated accordingly 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 163 Command Line Primary Commands RECLEN Parameters ON OFF Set display of the record Length column on or off RECLENGTH ON and RECLENGTH OFF is equivalent to SET RECINFO ON LENGTH and SET RECINFO OFF LENGTH respectively Default is to toggle between RECLENGTH ON and RECLENGTH OFF See Also LENGTH SET QUERY EXTRACT RECINFO SET QUERY EXTRACT PAD SET QUERY EXTRACT REDO Syntax gt gt REDO gt lt Description REDO re applies one level of change made to the current file that was previous undone by the last execution of the UNDO command Where UNDO has not previously been executed REDO has no affect Each change level corresponds to an update of a data field within a record REDO is assigned to PF23 by default and may be executed repeatedly to re apply multiple levels of changes Following one or more executions of UNDO REDO will recover the changes even after the following have occured e The cursor position changes e The file is saved e Changes are made to other files in the file edit ring However REDO is not able to recover changes following an UNDO if further changes are made to record data e g fields updated
337. name of the in storage list data to be displayed select_clause Identifies a valid SELECT Clause to display only those selected columns where_clause Identifies a valid WHERE Clause to filter rows of data sort_clause Identifies a valid SORT Clause to sort the specified columns of data Examples gt sd display list AMLIST select KEY COMPNAME FIRSTNAME LASTNAME DEPT where lastname JONES sort DEPT a Open a list window for the in storage list AMLIST with select sort and filter clauses applied See Also CREATE LIST DISPLAY RECTYPES Syntax gt gt Display RECTypes p A A A gt lt fe ER SaaS EEN struct name Description Open a SELCOPY i List window to display each record_type in the specified structure definition object SDO Parameters struct_name The name of the SDO structure Default is the name of the SDO structure used in the current SDE window Examples display rectypes NBJ2 CBLI SDO COBSALES Open a record type list window for the structure definition file NBJ2 CBLI SDO COBSALES SELCOPY i Structure nmbj2 cbli sdo cobsal m lew Refresh Back Forward FDB Text Help Soro UES SeqNo DataElemen MinLen MaxLen Offset MinOf 2 3 0 Le 1 1 2 s sl 4 4 a 6 RecType Figure 41 Display Record Type List View 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 106 Command Line Primary Commands DISPLAY RECTYPES Colu
338. nd Line Primary Commands FIND strin VALID INVALID ALL FIRST LAST NEXT The FIND search string The search string may be any of the following 0 An unquoted numeric value The search string is treated as a numeric value when a numeric field is searched in a formatted record view In all other cases a numeric search string is treated as a character string 0 An unquoted character string containing no commas or blanks The search for the character string will be case insensitive so that uppercase and lowercase characters are treated as being the same 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks The search string may contain embedded commas and blanks and the character string will be case insensitive Two adjacent quotation mark characters that are embedded in a search string which is enclosed by the same quotation mark characters will be treated as a single occurrence of the character e g FIND Jim O Brien Find the character string Jim O Brien 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix C This is equivalent to specifying a quoted search string but that the string search will be case sensitive e g C Book 0 A hexadecimal string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix X 0 A picture string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix P Picture strings use special characters to repre
339. nd scale requirements for the field then string2 replaces string2 in the field All occurrences of string are highlighted in the text Enter the RESET FIND command to turn off the highlighting Use of CHANGE with no parameters is equivalent to RCHANGE assigned to function key PF6 by default and repeats the last change command executed including all its specified parameters To find and optionally change the next occurrence of string1 execute a combination of RFIND assigned to PF5 by default followed by RCHANGE If string1 and string2 are character strings of unequal length then the following will occur e If the length of string1 is greater than the length of string2 then words to the right of the replaced string will be shifted left If parameter TEXT is specified and more than one blank exists before a word to the right of the replaced string then additional blanks are inserted to maintain that word s position in the record 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 82 Command Line Primary Commands CHANGE e If the length of string1 is less than the length of string2 then words to the right of the replaced string will be shifted right Note however that CHANGE will not increase the length of formatted data beyond its defined maximum field length If parameter TEXT is specified multiple consecutive blanks are absorbed to leave at least one blank between each word Only if no blanks are eligible to be absorbed w
340. necessary 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 70 SDE Menus and Popup Windows Panel Input Fields A selectable list of data set names or HFS files will be displayed as appropriate if either wild card character percent or asterisk both representing zero or more characters is specified If a volume id exists in the Volume field then a list of selectable data sets will be restricted to those contained in that volume s VTOC Member gt If DSN Path field is the DSN of a PDS PDSE library specifies the source file member name A selectable list of members will be presented if wildcard character or occurs anywhere within the specified member name or the member name is left blank Volume gt Specifies a volume serial id mask for an uncataloged source file Not applicable to HFS files Line Numbers Fields that optionally specify the start and end lines of a group of lines to be copied from the source file First Line gt Line number of the first line of a subset group of lines to be copied from the the source file End Line gt Line number of the last line of a subset group of lines to be copied from the the source file If O zero the default is the last line of the source file Target Line gt A label name which includes the preceding dot period identifying the target line within the focus SDE edit view where lines are to be copied If not specified then the target line is the first lin
341. ned to the current segment Default is Examples NEXT For segmented record browse edit scroll to the secondary segment within the same record that immediately follows the current segment Fot non segmented browse edit scroll to the next record NB Scroll to the next primary segment record NB2J Scroll forwards to the 2nd occurrence of a primary segment record which is assigned the same record type as the current segment NU Scroll forwards to the next unformatted primary or secondary segment See Also PREVIOUS LEFT RIGHT NOMSG Description SDE CLI command NOMSG performs the same operation as the CBLe CLI command NOMSG See NOMSG in CBLe Text Edit documentation 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 151 Command Line Primary Commands NOMSG NOND Syntax gt gt NOND gt lt Description Supplied as a text edit macro NOND uses the SET COLOUR NONDISPLAY option to toggle the display of underscores on printable text in lines of data which include unprintable characters Parameters NOND has no parameters ONLY Syntax EQ A CHARs gt gt Only A A string EE Se gt HE gt Ses A del a VALID i IN SUFfix el e NX e a INVALID S i WORD es n x SCH Ho ALL ZFIRST ZLAST o EE a cke pogi 4 gt EE a named
342. ng string C string or X string formats respectively e g ONLY eq ONLY C 67 ONLY X F6F7 Finds only character fields containing the string 67 2 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are specified the search string is interpreted as being a character string and so a string compare is performed against the unformatted representation of the field data for fields falling entirely or partly within the range of record positions Although the range of positions may span a number of fields the search is still performed against individual fields within the range i e a match for the search string will not occur for data that spans a field boundary A match for the search string may occur on just part of the unformatted data representation of a numeric field e g ONLY 476 21 100 This will find a match in any numeric field where unformatted representation of the data contains the string 476 e g a zoned decimal field with value 14760 or 4762 Any match of the search string on data in a numeric field will highlight the entire formatted display of the field If the numeric field is also the current identified occurrence of the search string the cursor is positioned at the start of the formatted numeric field display Parameters op A relational operator used in the compare operation which determines the relationship that the data must have with the ONLY search string in order for it to be identified as a successful match Valid
343. ng the 2nd RTO field map starting at offset 2 into the record Where a positive offset is applied so that fields defined within the RTO correspond to positions beyond the length of the record data then a length error occurs and ERRV gt is displayed in the record s prefix area SET USEOFFSET takes effect at the Global level SET QUERY amp EXTRACT Values record_type Set Query or Extract the offset value for the specified record type RTO Defaults to the Default Record Type ALL Set Query or Extract the offset value for all record types RTO defined within the structure SDO struct_name plus minus Set a positive plus or negative minus offset value Defaults to a positive offset n_bytes Set an integer number of bytes at which record mapping is to be offset IN struct_name Set Query or Extract the name of the structure SDO to which the specified RTO belongs Defaults to the SDO being used in the current SDE window QUERY Response Displays the current USEOFFSET value for the specified record type on a single message line If parameter ALL or is specified the USEOFFSET value for each record type within the SDO is displayed on a separate message line EXTRACT Rexx variables luseoffset 0 Number of record types RTO if parameters ALL or is specified otherwise 1 luseoffset i The record type followed by its current USEOFFSET value 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE
344. ng will contain characters from end to SEET and X 00 to start Note that the data type of start and end must be character length 1 otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples XRANGE c A c J XRANGE X C1 X C6 ABCDEFGHIJ XRANGE X FC X 03 X C1C2C3C4C5C6 X FCFDFEFF010203 X 000102030405060708 X FCFDFEFF XRANGE X 08 XRANGE X FC 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 62 SDE Concepts XRANGE REXX Macros As in the CBLe text edit environment user macros may be written to perform functions within SDE sessions using the REXX procedure language The name associated with the Structured Data Environment is CBLSDATA and should be specified on the REXX instruction ADDRESS if commands are to be directed to the SDE environment However if a macro is executed from within an SDE window CBLSDATA is automatically set as the default environment The current environment may be identified using the REXX built in function ADDRESS Macro Path An SDE REXX macro is executed by executing the MACRO command followed by the full fileid of the macro Alternatively if the macro exists in a library within the macro path simply specify the macro name Libraries in the macro path are searched in order until a file name that matches the macro name is found The macro path used by SDE is the same as that defined for the CBLe text edit environment i e The macro path is a list of directories assigned t
345. nment SDE 72 Command Line Primary Commands How to read the Syntax Diagrams default_choice gt gt required_item Ho gt lt optional_choicel optional_choice2 9 An arrow returning to the left above the main line indicates an item that can be repeated gt gt required_item repeatable_item gt lt 10 If the repeat arrow contains a comma you must separate repeated items with a comma gt gt required_item repeatable_item gt lt 11 A repeat arrow above a stack indicates that you can repeat the items in the stack gt required item e gt gt lt optional_choicel optional_choice2 12 Uppercase characters in keywords indicate the minimum abbreviation allowed for that particular command or parameter and must be spelled exactly as shown 13 Variables appear in all italic lowercase letters and represent user supplied names or values 14 If punctuation marks parentheses arithmetic operators or other such symbols are shown you must enter them as part of the syntax 15 Where a parameter immediately following a command verb begins with a non alpha character no separating blank is required between the command verb and the parameter e g Add8 CHANGE abc xyz Syntax gt gt ARRC HO gt field col eege gt lt f BO
346. not flagged as being EXCLUDED If neither EX nor NX is specified shift will apply to both excluded and non excluded lines namel A label name identifying the first line of a range of lines eligible for inclusion in the SHIFT operation The preceding dot period is mandatory Default is ZCSR the focus line name2 A label name identifying the last line of a range of lines eligible for inclusion in the SHIFT operation The preceding dot period is mandatory If name2 occurs before name7 in the display then the order is reversed Default is ZLAST See Also BOUNDS CHANGE PAD SHOW Syntax 22 gt Show 2 222 ese SS een Eech aaa See a eS See gt lt Number t Format gt O TSOE Picture t Type gt Description The SHOW command controls display of various types of information for SDE EDIT and BROWSE window views in either mapped table view VFMT or mapped single record view MAP The format and content is controlled by the SHOW option specified See also the SET options TYPE and OFFSET various combinations of which are controlled using the SHOW command Parameters LEVEL Equivalent to LEVEL ON REFERENCE OFF NUMBER Equivalent to LEVEL OFF REFERENCE ON FORMAT Equivalent to TYPE FORMAT OFFSET Equivalent to TYPE OFFSET 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 174 Command Line Primary Commands SHOW PICTURE Equivalent
347. ns Options Utilities Window SwaplList Help wS wR Command gt Soro Ly Record type AM Fixed S700 Offset 0 Data elements 95 UnMapped 1 AN 1 5700 lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 00000001 20040322 SUPP ALEQUIP SUPP FFFFFFFF440 00 0444444EEDD6CFCDECD4EEDD444444444444444444444444444444444 2004032200111C000000247711 8247 7000000000000000000000000000000000 00000002 20040323 FFFFFFFF4 DD444444444444444444444444444444444 200403230 770O00000000000000000000000000000000 00000003 20041224 Bana EDD444444444444444444444444444444444 477000000000000000000000000000000000 4444444444444 4444 aa00gg0000000 Fmt V Fil Figure 28 SDE Hexadecimal Format Hexadecimal Dump Format Record data is displayed without any record type formatting in a single record window hex dump view of the default record On the left of the display is a field containing the position of the data within the record in hex or decimal representation Following this field the record data is represented by a number of blank delimited fullwords groups of 4 bytes in long hex format followed by the equivalent number of bytes in character format Long hex format is where the hexadecimal representation of a character occupies two characters of the display e g C A is represented as C C1 in long hex format SELCOPY i CRL AMSUPP DA EBCDIC using CBL CBLI O m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapLlist Help wS wR Command gt
348. ns that the load warning threshold will be set across SELCOPY i sessions SET LOADWARNING value take effect at the Global level for all SDE EDIT and BROWSE commands and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value n_recs The number of records to be loaded after which the Load Warning message occurs QUERY Response The number of records to be loaded which is the current settings of the LOADWARNING option EXTRACT Rexx variables 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 210 SET QUERY EXTRACT LOADWARNING SET QUERY EXTRACT Option lloadwarning 1 The current loadwarning threshold value in number of records LRECL SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option LRECL has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET LRECL in CBLe Text Edit documentation MACROPATH SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option MACROPATH has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET MACROPATH in CBLe Text Edit documentation MAPPING SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax a A MAPPING ore N saa ee a ee en Ee gt lt e SET H i OFF gt gt Query MAPPing 7 3733 5 O O O gt lt gt gt EXTract MAPPing gt lt Description This option controls whether formatted data is displayed in its mapped or unmapped fo
349. nt and their return values Sub expression A sub expression is any expression which is bracketed by a left and right parenthesis Keyword Value Applicable to DB2 table display only the Keyword NULL may be used as the term of an expression to represent the null value NULL is used to test a table column which has been defined with a null indicator Expression Operators An operator may act on the pair of terms between which it is positioned or in the case of unary plus minus and logical NOT which are prefix operators act on the single term immediately to the right of the operator Operators may be divided into the following 3 categories Arithmetic Relational and Logical Arithmetic Operators Multiple numerical values numerical field values and function calls that yield a numerical value may be combined using arithmetic operators so resulting in another numerical value when evaluated The data type of an evaluated term acted upon by the arithmetic operator must be numerical otherwise error Z7SDO68E is returned In order to perform the arithmetic operation the numerical data type one of the terms involved may be temporarily converted to match the data type of the other term so as to preserve numerical precision and scale This numerical data type is then assigned to the resultant value Supported arithmetic operators are Operator Description Rf ra Unary plus Equivalent to 0 number Unary minus Equivalent to 0 num
350. nt length are executed from and stored for later use in the user s HOME CMX command centre file a window s command line may be extended to allow input of long command strings The Command Line dialog window includes the Lines gt field which defines the number of continuous command lines between 1 and 9 to be presented in the current window Having updated this value and selected OK the change will take immediate effect The Command Line dialog window is opened by selecting the Command Line option of the system menu select the system menu button to the left of the window s title bar Alternatively execute the COMMANDLINE SELCOPY i CLI command synonym CLN Any text entered on second and subsequent command lines is appended to text on the command line before Opening an SDE Edit Browse View Basic tasks which relate to starting an SDE edit or browse view for processing structured data are discussed below e Display Records without a Structure e Display Records using a single COBOL or PL 1 Copy Book e Display Records or Record Segments using multiple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books e Display a Subset of Records or Record Segments Display Records without a Structure The simplest application of the structured data editor SDE is to display record data for edit or browse without applying a structure to format the record data into individual fields Instead records are displayed as a single character field of record type and field name
351. nt use as a line target The assigned label name is displayed in the line s prefix area If MULTIPOINT is set on then a line may be assigned more than one label name 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 218 SET QUERY EXTRACT POINT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option The same label name may not be assigned to more than one line in the current file Where a label name is already assigned to a line in the currunt file it is unassigned from that line and reassigned to the focus line A label name remains assigned to a line even if the line record number changes due to record inserts SET POINT takes effect at the File level SET Value name Label name of a new label to be assigned to the focus line or an existing label to be unassigned The preceding dot is mandatory OFF Unassign the specified label name from any of the lines in the file display QUERY Response Point Displays the focus line number and all label names currently allocated to the focus line If no names are allocated to the focus line line number n the following message is returned ZZSDO10I POINT No points assigned to line n Point Displays the line number and associated label names of all named lines in the current file EXTRACT Rexx variables Point bointe o Dt focus line is not a named line otherwise 1 pointa Une number and label name s assigned to the focus line Point Number of named lines bpoine i Une number and as
352. o Lrecl a C Z Browse Edit Allow Ins Del Upd In Place Read Only rA Options Enter to activate each of the options below Record Key RBA FROM 2 E FOR records Note Must have storage for this many records FILTER Expression or dataset Specify optional structure LU pybook overlay I Copybo USING SDO Structure NBJ SELCOPYI SDOLIB XXRDSDAT or USING COBOL Copybook Default Record T 1f no LEVY 01 entry Figure 8 SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel USING SDO Display a Subset of Records or Record Segments A specific subset of records may be selected for Browse or Edit from within a file using the FROM FOR and or FILTER field entries in the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel Note however that subsetting on records for either Edit or Browse will force In storage record management i e all selected records are loaded into storage Furthermore for Edit only the Update In Place Edit technique will be used regardless of the edit technique selected by the user 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 13 Getting Started with SDE Subset using FROM and or FOR Subset using FROM and or FOR The FROM and FOR values identifies the first record and maximum number of records to be selected for display respectively If no FROM value is specified the default first record will be the first record in the file If no FOR value is specified then there is no imposed limit to
353. o a record type object RTO on execution of the CREATE STRUCTURE command This name is the highest level field name identifier for a record mapping in a COBOL or PL1 copybook or in a SELCOPY i SDE data definition clause RTO Record Type Object A single record type definition within an SDO RTO definitions are generated via the CREATE STRUCTURE command which uses record structures defined with SELCOPY i s own SDE structure definition syntax or defined from within an existing COBOL or PL 1 copybook An RTO and hence the SDO may subsequently be altered e g via the USE command and saved to an SDF SD Structured Data Structured Data refers to data within file records that have a pre defined structure See structured records SD is also the minimum abbreviation for SDATA the CBLe CLI command used to prefix any of SELCOPY i s SDE CLI commands when executed from within a CBLe edit view SDF Structure Definition File A disk file sequential data set or PDS PDSE member containing a saved Structure Definition Object SDO If not already in storage an SDF gets loaded creating an SDO during execution of an EDIT or BROWSE command in order to apply a structure to records processed by SELCOPY i s SDE If an SDO is altered during an SDE edit session and is not flagged as being temporary then the user will be prompted to save the SDO to an SDF An SDO may also be saved to an SDF automatically during a CREATE STRUCTURE command SDE Structure
354. o the Edit MacroPath variable set via the System or User INI file or via the CBLe SET MACROPATH command For MVS systems the macro path usually consists of three PDS PDSE libraries as follow 1 A user specific macro library 2 A site wide macro library common to all users 3 An installation macro library common to all users and containing useful macros written and owned by CBL and distributed to all SELCOPY Product Suite customers Users should not update or modify macros in this library as they may be subject to change at the discretion of CBL A detailed description on the use of each of an individual macro is documented within the macro executable file itself See CBLe REXX Macros for a list of CBL supplied macros SDE Profile SDEPROF Macro SEH Se window view is opened the macro path libraries are searched for the first occurrence of the SDE profile macro DEPROF The SDEPROF macro may be used to define the user s SDE environment Any System or User INI file options that correspond to SDE SET command options may be overridden for an SDE session by including the SET command in the SDEPROF macro A default SDEPROF macro is distributed as part of the SELCOPY Product Suite package and exists within the installation macro library 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 63 SDE Menus and Popup Windows To assist the user with general SDE editing some helpful menus and dialog panels exist in addition to the startu
355. occupy a fixed n_bytes where n_bytes defaults to 1 The actual length of the string is defined by a 2 byte binary integer at the start of the field so that the overall length of the field is 2 n_bytes CHARVARYING is equivalent to a PL 1 field which is declared as being CHARACTER VARYING CHARZ Defines a field to be interpreted as a variable length character string occupying a fixed n_bytes bytes where n_bytes defaults to 1 No length field exists instead the character string is terminated by a null character x 00 which increases the overall length of the field by 1 i e n_bytes 1 CHARZ is equivalent to a PL 1 field which is declared as being CHARACTER VARYINGZ DECimal Defines a field to be interpreted as a packed decimal number allowing precision number of digits in total of which scale number of digits will be displayed following the decimal point Default for precision is 7 Default for scale is 0 DATE Defines a date field with the source data interpreted in one of the following formats Packed decimal format of length 4 bytes X ccyy dddF Decimal values for year of century yy and DECIMAL Julian day of year ddd F is a 4 bit sign and cc is the century indicator X 00 1900 or X 01 2000 e g 14th February 2011 is X 0111 045F Binary format of length 6 bytes X yyyy 00mm 00dd Binary values for year including century yyyy month of year mm and day of month dd e g 20th October 2011 is X 07DB 000A 0014 VTOC forma
356. occupying the focus line in single format Table Multi record table format Default with data types formatted according to the record structure Each field occupies a separate column Vertical scrolling transfers focus between records Horizontal scrolling transfers focus between fields GO Syntax gt gt GO oS A Sasa asa SSS Hee SSS SS SS SaaS gt lt Edit 4 4 SE han SU Sea View Description GO closes the current view of the file data and redisplays it in either a text edit or data edit view using the specified edit browse type When an SDE data edit view is opened to display the text the records are unformatted If the current view contains unsaved alterations to the text the GO operation will stop and an error message displayed Parameters BROWSE Browse the text in a SDE data edit window view EDIT Display the text in a CBLe text edit window view for edit 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 131 Command Line Primary Commands GO SE Display the text in a SDE data edit window view with full edit capabilities SU Display the text in a SDE data edit window view with update in place edit capabilities VIEW Display the text in a CBLe text edit window view for read only edit view GRPC Syntax gt gt GRPC q oo oo Y SOS OS O OOOO gt field_col gt O 5 gt lt t BOR hese a
357. olour is TURQUOISE RECF LAGS Record Flags with RECINFO ON FLAGS ALL Default colour is yellow RECID Record TTR OFFSET or RBA field with RECINFO ON ID ALL Default colour is yellow RECLENGTH Record Length with RECINFO ON LENGTH ALL Default colour is yellow RECORDTYPE Record type line Default colour is PINK SCALE Scale line with SCALE ON Default colour is WHITE SEGMENT Record Segment name header line Default colour is YELLOW SHADOW Shadow lines for excluded lines when SHADOW ON Default colour is WHITE THIGHLIGHT Highlighted targets Default colour is GREEN REVERSE TOFEOF Top of File and End of File lines Default colour is YELLOW BLUE RED PINK GREEN TURQUOISE YELLOW WHITE DEFAULT Supported colours on each field If DEFAULT is specified the default colour for the field is set BLINK REVERSE USCORE NONE Se highlighting of the specified field The colour may blink be displayed in reverse video or be underlined Default is NONE QUERY Response For each coloured area within the SDE window display the display area name current colour setting and extended highlighting option is displayed on an individual message line EXTRACT Rexx variables eee Ma Number of areas within the display for which a colour option may be assigned colour color i colour i One stem for each area within the display The value of each compound variable is an upper case string containing the dis
358. olumn is type character AN and the last position of the display falls on a character that is at an offset into the column data then the character data at that offset will occupy the first position within the first column of the scrolled display HALF Scroll a number of columns so that the column situated half way along the width of the current display of floating columns becomes the first floating column of the scrolled display If this column is type character AN and the half display position falls on a character that is at an offset into the column data then the character data at that offset will occupy the first position within the first floating column of the scrolled display MAX Scroll right to display the last column of data in a multi record view Where the display area is able to contain all data columns in the data record the first floating column becomes the first floating column of the scrolled display Otherwise the last column of data becomes the last column of the scrolled display In single record view the last visible data record is displayed PAGE Scroll right so that the column of data to the right of the last floating column of the current display area becomes the first floating column of the scrolled display If this column is type character AN and the last position of the display plus one falls on a character that is at an offset into the column data then the character data at that offset will occupy the first posi
359. on are not included within the browse session If FILTER is specified then record filtering occurs only on records selected using the FROM and FOR parameters Required record location is identified via one of the following KEY string For KSDS data sets only locate the record with a key string equal to string If not found the record with the next key string greater than string is used RBA n For KSDS and ESDS data sets only locate the record starting at the relative byte address specified by n 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 78 Command Line Primary Commands BROWSE The RBA must point at the start of the record otherwise a VSAM point error will occur RBA address for each record is displayed as part of the record information columns within an SDE window view Display of these columns is controlled using the SDE SET RECINFO CLI command lt RECORD gt n For any data set organisation locate the record number specified by n Specification of parameter keyword RECORD is optional Default is to display records within the SDE window view starting at the first record in the data set FOR n_recs lt RECORDS gt Specifies the number of data set records to be included within the SDE window browse session Specification of parameter keyword RECORDS is optional If FILTER is specified then record filtering occurs only on records selected using the FROM and FOR parameters Default is to include all records
360. oood Lelelelel ele ee Oe Oder u RANNE TN b BND ye ON bo COD a I I T H H E H E E E T I H H H H H bal T e aN e e oadou mN botz WRI AI AJ AI AI AI E AA I A AA AI Ga GA a I g e mOUDDDDDAAAAIAIA lL Name Figure 42 Display Structure List View Columns Displayed RecType ecord type RefNo in O O eference number evel vel Name ame DataType Data type MaxLen Maximum length MinLen Minimum length SOffset Offset in structure POffset Offset in parent BitOff Int Bit offset FType Field content type Precision recision Scale ale Picture ALPair icture gt 9 E gt w Total dimensions 2 Dims Dim In Dimension at current level MaxaArra Maximum number of array elements MaxIV Maximum integer value of reference MinIV Minimum integer value of reference Flags Flags VarLen Variable inherent length VarDim Occurs in array of variable dimension VarSOff Offset in structure is variable VarPOff Offset in parent is variable HasVarOff Group has elements with variable offsets VarRef Referred to in size or dimension UFlags Usage flags Aligned Aligned Signed Signed Filler Unnamed DFlags Display flags 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE x D x lt 08 Command Line Primary Commands LZeros ASCII u 3 CPMax CPAct CPType01 CPIntV01 CPChar01 CPType02 CPIntV02 CPChar02 CPType03 CPIntV03 CPChar03 CPType04 CPIntV
361. or deletion regardless of the number of excluded lines it represents or whether excluded shadow lines are set on or off See SET SHADOW DELETE is not sensitive to record type and so may delete records of different record types as part of the same execution Records groups that are NOTSELECTED or are SUPPRESSED are not eligible for deletion Similarly if EXCLUDED shadow lines are set off EXCLUDED record groups are also not eligible for deletion unless parameter EX or X is specified Also see the D n and DD delete prefix area commands Parameters n_lines Selects a number of lines from the top of the range upon which the DELETE operation will apply The n_lines value includes visible records and EXCLUDED SUPPRESSED and NOTSELECTED shadow lines Each shadow line corresponds to a single line in the n_lines line count regardless of the number or records within the record group which it represents In general if shadow lines set off then they are not included in the n_ nes line count The exception to this is when EX or X is specified in which case EXCLUDED shadow lines are always included within the n_lines line count regardless of whether excluded shadow lines are set on or off Only lines that are eligible for deletion and are included within the lines selected by n_lines will be deleted e g SUPPRESSED shadow lines may be included within the selected lines but are not eligible for deletion and are therefore 2013 11 13 1
362. or this record type If no fields are included then the generated filter will simply include or exclude records assigned this record type as indicated by the type of filter Include or Exclude 2 Except for the first row entry in the table which has no no preceeding sub expression insert the appropriate logical operator in the AND OR column The required logical operator may be selected from a list of supported operators by entering a blank or invalid entry in this column Note that support of parentheses to override the standard precedence for evaluating expressions containing both AND and OR operators is not yet supported by the Create Filter panels If parentheses are required they must be inserted manually in the generated filter expression Otherwise duplicate the record type entry in the table of record types and enter an alternate OR filter expression for that record type 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 16 Getting Started with SDE Subset using FILTER 3 In the ROp column enter a relational operator suited to the datatype of the field The required relational operator may be selected from a list of supported operators by entering a blank or invalid entry in this column 4 In the Value column enter a character literal string Numerical value or Field value as appropriate to the datatype of the field e g for a Binary numeric field FB Value must be numeric or reference a numeric field If requi
363. ord with a key which is equal to or greater than this value will become the current record Locate record by RBA is displayed for ESDS data sets and opens the SDEUTRB sub window which has a single input field prompting the user for the relative byte address identifying the new current record The first record with an RBA which is equal to or greater than this value will become the current record Locate record by RECORD Number is displayed for RRDS and VRDS data sets and opens the SDEUTRR sub window which has a single input field prompting the user for the record number identifying the new current record See the SDE command LOCATE for details on locating records by Key RBA and Record number DB2 Browse Edit Utilities Menu The DB2 Browse Edit Utilities Menu may be opened from any SDE DB2 table edit or browse view by executing the SDEUTILD macro which is assigned to lt F16 gt by default SDEUTILD S OPY 1 DB2 Brou Edit Utilities menu gt L option b y ent nga number or bu PF key Field Selection Select YExclude Order visible field names Record Information Configure display of row length SQL Code and flags Exit utilities menu without action Shadow line options Configure display of SHADOWed records Window options x Open single record Z00M view in new window Figure 38 DB2 Browse Edit Utilities Menu This menu provides a user friendly method of executing commonly used SDE commands that alter the display of DB2 table data
364. other fields are populated with default values insert 2 Val 18 3 Michael O Leary 12 333 Insert 2 records of the default record type populating the first 3 selected fields in the display with the explicit values specified in the list of field values All other fields are populated with default values 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 137 Command Line Primary Commands LAYOUT Syntax te A A SS SS eS aaa die ert aa gt dodo sfile_fileid SDO COBol copybook_library member_name PLL Sot ADATA adata Tiled NOEXPand t NUMWidth 5 gt 4 4 4 gt lt EXpand NUMWidth fwidth Description Display the record structure layout list window detailing all record types in the specified structure file SDE structure SDO COBOL PL1 copy book or COBOL PL1 ADATA file If executed from an SDE browse edit view without specifying the name of a structure file the layout window is displayed for all record types in the structure used to may records in the current display If executed from any other window with no parameters the Display Record Layout panel 9 3 is opened Parameters SDO sfile_fileid Identifies an existing SELCOPY i SDE structure SDO file sfile_fileid COBOL PL1 copybook_library member_na
365. ounds column number is greater than the record length a pad character is inserted at the left bounds column for each shifted column and the record length is increased to a maximum defined by the right bounds column Record data shifted beyond this column will be truncated Parameters LEFT RIGHT Specifies the direction in which record data is to be shifted n_bytes Specifies the number of columns by which the record data will be shifted BOUNDS BNDS left_col right_col 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 173 Command Line Primary Commands SHIFT BOUNDS may be specified to temporarily override the prevailing bounds column settings See SDE BOUNDS option for details on setting left and right bounds columns n_lines ALL Specifies n_lines the number of lines or ALL indicating all subsequent lines starting at the focus line for which the shift operation will apply Unless EX or X is specified groups of excluded lines are treated as 1 line in the n_lines count of lines affected by SHIFT This is true whether or not display of shadow lines which represent groups of excluded lines is on or off See SDE SHADOW option or primary command HIDE Default is 1 line i e the focus line EX X The shift operation will apply only to lines flagged as being EXCLUDED If neither EX nor NX is specified shift will apply to both excluded and non excluded lines NX The shift operation will apply only to lines that are
366. owing are considered equal TERM XX term xx Term xx tErm Xx Delimited strings may contain quotation marks or apostrophes that are to be interpreted as string data but are the same as the delimiting characters To acieve this each string data character that matches the delimiting characters must be escaped using the escape character The escape character is the same as the string delimiter e g He said It s my brother s car Character string A string of character text in quotation marks or apostrophes and prefixed with C or c The case of alphabetic characters in a delimited string are respected e g C TERMXxX is not equal to C Termxx 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 48 SDE Concepts Expression Terms Escaped quotation mark or apostrophe characters that match the delimiting character are supported as for delimited strings Hexadecimal string A string of even length consisting of valid hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F a f in quotation marks or apostrophes and prefixed with X or x e g X E3859994F1 is equal to EBCDIC C Term1 Numerical value A numeric value is an unquoted signed integer or rational number The decimal point in a rational number is represented by a period and non significant zeroes are also permitted The sign of a numerical value is represented by one of the prefix operators unary plus or unary minus e g 12 19 0027 00 67 353 0 30
367. owing headers is displayed to the right of the Field header depending on the current value of the OFFSET option 0 Offset Displayed when OFFSET RELATIVE is in effect for each field entry that follows this column displays the decimal offset of the field within the record type definition If the data displayed for a character data field wraps onto the next line the offset within the record of the first character to be wrapped onto the new line is displayed in this column in a different colour 0 HexOff Displayed when OFFSET HEX is in effect this column is identical to Offset except that the offsets are displayed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 34 SDE Concepts Single Record View in hexadecimal 0 Position Displayed when OFFSET COLUMNS is in effect this column is similar to Offset except that the field position i e field offset 1 within the record type definition is displayed instead Scale Header To the right of all other column headers the scale header is simply a counting guide for the field data displayed beneath The scale line and so the width of field data displayed always contains a multiple of 10 character columns which increases or decreases accordingly as the width of the non maximised edit view window is stretched or compressed Character data fields that have a width greater than that of the scale will wrap onto the next line beneath the scale header In this case the start and end positions of cha
368. p CBLe SDE Edit Dialog Window Library Directory Member Selection The SD Edit Browse Library Directory Member Selection list window is opened when a PDS E library DSN with no member name or HFS directory path with no HFS file name is specified on the SDE EDIT or BROWSE command Select the required entry position the cursor and hit lt Enter gt for Edit Browse as specified on the invoking command or enter select one of the prefix commands The window remains open after a selection has been made in order to allow selection of further entries SD Browse 4u cbl nb using CBL CBLI SDO CDIRAMEMP View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt A EE Select with prefix command or cursor ENTER T m ES Ku ambu kex cbl amsupp da crntl m CS H panel with defaults PU x PUK eX FA Es Ess Pu ad TT bech o TT Ka Update in place Auxiliary edit J TEU WLLL 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T jea tes ia e EOS ae NS oe 10 0 0 D 00 00 0 D UD D LD LD LO O Fee Mocononnooooo 00 co 10 Ms b co o 0 D Fleet teste Figure 31 SD Edit Browse Library Directory Member Selection List Window Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available kb openine CBLe SDE Edit DialogWindow _ _ Edit the entry using Update in place Edit Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action th
369. perator Or 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 51 SDE Concepts Parentheses and Operator Precedence Function Calls Functions are internal routines that return a single result string or value and may be included as a term within an expression A function call is referenced by the name of the function immediately followed by zero or more comma separated argument expressions enclosed in parentheses Each argument expression may itself contain function calls If the function has zero arguments then the parentheses may be omitted e g function call LRECL may be expressed simply as LRECL However specification of parentheses will distinguish the function from a non subscripted record field with the same name If such a field exists in the focus record type and no parentheses are specified following the function name then the field name is used for evaluation Note that when parentheses are specified there can be no intervening blanks between the function name and the opening parenthesis Subscripted Field Name Conflict Subscripted field names are used to reference array elements within a field belonging to the focus record type e g RoomDimensions 5 1 2 Because function calls are expressed in the same way as subscripted fields a conflict may arise when attempting to reference a function call which has the same name as a field containing array elements If the function name matches the name of a subscripted field
370. play area name the current colour setting and extended highlighti tion 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 196 SET QUERY EXTRACT COLWIDTH SET QUERY Option COLWIDTH SET QUERY Option Syntax Ee deg COLWidth eet fielgicol width 2 2 5 222 gt 232 gt SET A a a gt lt te EOR ee Te SEET RECord gt IN struct_name STRUCTure gt gt Query gt COLWidth field_col 22 O O gt lt Description This option controls the number of characters currently displayed column width in a specified column field of the specified record type mapping Column width cannot be increased beyond the column s defined maximum width For SDE DB2 table EDIT SDE EDIT and SDE BROWSE the default width of a column within the display of formatted records is the maximum defined for that column For SDE DB2 table BROWSE only the displayed width of variable length columns is reduced to be equal to the maximum length of the data occupying a field in the column SET COLWIDTH may be preceeded by modal primary command PERMANENT or TEMPORARY default to determine whether the column s definition in the SELCOPY structure SDO is updated with the new column width value If either of these commands are used the SET keyword becomes mandatory SET COLWIDTH values take effect at the File level SET Value field_col The individual column field for
371. pp nn or for DB2 table edit browse DECFLOAT pn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes nnis the length of the field in bytes and pris the defined precision 16 or 34 Hexadecimal A Hexadecimal field of a fixed length specified in number of bytes whose contents are displayed as a printable hexadecimal character string Fields of this data type have a data type record header of X ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bytes Integer Binary Bit A Binary field of length specified in number of bits the contents of which are interpreted as being numeric and whose value is displayed as an integer decimal number Fields of this data type have a data type record header of BI ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nn is the length of the field in bits Compare with Integer Binary Byte data type which is a binary integer field with length expressed in number of bytes Integer Binary Byte A Binary field of length specified in number of bytes maximum 8 bytes the contents of which are interpreted as being numeric and whose value is displayed as an integer decimal number Fields of this data type have a data type record header of BN ppp nn or for DB2 table edit browse SMINT halfword INT word or BIGINT doubleword where ppp is the position of the field with
372. preserved so that following execution of USE ALWAYS OFF or USE NEVER OFF records will be re assigned their original RTOs based on the RTO defined WHEN expressions Parameters record_type Identifies the record type to which assignment criteria will be applied TEMPORARY Indicates that assignment of record types based on this USE command is to be temporary Unless further non temporary USE commands are executed the user will not be prompted to save these changes to the in storage structure SDO IN STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the SDO that contains the specified record type Defaults to the SDO of the current SDE window ALWAYS ON OFF ALWAYS ON forces the specified record type to be assigned to all records that use the specified structure so overriding any other record type assignment criteria If the specified record type has been defined with USE NEVER ON then USE NEVER OFF is set for that record type Note that USE ALWAYS ON will not remove any USE WHEN expression defined to the record type ALWAYS OFF removes the ALWAYS ON definition for the specified record type and so all records that use the specified structure are assigned a record type based on other criteria ALWAYS ON is default if USE is executed without parameter ALWAYS WHEN NEVER or FOR FOCUS RECORD Similarly ALWAYS ON is default if ALWAYS is specified without ON or OFF WHEN expression Specifies the criteria that must be satisfied before the record type can be
373. ption for details of the individual record information fields Shadow line Options Configure display of SHADOWed records Opens the SDEUTSH sub window which has a single option field indicating whether shadow lines are displayed for groups of EXCLUDED table rows view lt Enter gt actions the selection for the current SDE window view but keeps the SDEUTSH window open lt PF3 gt closes the window and returns focus to the Utilities Menu See the SHADOW SET QUERY EXTRACT option for details of shadow lines Window Options Open single record ZOOM view in new window Executes SDEZOOMW to open another SDE window view containing a single record view of the table row occupying the focus line If the current SDE window view is already in SINGLE format then data in the new view will be a multi record TABLE format view See the SDE command ZOOM SDE CREATE REPLACE File Panel SELCOPY i SDE CREATE REPLACE File m File Help wS wR x Command gt SeroLl Csr ZZSGCRES Lines 1 13 of 13 Enter the file id of the output Sequential or VSAM data set PDS PDSE library data set and Member mame or HFS file path Fileld gt u cbl nbi dev sde data copu required Enter start and end line label names with preceding dot period This is required if mo CCC or M MM line commands have been established in the SDE before opening this panel Start Line gt CDBEG End Line gt CDEND Figure 39 SDE Create Replace File Panel The SDE
374. ptions menu table_name A DB2 base table name specified as table_owner table_name containing rows of data to be browsed view_name A DB2 table view specified as view_owner view_name which references an SQL query used to generate a results table containing the rows of data to be browsed DB2 Opts The following DB2 options are applicable to browse of DB2 table data only See SDE Opts for structured data browse options SELECT select clause Specifies a DB2 SQL SELECT clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the select clause WHERE where clause Specifies a DB2 SQL WHERE clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the where clause SORT ORDER BY order by clause Specifies a DB2 SQL ORDER BY clause to be included in the prepared SQL select statement See DB2 SQL Reference for syntax of the order by clause USING STRUCTURE struct_name Identifies the SDO to be applied to the DB2 data rows struct_name is the SDF fileid assigned to the SDO in a CREATE STRUCTURE command If the USING STRUCTURE option is specified then SELECT WHERE and ORDER BY options are ignored The SDO may contain DB2 SQL query SELECT WHERE and ORDER BY sub clause options which are used to select and display DB2 table rows FROM lt ROW gt n Equivalent to FROM RECORD n FROM ROW n specifies that rows are to be displayed beginning at row number n
375. put listing to discover the cause of the compile error and if possible correct the error before re running the SDO generation If however the cause of the return code set by the compiler is acceptable and SELCOPY i should continue in its attempt to generate an SDO then open the relevant compiler options panel as described in the message and ammend the Max RC value as appropriate Re running the SDO generation may succeed or fail depending on the cause of the compiler return code Display Records or Record Segments using multiple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books In many cases individual file records or segments within records have structures defined by different COBOL group items or PL 1 structures where each structure definition is saved in a separate copybook library member To format data in these types of files an SDO must first be generated to consolidate the relevant copy book structure definitions and also define the record type structure definition selection criteria Data within a file s record referenced by an individual record type s selection criteria expression determines whether that record type is a match for the record or record segment data If so that record type gets assigned to that record or record segment Create an SDE siructure SDO from multiple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books To generate a non temporary SDO from multiple COBOL and or PL 1 copy book source PDS PDSE members 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environmen
376. pying the focus line only If the specified record type has been defined with USE NEVER ON then this flag is temporarily ignored for the focus line record only Note that USE FOR FOCUS RECORD will not remove any USE WHEN expression or USE NEVER ON flag defined to the record type FOR FOCUS RECORD OFF removes the record type assignment for the record occupying the focus line and subsequently performs standard record type assignment processing for that record only Examples use TypelRec when coll Ai and col2 lt lt CDE or col3 gt 42 Define USE WHEN record type assignment criteria for record type Type1 Rec in the SDO used by data records in the current SDE window This expression would match records for which the value in field COL1 is equal to A and either of the following are true 0 Value in field COL2 contains the literal string CDE i e CDE in any character case 0 Value in field COL3 is numeric and greater than 42 use TypelRec always Assign record type Type1Rec to all records use TypelRec never Never allow record type Type1Rec to be assigned to a record If executed following the previous USE ALWAYS example then ALWAYS OFF is set and record type assignment processing is performed without Type1 Rec See Also DROP RCOLOUR SAVESTRUCTURE VFMT Syntax gt gt VFMT gt lt Description Display records or record segments in multi record
377. r display in the SDE window view Subsequently only records that have been altered and records displayed in the current SDE window view are held in storage When the data set is saved any record that has alterations is updated in place replaced by the modified in storage copy of the record If Update in place Edit is in effect Edit UP is displayed in the SDE window title bar to the left of the DSN KSDS Edit KSDS Edit is used for Read Only Full Edit or Update in place Edit of VSAM KSDS data sets For KSDS Edit only records that have been altered inserted or deleted and records displayed in the current SDE window view are held in storage It is possible to do this even for Full Edit as KSDS records may be deleted and inserted out of sequence The capabilities and restrictions of Read ONly Edit Full Edit and Update in place Edit still apply and Edit RO Edit or Edit UP is displayed in the title bar as appropriate Note that Read Only Edit or Update in place Edit of KSDS data sets is invoked using the READONLY or UPDATE parameter of the SDE EDIT command respectively otherwise Full Edit is default AUXILIARY Edit Auxiliary edit first makes a copy of the edit data set to a second auxiliary file on disk Only records that have been altered inserted or deleted and records in the current SDE window view are held in storage For Auxiliary Edit a data set can only be saved when it is closed during exit of the SDE window view T
378. r keyword RECORD and leading colon is optional if record_num is an unquoted numeric value e g 5 212 KEY key_string For KSDS data sets only locate the record with a key string equal to key_string If not found the record with the next key string greater than key_string is located key_string may be specified as 1 An unquoted character string The string must contain no commas or blanks and will be upper cased 2 A character string enclosed in apostrophes or quotation marks The string will be upper cased and any two adjacent characters embedded in the string that are the same as the enclosing symbols are treated as a single occurrence of the character 3 A character string enclosed in apostrophes or quotation marks with the prefix or suffix C This has characteristics equivalent to key strings specified in the previous item except that no upper casing will occur 4 A hexadecimal string enclosed in apostrophes or quotation marks with the prefix or suffix X Specification of parameter keyword KEY is optional if key_string is not an unquoted numeric value e g ABC 12UF00 123456 X 003D67A6 C abc_00 RBA byte_offset For KSDS and ESDS data sets only locate the record starting at or following the relative byte address specified by byte_offset By default VSAM returns a point error if the specified RBA does not point at the start of a record SDE detects this condition so that if the RB
379. r of an existing PDS PDSE library or to an HFS file the target file will be created automatically created 2 If output is to a non existant data set or to a member of a non existant PDS PDSE library the Allocate Non VSAM panel is displayed in order to allocate the new data set Specify REPLACE with no parameters to open the SDE CREATE REPLACE file panel Parameters fileid Specifies the fileid of the target file whose records are to be replaced If fileidis a less than 8 characters in length and is a valid member name the target file will be a member of member name fileid belonging to the same PDS PDSE library referenced in the focus SDE view If the focus SDE view does not display a library member the fileid will be treated as an HFS file within the current HFS working directory If fileid includes a volume id then the target file may be a cataloged or uncataloged data set or PDS PDSE library which exists in that volume s VTOC e g VOLWKA DEV UNCATLG FILE namel A label name identifying the first line of the group of lines to be copied to the target file If not specified then the group of lines must marked using C or M line prefix area commands name2 A label name identifying the last line of the group of lines to be copied to the target file If name1 has been specified name2 is mandatory Examples replace DEV USER223 TESTDATA D2012324 CDBEG CDEND Replace the contents of data set DEV USER223 TESTDATA D201 232
380. r output is to a SYSOUT data set the dimensions of the printed SDE view are not determined by the actual SDE view display but correspond to the page width and page depth values The print output page depth is defined as the value set by the PAGEDEPTH parameter or else the value set by the PAGEDEPTH option default 60 lines The page depth value includes the 5 Print header lines so that the number of lines of data printed will be 5 less than the PAGEDEPTH value The print output page width is defined as the value set by the PAGEWIDTH parameter If PAGEWIDTH is not specified then for output to SYSOUT data sets and HFS files only the output page width is defined by the value set by the PAGEWIDTH option default 133 columns Otherwise the output page width is equal to the file s maximum record length value Note that for print of records in a single record view page width is limited to a maximum of 255 columns Batch Execution Virtual SDE views may be opened in batch to edit or browse a data set or DB2 table optionally using a structure to format the data A sequence of standard SDE primary commands may then follow the EDIT or BROWSE command to format the data display and or navigate filter and or alter data in the view before printing it Note that virtual SDE edit views inherit the SDE options set by the user submitting the job during his her last interactive SDE edit session and then saved when the user s SELCOPY i session was closed see S
381. r records that are of the default record type Records that are not of the default record type are bypassed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 144 Command Line Primary Commands LOCATE When the duration of a LOCATE execution exceeds 1 second a progress window is opened displaying the number of records processed so far This window also provides the user with the opportunity to interrupt the operation using the Attn key Parameters Record Locate Options name Label name assigned to a line within the data display The preceding dot is mandatory A colon identifies the locate target to be an absolute record or record segment number KSDS data set key value or VSAM RBA relative byte address Required target record is identified via one of the following RECORD record_num SS For any data set organisation locate the record number specified by record oum For edit techniques where record numbers have not yet established e g KSDS edit following a LOCATE by KEY or DOWN MAX then locating by record number will establish the record numbers and update the prefix area display accordingly For segmented record edit only LOCATE is sensitive to the current setting PHYSICAL or LOGICAL of the PREFIX option If PHYSICAL is in effect record_num corresponds to a record number whereas if LOGICAL is in effect record_num corresponds to a record segment number within the file Specification of paramete
382. ract SESSion gt lt Description Obtain general information about the current Structured Data SDE Edit Browse window view QUERY Response Displays SESSION followed by SDE session information EXTRACT Rexx variables The SDE window view type Browse BROWSE Also indicated by Browse in the title bar Reuse EDIT REUSE Also indicated by Edit in the title bar Update EDIT UPDATE Also indicated by Edit UP in the title bar Auxiliary EDIT AUX Also indicated by Edit AUX in the title bar The SDE record management technique InMemory For EDIT REUSE only i e full edit capability In memory loads all records into storage and rewrites the file s records when saved InPlace For EDIT UPDATE and BROWSE only In place keeps only displayed and modified records in storage Record move insert delete and length change are not allowed InPlacelnMemory For EDIT UPDATE only InPlacelnMemory is the same as In place except that as much of the file as possible is kept in storage Auxiliary For EDIT AUX only Auxiliary copies all records of the file to an auxiliary file in order to support full edit capability for files too large to be loaded entirely into storage InMemory KSDS For EDIT of VSAM KSDS data sets KSDS uses the random access and update features of the VSAM KSDS organisation to provide full edit capabilities without having the whole file in storage 2013 11 13
383. racter field of length 30 bytes starting at position decimal 111 of the unformatted record For DB2 display is of the format data type data type length or data type precision scale representing the field s DB2 built in data type and where applicable its length or its precision and scale See SDE Data Types for descriptions of each of the supported data types and their representation in default TYPE display FORMat FMT For non DB2 only display is of the format length format where length identifies the field s length within the unformatted record and format identifies the field s data type in a descriptive form e g 30 CHAR indicates an Alpha Numeric character field of length 30 bytes OFFSet For non DB2 only display is of the format nnnnn representing the field s location within the unformatted record The format of the displayed location may be decimal absolute position or offset of hexadecimal offset as controlled by the set option OFFSET PICture For non DB2 only displays the field s picture string e g X 30 indicates an Alpha Numeric character field of length 30 bytes QUERY Response The current setting of the TYPE option ON OFF FORMAT OFFSET PICTURE EXTRACT Rexx variables ltype 1 The current setting of the TYPE option ON OFF FORMAT OFFSET PICTURE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 230 SET QUERY EXTRACT TYPE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option UNDOING SET QUERY EXTRACT Option S
384. racters within the data field that occur on the wrapped line are displayed in a different colour in the Type Format or Picture columns If the Offset HexOff or Position columns are visible then only the offset or position of the first character on that line is displayed SDE Data Formats Data within an SDE window view is displayed in one of the following data formats Table Format Forces a multi record window view If table format is selected on EDIT or BROWSE then records are assigned an appropriate record type RTO and formatted so that record data is split into its component fields as defined by the RTO The data is processed so that all fields are displayed as printable character numeric data fields having first been converted to decimal CELL obSUPEPp Do usipno CRL CELTI SbOoCDIROobREME m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwaplList Help wS wR x Command gt Scroll gt Csr Record type AM Fixed S700 Offset 0 Data elements 95 AmKEY AmCOUNTY AmCLine 1 AmCLine 2 12 14 3 AN 26 7 AN 34 4 lt gt 20040322 ALEQUIP SUPP AL Equipment 1S ABBEYPR SUPP Abbey Bookbinding Co ABD DEM SUPP Aberdare Demolition Ltd SUPP Abraxus Ltd SUPP Abraxus Ltd SUPP SUPP Acacia Joinery Limited SUPP Academy Plastics Ltd SUPP SUPP Access Computer Networks Ltd SUPP ACD Skips Limited SUPP Acorn Recruitment Ltd SURE Action Computer Systems SUPP Active 24 SUPP 00000 00000 0000 0000 0000 0000 B0000 0000 00000 0000 00000 D0000
385. rd groups that are EXCLUDED NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED The Display all SHADOWed records option must be selected before any of the selected shadow lines will be displayed SDEUTIL records Enter to activate each of the options below Display all SHADOWed records Show EXCLUDED records Show NOTSELECTED records No record type assig Show SUPPRESSED records Record type not in Y We E E a z Figure 37 SDE Browse Edit SHADOW Lines Window lt Enter gt actions the selection for the current SDE window view but keeps the SDEUTSH window open lt PF3 gt closes the window and returns focus to the Utilities Menu 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 67 SDE Menus and Popup Windows Shadow line Options See the SHADOW SET QUERY EXTRACT option for details of shadow lines Window Options Open single record ZOOM view in new window Executes SDEZOOMW to open another SDE window view containing a single record view of the record occupying the focus line If the current SDE window view is already in SINGLE format then data in the new view will be a multi record view of the prevailing format TABLE CHAR or HEX See the SDE command ZOOM Locate Options Locate record by KEY RBA RECORD Number Locate record by KEY is displayed for KSDS data sets and opens the SDEUTKY sub window which has a single input field prompting the user for a complete or partial KSDS key identifying the new current record The first rec
386. rds of more than one record type within the same view e Work with data in multiple or single record views e Select and order the fields displayed for each record type e Define new record structures using SELCOPY i SDE syntax SELCOPY i CBL CBLI DATSALES KSDS BIG using NBJ CBLI SDO SALES m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwaplList Help wS wR Command gt Sera t gt Record type REC CUST Fixed 204 Offset 0 Data elements 16 FILEREF RECN PASS LASTNAME 2 HS 6 FB 1 4 FB 5 AN 13 15 AN 28 15 a A Te O OSO O 78f j2foa Ramstein chico Richards benj Hill marine boy Coustou revelator Jones Rey 1 D w A e Ka ata elements 13 SEQ CR OR DR COMPANY 5 H Hs FB 13 2 AN 16 7 So Ook o Soo ote ee VISA DELTA CELT Aqua MAST VISA Fixed l REC n D 4 mwwrweR ee kA eloon Y ewon loja y boom Wm boah v bwo EWEN See e et WQNOTMNF gn 000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000001 0000001 Re d t POUR m D e 189 12 cus ffset 0 Data elements 22 ORDER REF QTY ITEM CODE 8 Varia REC n D S I NWOUEFE Y VC DU m D raf m FB sta D FO DH mi ob aio a Ju DM botz Je NES A zm D e w 4 T D p a Io T D e w b eee t ae tle mee ie 5578338 II coe MONIVNNNMTSMMAVYhLAOO wWOBLEDAYABLOO MohM J0sc bb buroo SuWrFONWAO ollon yY Annon lalola v EmnDo loloa wlmlelelejelelelele se ZO eje 0000000 o0oOo 0000000000
387. re in view that are assigned the same record type as the focus record and where the contents of field ORDER_DATE is greater than or equal to 2007 11 28 LESS ORDER_DATE gt 2007 11 28 Similarly the MORE command allows the user to add to the subset of records so that excluded records of the default record type are made visible if they satisfy the supplied expression criteria Records that are already visible or assigned a different record type are unaffected e g Bring back into view only excluded records that are assigned the same record type as the focus record and where the character field BACKUP_VOL does not begin with the string Z16 MORE BACKUP_VOL gt gt C Z16 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 24 Getting Started with SDE SELCOPY i m File Edit Actions Command gt WHERE 4 gt ZZSDi178I 6 lines of COMPANY gt gt DELT 4 FB 1 4 lt 1 gt 3804 3928 00000012 00000013 00000014 00000029 00000030 00000045 00000046 00000047 00000048 00000049 000000654 Figure 21 SDE Subset Using WHERE Editing Data NBJ CBLINST Options Utilities Window SwaplList Help 3000 record type REC CARD selected by WHERE 4 gt amp HS H FB 5 2 A gt line s 6 line s 6 line s al Line s End of Data CBEBL11091 COMPANY gt gt 7 HS NA AN 8 Aqua MAST VISA excluded VISA excluded MAST excluded MAST excluded M
388. re stated a structure may also apply to a COBOL or PL1 copybook or a COBOL or PL1 ADATA Associated Data compiler output file Typed Record Segment A record segment that has an assigned record type RTO An untyped record segment is one that has not been assigned an RTO 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 6 Getting Started with SDE The SELCOPY i distribution includes sample structured data set members COBOL copy books that map records within these members and the amp PREFIX CBLI CMX SDE command centre CMX data set The SDE CMX data set guides new users through some basic tasks related to structured data environment text editing demonstrating each task by prompting the user to execute commands against the sample data It is strongly recommended that users take time to work their way through the SDE CMX data set in order to familiarise themselves with some of the features and capabilities of SDE edit Basic SDE edit tasks are also discussed in this section of the SDE documentation Handling Long Command Strings In addition to using the supplied panel interface all supported SDE tasks may also be performed using command line interface CLI commands By default SELCOPY i windows including SDE window views include a single command line for entering commands to be passed to the local Command Line Interface CLI Whereas it is recommended that command strings particularly command strings of any significa
389. rea window is the display area within an MDI application s frame window The MDI client area serves as the backround for MDI child windows MDI Child Document Window An MDI child or document window is opened in an application s client area window each time a document is opened Each child window has a sizing border title bar window menu minimise maximise restore and close buttons A child window is clipped so that it is confined to the client window and cannot appear outside it 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 241 Glossary Glossary When a child window is maximized its client area completely fills the MDI client area window In addition the system automatically hides the child window s title bar and adds the child window s window menu icon and Restore button to the MDI application s menu bar MDI Frame Window An MDI frame window may be considered the main window of an MDI application It is the parent window of the MDI client area window in which MDI child windows are opened It has a sizing border title bar window menu minimise maximise restore and close buttons Record Group A record group is one or more data records that is represented by a single line in the SDE window display A visible data record may be considered to be a record group of one record wheras a shadow line may be a record group of one or more consecutive records of the same record type Record Type Term referring to the name assigned t
390. red a table row entry may be displayed in a formatted single row view by pressing lt PF2 gt on the row required The table column entries become input panel fields when in single row view lt PF3 gt returns to the table view When all required sub expressions have been entered press lt PF3 gt to proceed to the Filter formatted Selection Criteria panel for the next selected record type or return to the list of record types view When expressions have been configured for each of the selected record types press lt PF3 gt to return to the main Create Filter File panel view Subset using FILTER The FILTER input field of the SDE Structured Data Browse Edit panel may contain filter syntax or the fileid of a filter file used to to selectively include or exclude records for display SELCOPY i Structured Data Browse Edit m File Run Command SDO REPLACE FILTER Help wS wR x Command gt Scroll gt Csr ZZSSDEO00 Lines 1 20 of 23 INPUT Fileid CBL XXRDSO35 DATN109 KSDS or Fileid format i volser jdataset name member Volume For uncataloged datasets DSN Member HRSSRhectmn Em tr EDI Lrecl Browse Edit Allow Ins Del Upd In Place Read Only Options Enter Z to activate each of the options below Record Key RBA Ce FROM X 00352000 Z FOR 10000 records Note Must have storage for this many records ell el E telen lege lgl Saeed We esac aie E Expression or dataset Sp USING SDO Structure or USING COBOL Copybook
391. red Data Environment SDE 116 Command Line Primary Commands EDIT Use of FILTER will force Update in place Edit Filter Clause A filter clause must be specified in parentheses and may contain comment data enclosed by and If filter clause is specified via filter_fileid then comment data may also occur before and after the filter clause The following options are supported by the filter clause INCLUDE record_type Include only records that are assigned the specified record type record_type by SDE Edit This parameter may be specified repeatedly to include a number of record types or to perform alternative WHERE expr filters for the same record type If INCLUDE is specified then all record types that are not referenced by an INCLUDE parameter will be excluded by default record_type Record with field name UnMapped may be used to perform a filter on the unformatted record data whether or not a structure USING struct_name has been specified In this way a filter may test all records regardless of their assigned record type INCLUDE and EXCLUDE parameters are mutually exclusive EXCLUDE record_type Exclude only records that are assigned the specified record type record_type by SDE Edit This parameter may be specified repeatedly to exclude a number of record types or to perform alternative WHERE expr filters for the same record type If EXCLUDE is specified then all record types that are not referenced by an EXCLUDE
392. reduced with the result that it may be impossible for the target line of the UP command to occupy the last line of the current display The display will be scrolled upwards so that the target line is still in view though not the last line in the display In order to overcome this the user would have to alter the display area dimensions For the same reason it is possible that execution of an UP command may result in no change to the displayed data in which case UP PAGE is executed instead Parameters CURSOR CSR The data record shadow line or field data line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the last line of the scrolled display If the cursor is positioned on a header line the data record or field data line immediately following the header line becomes the last line in the display area If the cursor is positioned outside the display area or on the last line within the display area then UP PAGE is executed instead DATA Scroll up to display one page display window depth less one line of data The first data record shadow line or field data line in the current display area becomes the last line of the scrolled display HALF Scroll up half a page of data The data record shadow line or field data line that is half way down the page of data in the current display area becomes the last line of the scrolled display MAX Scroll up to display the first page of data The Top of Data line becomes the first line of the scrolled
393. rimary segment definitions are never selected to map data beginning at any position other than position 1 of a segmented record Specification of USE WHEN criteria is mandatory in order to identify the conditions by which this record type is allocated to a record base segment 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 96 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE SECONDARY Applicable to segmented records only SECONDARY identifies the record type as being a secondary segment A secondary segment maps data that immediately follows any primary segment or any other secondary segment defined within the structure Secondary segment definitions are never selected to map data beginning at position 1 of a segmented record Specification of USE WHEN criteria is mandatory in order to identify the conditions by which this record type is allocated to a secondary segment If no secondary segment record type criteria is satisfied by the record data then the remainder of that record is displayed using the default secondary segment UnmappedSeg This maps the remaining segmented record data as a character data field of length equal to the remaining record data length DEFAULT Identifies the record type as being the default primary base segment DEFAULT may be assigned tp only one record type definition in the SDO Furthermore USE WHEN criteria must not be specified for default record type definitions The default record type is as
394. rmat With MAPPING OFF the record type assigned to formatted records or record segments persists but is not used to format the display of the record data The record data is displayed in its unformatted unmapped format instead With MAPPING ON the record type assigned to formatted records or record segments is re applied to the display of the record data SET MAPPING does not affect unformatted record data i e SDE EDIT BROWSE of a data set no USING structure SDO specified SET MAPPING takes effect at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF Formatted record data mapping is set ON or OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the MAPPING option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables mapping The current setting of the MAPPING option ON or OFF 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 211 SET QUERY EXTRACT MAPPING SET QUERY EXTRACT Option MAXCOBOLRC SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax Eer MAXCObolre Wid EUG A se epee ee gt lt a SET gt gt Query MAXCObolre as gt lt gt gt EXTract MAXCObolre MaM gt lt Description This option controls the maximum acceptable COBOL compiler return code for which an SDE structure will be successfully generated The MAXCOBOLRC value is only applicable to execution of the SDE CLI command CREATE STRUCTURE with parameter FROM COBOL copybook Where a COBOL re
395. rrence of the string are made visible whether or not string1 is replaced FIRST Search forwards from the top of the file data i e the first position of the first data record to find the first occurrence of string1 and attempt to replace it with string2 LAST Search backwards from the bottom of the file data i e the last position of the last data record to find the last occurrence of string and attempt to replace it with string2 NEXT Search forwards from the current cursor location to find the next occurrence of string and attempt to replace it with string2 If the cursor is not within the window s data display area the search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the default record type PREV Search backwards from the current cursor location to find the previous occurrence of of string and attempt to replace it with string2 lf the cursor is not within the window s data display area the backwards search begins at the first position of the first visible or excluded record within the display area that is of the default record type CHARS For non numeric search strings only CHARS indicates that a successful match occurs if string is found anywhere within the data being searched 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 85 Command Line Primary Commands CHANGE PREFIX For non numeric search strings only PREFIX indicates that a successful match only
396. rs are not applicable to these display formats and are ignored Formatted Multi or Single Record Display VFMT or FMT For formatted records the search string is compared against individual fields that have been selected for display in the formatted data record See SELECT Fields are searched from left to right in the order that they appear in the display This is true regardless of the order in which field columns are specified on the EXCLUDE command or the order in which fields are encountered within the unformatted record The prevailing BOUNDS left and right column values define which of the fields within the formatted records are eligible to be searched i e Fields are eligible only if they exist within the left and right bounds when applied to the expanded record data which is not necessarily the same as the unformatted record data Where a BOUNDS column occurs within a field definition then the following rules apply 1 For character data type fields only the area of the field that falls within the BOUNDS columns is eligible for the search 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 121 Command Line Primary Commands EXCLUDE 2 For numeric data type fields the field is not eligible to be included in the search If one or more field columns are specified on the EXCLUDE command using field_col or field_col1 field_col2 that do not reference at least one field defined by the BOUNDS columns as being eligible for searc
397. rs are not included in the browsed record data or record length EOL parameter elements are as follow sto Any standard line end string SL JA 2 byte user specified character or hex string STD is default so that the BROWSE operation scans the input data for any of the standard EOL combinations not string stopping when one is found This EOL combination is used as EOLIN for the file Where EOL processing is specifically requested for BROWSE if EOL characters are not found within the first Irecl bytes of data then the file is displayed as RECFM F with records of length 80 RECFM F V off len origin Specifies that the data is to be treated as containing Fixed or Variable length format records RECFM F indicates that all records are of a fixed length as defined by the LRECL argument RECFM V allows the user to specify the location of the record length fields within the data as follows op Offset of the record length field from the start of the record len Length of the record length field The start of the record data at which the record length is applied Default is 0 2 0 which describes standard RECFM V organisation data sets LRECL lrecl 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 77 Command Line Primary Commands BROWSE Specifies the maximum record length of input records Records terminated by an EOL sequence will wrap onto the next line of data if the record length exceeds recl Where a recor
398. s Examples change 22 3 303 25 Search all fields in the display belonging to the default record type for the next occurrence of the search string value 22 3 Numeric fields are tested for numeric value 22 3 character fields are tested for character string 22 3 anywhere within the field Where the field width and for numeric fields the precision and scale definitions are satisfied by the replacement string value 303 25 text update will takes place change all ing s suffix ex DsName ProcLib JobStep Search selected character fields in the display that belong to excluded records of the default record type for all occurrences of the word suffix string ing and replace the text with s See Also EXCLUDE FIND ONLY RCHANGE RFIND SELEGT Find and Replace Data CHAR Syntax gt gt CHAR gt lt Description Display records or record segments in multi record unformatted character view by temporarily disabling the record type RTO assigned to each record or record segment Compare with FORMAT CHAR which displays the records segments in multi record unformatted view but does not disable the assigned record type Note that unformatted records have record type UnMapped unformatted segments of a segmented record have record type UnMappedSeg Parameters CHAR has no parameters See Also FORMAT MAP FMT UNFMT 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Stru
399. s e g terml terml operatori term2 operator2 term3 operatorl terml An expression is evaluated from left to right with modifications imposed by the presence of sub expressions and the defined precedence of operators Each term within an expression is evaluated as appropriate The result of an expression evaluation is either a numerical value or a character string If numerical then the result is considered to have a Boolean value whereby a zero 0 result has the value false and any non zero result has the value true Expression Terms Individual terms within an expression are evaluated as they are encountered parsing from left to right Following evaluation of a term the resultant value is assigned a data type which is stored internally by the program A user need not know the internal data type of an evaluated term simply that it is either character or numerical For details on specific data types used by SDE see SDE Data Types A term may be one of the following Literal string A literal string stored internally as a character data type and is represented as a delimited string character string or a hexadecimal string A literal string may be null length zero e g C Delimited string A string of character text possibly including blanks and special characters enclosed in quotation marks or apostrophes Alphabetic characters in a delimited string are treated as being both upper and lower case Therefore the foll
400. s a minimum and maximum value The RTO data length is used in record type assignment processing Structure Definition File A Structure Definition File SDF is a disk file sequential data set or PDS PDSE library member containing a saved i e non temporary copy of a Structure Definition Object 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 30 SDE Concepts Structure Definition File The SDF fileid is also the structure name assigned to the non temporary SDO On executing an EDIT or BROWSE command if the specified SDO is not already loaded in storage it gets loaded from the SDF If a non temporary SDO is altered during an SDE edit session then the user will be prompted to save the SDO to its SDF when the SDO is dropped from storage Note that a save is performed automatically on explicit execution of the CREATE STRUCTURE command for a non temporary SDO Record Type Assignment Where a structure has been specified for SDE processing of data records e g SDE EDIT BROWSE File Compare etc then on initial load of the data records or following execution of a USE WHEN ALWAYS NEVER command record type assignment processing is performed The record type RTO assigned to an individual record is determined using the following order of precedence Note that unless specified by a USE ALWAYS ON condition an RTO for which the USE NEVER condition has been set ON will be excluded from any RTO assignment test 1 Use the RTO identi
401. s exactly one character within a member name mask Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each member name mask Multiple member name masks may be specified within the single set of parentheses These must be separated by one or more blanks and or a comma ZOOM Syntax gt gt 100m See a O A SAS O a a gt lt l oS In 5 l tas pup E Description Switches the display format between single record view and multi record view When switching to single record view the ZOOM command operates on the default record If no parameter is specified then the display format toggles between the single and multi record view Parameters IN SE to single record view mode With FORMAT TABLE in effect this is equivalent to issuing the command FORMAT INGLE OUT Switch to multi record view mode With FORMAT SINGLE in effect this is equivalent to issuing the command FORMAT TABLE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 186 SET QUERY EXTRACT Syntax A q option_name VALUS A A A gt lt SET gt gt Query gt option_name ennn a gt lt HS Soo gt Vv gt gt EXTract option_name 222121 gt lt Description Structured Data Environment options may set and their current values queried or extracted into stem variables for use in REXX macros using the SET QUERY and EXTRACT commands repectively Additional operations
402. same specifications as field_col Specification of multiple field column ranges must either be enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and field columns ranges e g FirstName LastName 2 Salary Bonus EmpNo 10 15 If field names are used enclosing parentheses are mandatory namel A label name identifying the first record of a range of data records to be searched The preceding dot is mandatory Default is ZFIRST name2 A label name identifying the last record of a range of data records to be searched The preceding dot is mandatory If name2 occurs before name in the display then the order is reversed If FIND PREV is executed and name is specified the default is ZFIRST Otherwise the default is ZLAST Examples find 22 3 Search all fields in the display belonging to the default record type for the next occurrence of the search string value 22 3 Numeric fields are tested for numeric value 22 3 character fields are tested for character string 22 3 anywhere within the field find all ask suffix ex DsName ProcLib JobStep Search selected character fields in the display belonging to excluded records of the default record type for all occurrences of the word suffix string ask See Also CHANGE EXCLUDE ONLY RFIND SELECT FLIP Syntax gt gt FLIP
403. sent a generic group of characters as described below Any character in a picture string that is not one of these special characters is untranslated 0 A regular expression string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix R For example R C 0 9 2 is a regular expression which would match the upper case character C followed by 2 digits This expression would find C00 C91 C22 etc but not c99 C 99 etc Regular expressions enable powerful string pattern matching at the cost of rather complex syntax and potentially extended command processing time For syntax and usage see Regular Expressions in CBLe text edit documentation If ano search string is specified the default search string used is that specified on the most recent FIND CHANGE or EXCLUDE command executed against the current file FIND ALL with no search string is a special case and is equivalent to executing RESET FIND EXCLUDED Intended for use with formatted records VALID will search fields for valid data i e data that satisfies the field s assigned data type Intended for use with formatted records INVALID will search fields for invalid data i e data that does not satisfy the field s assigned data type If none of the records to be scanned are EXCLUDED or NX is specified then FIND ALL is the same as FIND FIRST except that a message is displayed providing the number of occurrences of the string value found in the data Unlike FIND FIRST all ex
404. set Auxiliary edit is identical to full REUSE edit except that the data set to be edited is first copied to an auxiliary data set on disk This allows full editing capabilities for data sets that are too large to be loaded into available storage FROM Records are to be displayed beginning at a specific location within the data set The first record at the specified location becomes record 1 within the SDE window view of the data set Records that occur before this location are not included within the edit session If FILTER is specified then record filtering occurs only on records selected using the FROM and FOR parameters Required record location is identified via one of the following KEY string For KSDS data sets only locate the record with a key string equal to string If not found the record with the next key string greater than string is used RBA n For KSDS and ESDS data sets only locate the record starting at the relative byte address specified by n The RBA must point at the start of the record otherwise a VSAM point error will occur RBA address for each record is displayed as part of the record information columns within an SDE window view Display of these columns is controlled using the SDE SET RECINFO CLI command lt RECORD gt n For any data set organisation locate the record number specified by n Specification of parameter keyword RECORD is optional Use of the FROM parameter will force Update in place Edit D
405. set 8 Data elements 16 FIRSTNAME LASTNAME EMAIL 7 6 13 AN 35 15 AN 20 15 AN 108 35 EE Hans Ramstein hansrams abc co uk Denise Richards DRichiS3 fsnet com Mike Hill MikeHBproveit com jacque Coustou ICoust 26 muyunetwork fr upe REC CARD Fixed S8 Offset 8 Data elements 13 CUST TD SEQ CR OR DR COMPANY CARD NUMBER NAME 4 5 7 HS H 10 FB 1 4 FB 5 2 AN 7 1 AN 8 7 AN 24 25 A E A to gt gt E A deng Gi 4 Aqua Joseph B Jones g 3 MAST 29969967546 Mr Bruce W Howar 6 4 D VISA 17650442152 Msr J Cousteau D D Variable 92 11 050 Size 63 ata element F Figure 18 SDE Selected Field Columns By default fields that are not assigned a field name e g COBOL FILLER fields are not displayed In order to display these fields use SET UNNAMED ON Displaying the Record Headers In a multi record view of formatted data then all 5 field column header lines are displayed by default before each group of records of the same record type These are the Record Type Field Name Field Reference Field Type and Scale header lines which are described in detail under SDE Window Views The Field Reference Field Type and Scale lines may be set on or off using the SET REFERENCE SET TYPE and SET SCALE commands respectively 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 22 Getting Started with SDE Displaying the Record Headers NBJ CBLINST CBL11091 SZZ2SSAM2 ZZSDATSA using NBJ CBLI SDOx m File Edit Actions Options
406. set of selected fields in the current view as there are values in the list of field values are used as the default In this case the order of the field columns is equal to the order in which fields are displayed in the current view VALUES field _value A list of field values to be inserted into corresponding Geld Gol entries in the field column list If one or more field_col entries are specified i e a field list is specified then there must be the same number of field_value values to correspond with each field_col entry If a character string field value contains special characters blanks or commas then it must be delimited by quotation mark or apostrope characters If the value contains characters which match the delimiting characters then each occurrence of this character must be escaped by prefixing it with the escape character The escape character is the same as the delimiting character e g VALUES He said It s John s bike Examples replacel NAME 5 BONUS values Tom Jones 62 200 00 Replace existing values in the specified fields with those supplied Numerical data will be converted to the appropriate data type for the field See Also INSERT 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 166 Command Line Primary Commands REPLACELINE Syntax CHange COmmand Duplicates o o gt gt RESet Ke S gt All F X SoeSsoe
407. signed to a record or primary segment when it does not satisfy the USE WHEN selection criteria of any of the defined primary record type definitions lt USE gt WHEN IF expression Specifies the selection criteria that must be satisfied by the record or record segment data in order for it to be assigned the associated record type mapping The USE WHEN expression is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record type field names and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of the USE WHEN expression must be numeric and is treated as being Boolean in nature with a zero value indicating a false condition and any non zero value indicating a true condition When the selection criteria involves testing fields in unformatted record data the SDE expression should simply use function SUBSTR on the record field RECORD e g To assign a record type based on a character string A11 at position 11 of the record data specify the following USE IF SUBSTR RECORD 11 3 A11 To test fields in the record data as if already formatted by the record type structure you are attempting to assign simply reference the required field names in the SDE expression e g To assign a record type based on values in 2 numeric fields SEQUENCE_ID and CUST_REF both defined within the record type structure USE IF SEQUENCE_ID gt 301 AND CUST_REF 10233 Note that fields SEQUENCE_ID and CUST_REF
408. sing the SET QUERY EXTRACT option RECINFO displays the offset into the record of the start of the segment Primary segments display the TTR Offset or RBA value of the start of the record as for non segmented records 3 Prefix area numbers in a multi record view correspond to either record or segment numbers in the file as determined by the SET PREFIX option In single record view PREFIX PHYSICAL will display the record number and the current segment number within the record whereas PREFIX LOGICAL diplays only the current record segment number within the file Using command LOCATE to navigate the file data is sensitive to the current setting PHYSICAL or LOGICAL of the PREFIX option Therefore if PREFIX LOGICAL is in effect LOCATE 35 will scroll to the 35th primary or secondary segment within the file not the 35th record of the file Navigating Segmented Record Display In both multi record and single record views the display of segments may be navigated using standard SDE CLI primary commands FIND LOCATE UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT TOP BOTTOM NEXT and PREV Note that in single record view LEFT and RIGHT will scroll backwards and forwards respectively through every segment in the file regardless of the type of segment primary or secondary or record to which a segment belongs Commands NEXT and PREV may be used to restict scrolling to only secondary segments belonging to the current record This is the NEXT and PREV default howe
409. sociated label name s of the ith named line in the current file Syntax Left 6 DOGical il l A E PREFix ON HA PEA gt lt bk II L SET OFE Right np bytes Physical t gt gt Query PREPLX 2 27 7771 O O O O O gt lt gt gt EXTract PREFix gt lt Description PREFIX defines whether the prefix area is displayed whether it is displayed on the left of the window view or on the right and the number of columns to use The prefix displays the record number and is also a space where line sensitive prefix commands may be entered The PREFIX option operates at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value ON OFF The prefix area is set displayed ON or hidden OFF Default is ON LEFT RIGHT Determines whether the prefix area is displayed on the left or right of the record data Default is LEFT 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 219 SET QUERY EXTRACT PREFIX SET QUERY EXTRACT Option n_bytes The width of the prefix area Minimum is 1 maximum is 8 and the default is 6 LOGICAL PHYSICAL Applicable to segmented record display only determines whether the prefix area contains the physical record numbers or the segment numbers within the file Default is LOGICAL QUERY Response The current setting of the
410. ssion USE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE CREATE STRUCTURE 93 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE Field Definition Poa pe SS Se aa Data Definition Jesse gt field_name PICture picture string EBCdic E E AO AO Ho gt gt BEE Loes ERA v DiMensions dim soso seo bebe A zb Sg cada TRAILing INCluded gt SIGNed 4 jc gt INCluded J LEADing ee Eeer E ls TRAILing a SEParate A UNSIGNed ono E ALIGNed gt AO oe EEN KE E gt UNALIGNed Las DEFault default_value a less ZEROS eh gt EE E gt re ps See REMarks remark v ENUMeration t enumerator enam ee i Data Definition gt BINODE Ee 2 gt n bits BIT EE n_bits E ses CHARAGTEGIR SSS SSS Sa ee SS aS SO lp NS TER A EN EE ote SS Sts Se SSS se E CHARZ AO o m_obDytes ee L Decimal DATE 4 ooo le 2 Binary E Catalog VTOC SE DECimal stereo oso eee ee precision t e en dee scale et FIXed 4 precieiont a lt o gt A i scale a
411. storage it is loaded from the appropriate Structure Definition File SDF Record Type Objects RTO within the specified SDO are then used to map the 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 76 Command Line Primary Commands BROWSE records in the data set For every record in the file each RTO is checked until one is found whose criteria is matched by the record characteristics This RTO is then used to map the record If the record does not match any RTO criteria then the first RTO in the SDO is used by default The RTO automatically selected to map a record may be changed by the user via the USE WHEN command or the SDE Edit Browse Utility Window By default all fields within records that have an associated RTO are displayed as printable character numeric data fields having first been converted to decimal If no SDO is specified then FORMAT CHARACTER is applied to each record i e the data is displayed as a single variable RECFM V or fixed RECFM F length character field with field name UnMapped No data conversion is performed If the VIEW parameter is specified with a non generic argument the DRECTYPE setting is initialised as the first record_type parameter specified on the VIEW parameter Otherwise the DRECTYPE setting is initialised as the record type of the first visible record in the file Record data that does not meet the specifications of its field definition is considered to be invalid and is represented
412. string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix P Picture strings use special characters to represent a generic group of characters as described below Any character in a picture string that is not one of these special characters is untranslated 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 84 Command Line Primary Commands CHANGE 0 A regular expression enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix R Regular expressions use special characters for complex pattern matching See Regular Expressions in CBLe text edit documentation for detailed description VALID Intended for use with formatted records VALID will search fields for valid data i e data that satisfies the field s assigned data type INVALID Intended for use with formatted records INVALID will search fields for invalid data i e data that does not satisfy the field s assigned data type string2 The CHANGE replace string used to replace string1 The replace string may be any of the following 0 An unquoted numeric value The replace string is treated as a numeric value when it replaces a value in a numeric field in a formatted view In all other cases a numeric replace string is treated as a character string 0 An unquoted character string containing no commas or blanks String2 may be null 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks that may contain embedded commas and
413. string may contain any valid PL 1 picture character for numeric character Fields of this data type have a data type record header of AN ppp nn where ppp is the position of the field within the expanded record in bytes and nnis the length of the field in bytes Stucture A Structure consisting of one or more fields each defined as being any of the supported data types The structure field length is defined as being the sum of all field lengths within the structure A field within a structure may itself be of the structure data type so defining a structure nested within a structure Time A Time field displayed with separator character HH MM SS or for DB2 table edit browse in the locally defined DB2 time string format The internal format of the time string for non DB2 edit orowse may be that returned by the TIME Assembler macro for packed or binary data Fields of this data type have a data type record header of TI or for DB2 table edit browse TIME Timestamp A Timestamp Date and Time field displayed in ISO format with date separator character yyyy mm dd and time separator character HH MM SS or for DB2 table edit browse in the locally defined DB2 timestamp string format The internal format of the date and time string for non DB2 edit browse may be that returned by the TIME Assembler macro for packed or binary data the system TOD clock returned by the STCK operation or an HFS file directory entry Fields of t
414. string value in visible or EXCLUDED records of the default record type For character data where the search and replace strings are of different length then e The text following a found search string will be shifted left or right If parameter TEXT has been specified then before shifting the text blanks will inserted or absorbed as necessary to maintain the positions of blank delimited words that follow the replaced text e The length of data in a variable length field may be updated to be any value less than or equal to the maximum length of the field Therefore for unformatted data the length of the record may be updated to any value less than or equal to the maximum record length Inserting Records Record record segment and DB2 table row insert is not supported by Update in place edit technique New lines of data records or record segments of specific record type or DB2 table rows may be inserted before or after existing lines of data in the display as follows 1 Enter prefix line command I n on the line after which the new records are to be inserted The record type assigned to the inserted lines will be the same as that assigned to the line in which the prefix command was entered 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 26 Getting Started with SDE Inserting Records 2 Execute the INSERT primary command to insert one or more new lines of a specified record type following the focus line For formatted data IN
415. structure is dropped or on execution of the SAVESTRUCTURE command 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 162 Command Line Primary Commands RCOLOUR Any number of RCOLOUR specifications may exist for an individual record type based on different WHEN expression criteria If records assigned this record type satisfy the WHEN expression criteria of more than one RCOLOUR definition then the RCOLOUR definition used is the one that was defined first Parameters record_type The name of the record type RTO for which the colour definition will be applied IN STRUCTURE struct_name The name of the structure SDO in which record_type is defined Default is to the current i e last referenced structure This is the structure used in the current SDE window view or explicitly referenced by an SDE command e g USE WHEN BLUE RED PINK GREEN TURQUOISE YELLOW WHITE DEFAULT Supported colours If DEFAULT is specified the default colour for record display is used BLINK REVERSE USCORE NONE Extended highlighting The colour may blink be displayed in reverse video or be underlined Default is NONE WHEN expression Specifies the criteria that must be satisfied before the defined colouring will occur expression is a valid SDE expression which supports function calls record_type field names and references sub expressions arithmetic relational and logical operators The result of the WHEN expression must be num
416. t Query tea BOUNGS 55 5S Se SS SSS es gt lt BNDS gt gt EXTract BOUNds gt lt BNDS Description Applicable to formatted and unformatted multi and single record views but invalid for DB2 table edit BOUNDS defines the leftmost and rightmost columns between which the CHANGE EXCLUDE FIND ONLY and SHIFT commands will operate By default the left bound is set to 1 and the right bound is set to the maximum defined record length plus 1 LRECL 1 for the file being edited Note that an error occurs if an attempt is made to set either bound to a value greater than the maximum record length Execute SET BOUNDS with no parameters to reset the left and right bounds columns to these defaults For variable length records BOUNDS allows the record length of an individual variable length record to either be preserved or increased up to the defined maximum following execution of the SHIFT primary command or the or line prefix area commands When the right bound is set at a column number which is less than or equal to a record s current record length that record s length is preserved following a shift operation When the right bound is set at a column number greater than a record s current record length shifting data left or right will alter the length of that record SET BOUNDS takes effect at the View level SET Value left_col
417. t SDE 10 Getting Started with SDE Create an SDE structure SDO from multiple COBOL or PL 1 Copy Books 1 Open the Create Structure from COBOL PL1 Copybook s panel by selecting Structure then Copybook from the Primary Option Menu or simply entering command SDO at any command prompt 2 Enter the fileid and optionally a title and description for the SDO PDS PDSE library member to be created To include a short title or description in the SDO definition activate the Title and or Description fields by entering in the selection fields as required SELCOPY i re STRUCTURE from COBOL YPL1 copubook s m File Help wS wR Command gt Scroll gt Z2sGsporL Lines 1 20 of 20 PFi Help Library Specify source copybook libraries Record type Add Delete record types from COBOL PLi copybooks Replace COBOL Replacing options Create Create Structure SDO in the foreground Batch Create Batch Job de E PDS PDSE member Structure File to Create Edi SDOLIB Dsn NBJ SELCOPYI Member gt XXRDSDAT Title gt Widget Assembly Description SELCOPY i SDO Structure to format data records describin Specification of widget components and sub components Figure 4 SDO Create Structure from COBOL PL1 Copybook s 3 Select option 1 Library to open the Copybook Library List panel view This panel view contains an embedded table which supports a number of primary and line prefix commands including insert R replicate and D D
418. t documentation SDATA command is supported so that it may be tolerated in edit macros when the focus CBLe child window is an SDE edit browse view SEGTYPE Syntax gt gt gt SEGtype Secondary ssp EE EE gt lt Primary Lo Base Sa SSSR SSeS Seas SSS Description Applicable to full or auxiliary edit of segmented records only SEGTYPE is used to change the type primary or secondary of the focus segment Note that Update in place edit does not support SEGTYPE SEGTYPE PRIMARY or SEGTYPE BASE changes a secondary segment to be a primary base segment so splitting the record into two The record generated by the new primary segment is remapped so that all its segments are assigned an appropriate record type definition SEGTYPE SECONDARY changes a primary segment to be a secondary segment so joining the record with the record before The record is remapped so that all its segments are assigned an appropriate record type definition Note that no action is taken if SEGTYPE does not change the segment type of the focus segment SEGTYPE may be undone and subsequently redone using the UNDO lt PF22 gt and REDO lt PF23 gt commands Parameters SECONDARY Sets the focus segment to be a secondary segment PRIMARY BASE Sets the focus segment to be a primary base segment 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 171 Command Line Primary Commands SEGTYPE See Also
419. t a generic group of characters as described below Any character in a picture string that is not one of these special characters is untranslated P s Any non displayable character haracter 0 9 0 A regular expression enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix R Regular expressions use special characters for complex pattern matching See Regular Expressions in CBLe text edit documentation for detailed description If ano search string is specified the default search string used is that specified on the most recent FIND CHANGE or EXCLUDE command executed against the current file EXCLUDE ALL with no search string is a special case and will exclude all data records of the default record type Intended for use with formatted records VALID will search fields for valid data i e data that satisfies the field s assigned data type Intended for use with formatted records INVALID will search fields for invalid data i e data that does not satisfy the field s assigned data type Search forwards from the top of the file data i e the first position of the first data record and excluded all records containing an occurrence of the string EXCLUDE ALL with no other parameters excludes all records of the default record type Search forwards from the top of the file data i e the first position of the first data record to exclude the first record of the default record type to contain an occurrence of the search
420. t of length 3 bytes X yydddd Binary values for years since 1900 yy and Julian day of ear dddd e g 19th August 2005 is X 6900E7 Default date format is DECIMAL FIXed Defines a field to be interpreted as a binary number allowing precision number of digits in total of which scale number of digits will be displayed following the decimal point Default for precision is 7 Default for scale is 0 FLOATBIN Defines a field to be interpreted as a Binary IEEE 754 Floating point number occupying n_bytes bytes where n_bytes may be 4 or 8 defaults to 4 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 101 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE FLOATDEC FLOATHEX Defines a field to be interpreted as a Decimal Floating point value of precision number of significant digits where precision may be 16 or 34 defaults to 34 Precision 16 occupies 8 bytes of data precision 34 occupies 16 bytes Defines a field to be interpreted as a Hexadecimal Floating point number occupying n_bytes bytes where n_bytes may be 4 or 8 defaults to 4 HEXadecimal INTeger PCHAR PFIXED PFLOAT Defines a field to be interpreted as printable hexadecimal character string occupying n_bytes bytes where n_bytes defaults to 1 Defines a field to be interpreted as a binary whole number occupying n_bytes bytes where n_bytes defaults to 4 Defines a field to be interpreted as a PL 1 style PICTURE string representing a character dat
421. t the Global level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect SET Value char Specifies a field qualifier separator character Valid characters are dot colon backslash commercial at carat or percent QUERY Response Displays QSEPARATOR followed by the qualifier separator character EXTRACT Rexx variables The qualifier separator character 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 220 SET QUERY EXTRACT QSEPARATOR QUERY EXTRACT Option RECFM SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option RECFM has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET RECFM in CBLe Text Edit documentation RECINFO SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax ALL gt gt 4 RECInfo ON Ho gt SED gt F OEF F Flags NOFlags DECimal gt o poo oo opos ooo pepa fo gt lt L I Length Id SQLCode HEXadecimal NOLength NOId NOSQLCode gt gt Query RECInN 0 ene O gt lt gt gt EXTract RECInfo 5 22 5 3535 gt lt Description This option controls which of the standard record information columns if any are to be displayed for records in the current SDE window view For both SDE ED
422. tax Conventions How to read the Syntax Diagrams The following rules apply to the syntax diagrams used in this command reference 1 The diagrams should be read from left to right from top to bottom following the path of the line The gt gt symbol indicates the beginning of a statement The gt lt symbol indicates the end of a statement 2 Required items appear on the horizontal line the main path gt gt required_item gt lt 3 Optional items appear below the main path gt gt required_item Ho gt lt optional_item 4 If an optional item appears above the main path then that item has no effect on the execution of the statement and is used only for readability optional_item gt gt required item Pp gt lt 5 If you can choose from two or more items they appear vertically in a stack 6 If you must choose one of the items one item of the stack appears on the main path gt gt required_item required_choicel gt lt required_choice2 7 lf choosing one of the items is optional the entire stack appears below the main path gt gt required_item Ho gt lt l optional_choicel l optional_choice2 8 If one of the items is the default it appears above the main path and the remaining choices are shown below 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Enviro
423. te gt pol Limit Llnes l t Nolimit NOTRUNCate Acrossthendown Browse a a a Ss a sa 22222 gt It Downthenacross Edit TRUNCate NOView Outdsn SDEPRINT Copies 1 l l gt 4H 2222222 2 KS egeeeeegeg K E N gt pol l Outdsn fileid SYSOut outputclass Copies n_copies 1 OLD gt K gt poes E eee acne a ne gt lt byl ba t SHr PAGEWidth n_cols PAGEDepth n_lines SHare DW ch be BD 2 25 MODify APPEND Notes 1 Default disposition is SHR if OUTDSN is a PDS PDSE library member Description 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 158 Command Line Primary Commands PRINT Print data in the display area of the current SDE view The PRINT command may be used to print the current view of file data all data within the current line in single record view or all data within all displayed lines starting at the current line PRINT may be executed interactively or in batch as SDEIN input to the SELCOPY i batch program SDEAMAIN In both environments PRINT may be specified following an EDIT or BROWSE command and any display formatting commands to print the contents of the current SDE window view Whether or no
424. ted group of fields Therefore the names of fields that define a group of fields will not be displayed and so their corresponding field numbers will also be missing from the sequence of displayed fields This header line may be switched on off using the SET REFERENCE command Header Line 4 Field Type For DB2 table edit the fourth column header line displays the field data type as specified in the table column definition For data files the fourth column header line displays the field structure type as a 2 character data type code followed by the field s start position byte number within the record type definition and the field length For fields whose lengths are defined in number of bits the field start position includes an offset into the byte following a decimal point and the unit for field length is bits The start position and length displays are separated by a colon Recognised file editing data type codes are as follow AN CHARACTER VARCHAR XVARCHAR STRUCTURE or UNION E ee C C N9 U U UO O IBN __ INTEGER pp em KEE zp zone See SDE Data Types for descriptions of each of the supported data types and their representation in the Field Type header line This header line may be switched on and off using the SET TYPE command Header Line 5 Scale The fifth column header line displays a scale for each field in the display The width of the scale is equivalent to the width of the field
425. ted in one of the following formats Packed decimal format of length 4 bytes X HHMM SSTH Decimal values for hours HH DECIMAL minutes MM seconds SS tenths of second T and hundredths of second H Note that the data is unsigned Binary format of length 4 bytes X nnnn nnnn A 32 bit unsigned binary value for number of hundredths of seconds 0 01 second elapsed in a day Default time format is DECIMAL TIMESTAMP UNION VARCHAR Defines a timestamp field with the source data interpreted in one of the following formats Packed decimal format of length 8 bytes X yyyy dddF HHMM SSTH See descriptions of DECIMAL format for DATE and TIME parameters BINARY Binary format of length 10 bytes X yyyy 00mm 00dd nnnn nnnn See descriptions of BINARY format for DATE and TIME parameters Store Clock value of length 8 bytes A 64 bit unsigned binary value in the same format as the system TOD clock Peed HFS directory timestamp of length 4 bytes A 32 bit unsigned binary value for number of seconds elapsed since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 Default timestamp format is DECIMAL Defines a field to be interpreted as a union of one or more fields specified using Field Definition syntax Each field definition should be separated by a comma Unions allow the same data to be interpreted as more than one data type Defines a field to be interpreted as a variable length character string The maximum possible length of the string is
426. ted segments are removed from the display the truncation error flag TRNC gt is set on in the primary segment of each truncated record and the following message is returned ZZSD4471I IDENTIFY process caused 1 physical records to be truncated The UNDO command may be executed to undo the remap and recover the truncated segments The user may then correct the cause of the truncation Following execution of SAVE FILE or END in which record truncation occurs the truncated segments are not removed from the display the truncation error flag TRNC gt is set on in the primary segment of every truncated record and the following message is returned ZZSD406E The physical record associated with a base segment is too long greater than nnn Truncated to length mmm Where nnn is the maximum allowable record length and mmm is the length at which the record was truncated If truncation occurs on execution of FILE or END the close of the SDE edit view is temporarily disabled in order to allow the user the opportunity to correct the truncation error Although the file has been saved to disk with truncated records the in storage copy of the records remains unchanged Therefore the user may correct and re save the file data before closing the edit view Full Edit Operations The effects of full edit operations that add remove and or reposition record segments are summarised below DELETE Delete individual segments using command DELETE or prefix
427. teria x File Help wS wR WE Command gt Seralt Csr ZZSGFLTR PFi Help FILTER unformatted Selection Criteria 3 Rows AND Position Length ROp Value OR Se ee ee Cana ee Lee AE Pan gt at 2 Prosa o eae zb 4 E 00001 1 10 gt gt c selc 000002 AND 5 6 gt 280000 000003 AND 22 2 x FFFF 000004 End of Data Figure 10 Create File Filter Unformatted Each table row should be updated as follows 1 Each sub expression has a logical association with the preceeding sub expression represented by logical operator AND or OR Except for the first row entry in the table which has no no preceeding sub expression insert the appropriate logical operator in the AND OR column The required logical operator may be selected from a list of supported operators by entering a blank or invalid entry in this column Note that support of parentheses to override the standard precedence for evaluating expressions containing both AND and OR operators is not yet supported by the Create Filter panel If parentheses are required they must be inserted manually in the generated filter expression 2 Enter the position and length of the unformatted record data to be tested in the Position and Length columns respectively 3 Enter the relational operator used by the sub expression in the ROp column The required relational operator may be selected from a list of supported operators by entering a blank or invalid entry in this
428. tes the affected RTO definitions in storage and actions the offset changes immediately Record type assignment processing is performed for records within the file following a change to any record type s offset value lt PF3 gt closes the SDEUTOF window and if offset changes have occurred the SDEUTSS sub window is displayed prompting the user to save the changed structure overwriting the structure data file on disk before returning to the utilities menu If not saved the user is given another opportunity to save changes to updated structures when the SELCOPY i session is ended normally Modify record type Identification criteria Opens the SDEUTUS sub window which prompts the user to enter record type RTO selection criteria against any or all record types defined in the SDO The Use Always option may set for one record type only If specified for multiple record types the first selected will be used See command USE for descriptions on use of the WHEN expression ALWAYS and NEVER parameters menu ecord tuyupe Use Use Always Never When Figure 34 SDE Browse Edit Record Type Identification Window lt Enter gt updates the affected RTO definitions in storage and immediately actions record type assignment processing for the records within the SDE window view lt PF3 gt closes the SDEUTUS window and if offset changes have occurred the SDEUTSS sub window is displayed prompting the user to save the changed structure overwriting
429. the changes discard the changes or to terminate the END command OFF PROMPT and return to the SDE edit view Furthermore if a non temporary structure SDO is used to map the record data and changes have been made to that structure during the course of the edit session e g USE WHEN then the user will be prompted to save the changed structure to its structured data file SDF regardless of AUTOSAVE status See command SAVESTRUCTURE Parameters END has no parameters See Also SET AUTOSAVE CANCEL DROP DDROP QQUIT 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 120 Command Line Primary Commands END EXCLUDE Syntax EQ NEXT CHARs gt gt EXclude Pe eee string See en bse Sesa i SSS gt Ke ege JR E eae e VALID 1 E FIRST B a SUFfix E 2 INVALID Gs LAST ze 3 WORD Ta D PREV Z ALL ZFIRST ZLAST Spee ee Lo A el geg db POST Sasa see ase SS O 2 Namel ebe 3 pos2 s D name2 de pesos hesesssees persas See See v field_col E E E field_coll field_col2 ee Description Exclude data records in the current SDE edit or browse view that satisfy a search for the specified character string or numeric value Only DB2 table rows records or record segments assigned the default record type are included in the search Record groups that are already excluded will r
430. the prefix area of an SDE browse or edit window name nt ln Int Mn HEX or HEXD i n ID n IDD 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Set a line pointer line name For unformatted record display only SHIFT a line or block of lines n columns to the left Characters shifted past the current BOUNDS setting are truncated For unformatted record display only SHIFT a line or block of lines n columns to the right Characters shifted past the current BOUNDS setting are truncated Make this line the target for a move or copy move or copy lines After this line Make this line the target for a move or copy move or copy lines Before this line Mark a line or a block of lines for copying Lines may be copied or cut to the clipboard using the CLIPBOARD COPY CUT command or copied to another position within the same edited data using prefix commands A or B Only visible not excluded data records and shadow lines representing EXCLUDED record groups are eligible to be copied i e records flagged as NOTSELECTED SUPPRESSED or if SHADOW OFF EXCLUDED is in effect records flagged as EXCLUDED are not eligible to be copied Note that although not eligible for copy shadow lines representing NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED records groups are still included within a C n count of lines to be copied If a shadow line is not displayed SHADOW OFF it is not included within a C n line count Delete a line or a block of lines Alternatively for RRDS
431. the structure data file on disk before returning to the utilities menu If not saved the user is given another opportunity to save changes to updated structures when the SELCOPY i session is ended normally Override record type for focus line Opens the SDEUTUF sub window which prompts the user to select the record type RTO to be assigned to the record occupying the focus line The status of ALWAYS and NEVER flags and any WHEN expressions are displayed in this window for information purposes only Only one record type may be selected If multiple record types are selected then the last record type in the list to be selected is used See command USE for descriptions on use of the FOR FOCUS parameter SDEUTUF S d EYY L E menu Override Record Tupe Always Never When of N REC CUST REC CARD UIE Sale A E REC ORDER REC PAYMENT REC NOTE Figure 35 SDE Browse Edit Focus Line Record Type Identification lt Enter gt applies the record type to the record in the focus line immediatley lt PF3 gt closes the SDEUTUS window and returns to the utilities menu 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 66 SDE Menus and Popup Windows Field Options Field Options Select Exclude Order visible field names Executes SDESEL to generate a temporary CMX command centre file containing an SDE SELECT command that by default selects all columns for display in ascending order of field reference number The temporary CMX file
432. tion of the individual field s contents within the record occupying the focus line No variables are generated if the focus line is an EXCLUDED SUPPRESSED or NOT SELECTED shadow line Field names that are elements of an array and so have array suffices generate REXX compound variables where the field name is the variable name stem and each dimension of the array is represented within the variable name tail e g Field name AddrLine 6 generates variable AddrLine 6 Any occurrence of the minus character in a field column name as supported by COBOL is translated to _ underscore in the generated variable name thus avoiding REXX Bad Arithmetic Conversion errors e g Field name XX HRMN generates variable XX_HRMN Beware of using variables names within your REXX macro procedure that match field column names in your structured record data REXX variable values generated by EXTRACT FVALUE will replace any existing value already assigned to a variable name that matches a record field column name Because only variables for displayed field columns of the default record type are generated the SELECT command will influence the effect of EXTRACT FVALUE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 204 SET QUERY EXTRACT FVALUE EXTRACT Option EXTRACT Rexx variables EXTRACT FVALUE assigns variables as described above No compound variable with a stem of fvalue is assigned See Also EXTRACT FIELD EXTRACT FOCUS EX
433. tion within the first floating column of the scrolled display n_cols In a multi record view scroll right a specified number of floating columns The floating column of data that is n_cols to the right of the first floating column becomes the new first floating column of the scrolled display In single record view the visible data record that is n_cols records after the record currently in view gets displayed 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 169 Command Line Primary Commands SAVE Examples right half Scroll records of the default record type in a multi record view display area right by half a display area width minus the width of any columns flagged with HOLD See Also DOWN LEFT UP SAVE Syntax gt Save eer eeh Se ee ee O eee gt lt Description Save changes to the current data Parameters SAVE has no parameters See Also FILE SAVEAS SAVEAS Syntax gt gt SAVEAS gt lt Description Applicable to structured data edit only not DB2 table edit SAVEAS prompts the user for a new fileid to be assigned to the data in the focus SDE edit view and then saves the data to this file The fileid entered by the user may be an MVS DSN PDS PDSE library and member or HFS file path of a new file If the file already exists error ZZSD229E is returned A PDS PDSE library and member may only be specified i
434. tiple records displayed horizontally so that each record occupies a single line of the display Field Column Heading Lines By default a group of 5 field column heading lines are displayed within the window display area immediately above the first data record in view Unless records associated with a different record type are visible see Record Data Display below no further groups of column heading lines are displayed within the current display area view Record type AM Fixed S700 Offset 0 Data elements 395 AmDATE AmKELCur AmKELMax AmKLineN AmKLineL AmKEYC AmKEY AmCOUNTY 2 HS 6 7 HS 11 HIZ 14 AN 1 8 BN 11 12 BN 12711 BN 13 1 BN 14 1 AN 21 5 AN 26 7 AN 34 4 gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt gt lt gt Figure 24 SDE Multi Record Display Header Lines Header Line 1 Record Type Information For SDE display of file records this header identifies 1 The record type assigned to the records or record segments that follow 2 The record type format Fixed or Variable followed by the RTO Data Length in parentheses Note that for variable record types the valid range of RTO data lengths is displayed as a minimum and maximum RTO data length value 3 The offset into the record at which record type begins to format the data This may be a positive or negative value Offset n 4 The number of data elements field references within the record type definition This number includes
435. tly displayed data in the SDE view and all data displayed in all lines that follow until the print limit or End of Data is reached RECORD Print the current line only in single record view RECORD is default LIMIT n PAGES LINES NOLIMIT LIMIT synonym STOPAFT limits the amount of output printed whereas NOLIMIT or LIMIT 0 imposes no limit on the printed output the print operation ending when End of Data is reached The amount of print output may be limited by a number n of pages or lines represented by n PAGES or n LINES Note that a line limit includes blank lines that are printed following data displayed in the virtual SDE view Default is LIMIT 100 PAGES TRUNCATE NOTRUNCATE Applicable to FILE print of data in a multi record view only TRUNCATE indicates that record data that spans across more than one page is truncated so that only the first page of all records are printed scrolling downwards NOTRUNCATE indicates that record data that spans across more than one page is printed using one of the ACROSSTHENDOWN or DOWNTHENACROSS methods See below Default is NOTRUNCATE ACROSSTHENDOWN DOWNTHENACROSS Applicable to FILE print of data in a multi record view only when NOTRUNCATE is selected these parameters define the order in which pages are printed ACROSSTHENDOWN specifies that all pages containing data that span across more than one page are to be printed before scrolling down to print the lines of data displayed below
436. tructured Data Environment SDE 134 Command Line Primary Commands HEXDUMP CHAR MAP FMT UNMAP UNFMT VFMT ZOOM HIDE Syntax lt gt HIDE A A A A A gt lt Description Hide all shadow lines HIDE is equivalent to SET SHADOW OFF ALL RESET HIDE will redisplay all shadow lines Parameters HIDE has no parameters Syntax J gt gt gt gt gt IDentify Ho Ho EE gt lt n_lines EX ALL X qe o 22222222 SS 22 NX namel Re name2 Description IDENTIFY is used to remap records re assign record type RTO in the current SDE edit view For segmented record edit if any segment within a record is selected for remap by the IDENTIFY command then all segments within the record will be remapped By default IDENTIFY will not attempt to select and remap records that have not been altered since the file was loaded for edit See Record Type Assignment for description of the processing performed on each record record segment selected by IDENTIFY for remap ID fields are identified by a record type RTO definition containing USE WHEN criteria Values in these fields determine whether that RTO is suitable to be assigned to an individual record or record segment SELCOPY i SDE is sensitive to changes made to ID fields that have been identified explicity by field name or field reference number
437. ts one record of the current default record type with default values in all fields If no structure SDO or copybook has been applied to data records of variable length i e unformatted variable length records then the user is prompted to specify a record length for the inserted record This is because the SDE editor preserves record length when the records are saved See Changing Record Lengths Following execution of INSERT the DRECTYPE setting is updated to be the record type specified by the record_type parameter Also see the I n insert prefix area command Parameters record_type The record type of the record s to be inserted If record_type is not specified then the default record type is used field_col An individual field column within a list of field columns for which a corresponding field_value is to be inserted The field column may be identified by its reference number e g 1 or its name e g SeqNUM Specification of multiple field columns must be separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses If the field is a struct or a union then an error message is returned If the field is an array then an individual array element must be specified in parentheses as a subscript to the field e g 13 3 for the 3rd element of a single dimension array A subscript entry must exist for each dimension of the array e g RoomSize 6 2 4 an element within a three dimensional array If a list of field columns is not
438. ture formatting of the data on EDIT BROWSE FSU etc VIEW record_type VIEW Identifies one or more record types for which records will be displayed in the initial SDE view Records that are associated with other record types are not visible within the display but are displayed as shadow lines instead asterisk indicates all record types including the internal record type UnMapped or UnMappedSeg which is used to map data records or record segments that have no associated RTO in the SDO Records within the display may be later suppressed or made visible using the VIEW command Default is VIEW FORMAT FMT Specifies the format in which record data will be displayed in the initial SDE view SINGLE Single record format SNGL TABLE Table format Default CHARACTER Multi record view with all records or record segments mapped as single variable length character fields with field name UnMapped or UnMappedSeg No data conversion is performed HEX Same as CHARACTER with the addition that the data is also displayed in Hex below the character display Note that the Hex display occupies an additional 2 lines of data The data display format may be later altered using the FORMAT and or ZOOM commands FROM Records are to be displayed beginning at a specific location within the data set The first record at the specified location becomes record 1 within the SDE window view of the data set Records that occur before this locati
439. turn code greater than the MAXCOBOLRC value occurs the CREATE STRUCTURE operation fails with an error message The initial value of MAXCOBOLRC is set by the INI variable SDE MaxCOBOLRC or where this INI option has not been set defaults to 4 When SET MAXCOBOLRC is executed the SDE MaxCOBOLRC option is set or updated in the User INI file when the SELCOPY i session is closed This means that the maximum storage value will be set across SELCOPY i sessions SET MAXCOBOLRC takes effect at the Global level SET Value value Maximum acceptable Return Code from the COBOL compiler QUERY Response MAXCOBOLRC followed by a single numeric indicating the current MAXCOBOLRC value EXTRACT Rexx variables Imaxcobolrc 1 Fre value that is the current setting of the MAXCOBOLRC option MAXPL1RC SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax a eae MAXPLLre i Hp pS gt lt da SET i gt gt Query MAN DIr O O O gt lt gt gt EXTract MAXPLlirc gt lt Description This option controls the maximum acceptable PL 1 compiler return code for which an SDE structure will be successfully generated The MAXPL1RC value is only applicable to execution of the SDE CLI command CREATE STRUCTURE with parameter FROM PL1 copybook Where a PL 1 return code greater than the MAXPL1RC value occurs the CREATE STRUCTURE operation fails with an error message 201
440. uSNE FROM ao FO nio iba 14 EE H Kl GE 14 Filter Witormatted Record Datacenter Ae ran 15 Elter Fommatea Record Dalia iria locos elias N 18 SUMS ES A UE EE 17 Chandingnhe Record DISMAY manresa et 17 Displaying Records Of Speciic Record Wye Sita EE 18 Display Unformatted Record Dala iva casi idas 19 Displaying a Record Seqmentin Single Record VIEW asc ciss ciasvessaccesnsspcenat sesasncaesdacsisusnauas eebe dase iiaa aiii ica 19 Displaying Hexadecimal Representationot Record Date css cocaina so de criada 20 Excluding Records Homies DIS scale aa 21 Biel ln 21 Displaying the Record Header EE 22 Searching Data Record acuosa ca 23 Finding Record Data by Search Sig a e il 23 Locating Records USing a Search EXPIEsSSiOM reiini a pea eii 24 Creating a SUBSELO ECOS TOK ai cast 24 Editing HR 25 MYPINGINGW Record Dalaker sanean Arre ISRAELE asta 25 Find and NG OAC SDD SE eh os ose Fo oes tags o a dai 26 Je wll 26 Ree Hee EE 27 eeh EE 27 Copying Records eege tdi EE died e acid 28 A E 28 Witclo al MRE C NINES EE 28 SDE COMCG 1S o 30 Record Stucture Dennis rosana drid rodri sto aa 30 stru ctire Definition OD GCE ses iii Cie ais 30 ER TYPE Eeer 30 Record Type Object Data SMO EE 30 SHEET ooo treet 30 Record TY MeV ASSIM atada o ber ataco elsa 3i ele Data Fields scans e EATE A EER A 31 SDENMINDOW EE 32 M ltii Record VIR We coto on cat eser aae iE N ai di adecnvehayiud deahen e EE T 32 Field Column FeadiNg MGS scanner nner erates 32 EIERE AE s
441. uctured Data Environment SDE 146 Command Line Primary Commands LOCATE NX Locate only visible data records i e not EXCLUDED LOCATE does not search records that are NOTSELECTED or SUPPRESSED Formatted Column Locate Options Formatted column locate is applicable to formatted records only and will scroll the display to a nominated field within the default record only If the field is an array of repeating elements then a field subscript must be supplied in parentheses identifying the individual array field element to be located Array field co ordinates must be specified for each dimension in the array where each co ordinate separated is separated from the next by a comma e g 12 1 2 identifies an element of a 2 dimensional array field_name The name of a field in the default record field_name may be fully qualified partially qualified or unqualified see Field Value expression terms and may include a subscript array element reference e g Member 3 Regardless of whether the ABBREVIATION option has been set on the group name or field item designators that constitute field_name may be abbreviated starting with the first letter of the designator If field_name identifies more than one field then only the first occurrence of a field that matches field_name will be located field_ref A field reference number in the default record field_ref may include a subscript array element reference e g 22 3 FIRST Searc
442. uded in this calculation Attempting to scroll down beyond the last entry data record shadow line or field data line will make the End of Data record the first line of the scrolled display Parameters CURSOR CSR The data record shadow line or field data line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the first line of the scrolled display If the cursor is positioned on a header line the data record or field data line immediately following the header line becomes the first line in the display area If the cursor is positioned outside the display area or on the first line within the display area then DOWN PAGE is executed instead DATA Scroll down to display one page display window depth less one line of data The last data record shadow line or field data line in the current display area becomes the first line of the scrolled display HALF Scroll down half a page of data The data record shadow line or field data line that is half way down the page of data in the current display area becomes the first record of the scrolled display MAX Scroll down to display the last page of data Where more than one page of data exists the End of Data line becomes the last line of the scrolled display Otherwise the first line of data becomes the first line of the scrolled display Equivalent to the BOTTOM command PAGE Scroll down to display the next whole page of data The data record shadow line or field data line following the last
443. uld be no longer than 512 characters and may be enclosed in quotation marks or apostrophes REPLACE NOREP LACE Either overwrite or give an error if struct_name already exists Default is NOREPLACE TEMPORARY Create the SDO in storage without automatically saving it to an SDF data set A temporary SDO cannot be saved Where TEMPORARY is used struct_name is simply a named reference for the SDO and does not need to be a valid DSN As for standard SDOs when a temporary SDO is created it will remain in storage until it is dropped using the DROP or DDROP command or the CBLe Edit session is ended Default is to save the SDO to an SDF allocated to DSN struct_name CASE IGNORE CASE RESPECT Respect or ignore the case setting of any variable names used in the structure definition Default is CASE IGNORE XRef Definition XRef Definition syntax is an alternative more flexible method of generating a SELCOPY i structure SDO than using CopyBook Definition or Direct Definition syntax Features of XRef Definition which are not supported by these other methods are 1 Define segment record type structures for mapping the individual segments primary and secondary of segmented records 2 Define a record type based on any COBOL group or PL1 major minor structure within a COBOL PL1 copybook or ADATA file 3 Ina single CREATE STRUCTURE execution define multiple record types from a mixture of COBOL and or PL1 copybooks ADATA files
444. urns 1 if both terms are true ui om O Inclusive Or Returns 1 if either term is true Prefix 7 Prefix Logical Not Negates the term so that 0 is returned if the term is true 1 if the term is false Prefix NOT Parentheses and Operator Precedence An expression and individual terms within an expression are evaluated from left to right However the order in which operators are actioned depends on their precedence and the presence of parentheses An operator with a higher precedence will be actioned before operators with a lower precedence This process is repeated until the entire expression is evaluated e g In the following expression where operator2 has a higher precedence than operator1 terml operatorl term2 operator2 term3 The sub expression term2 operator2 term3 will be evaluated first When parentheses are encountered the entire sub expression between the parentheses is evaluated immediately when the term is required In this way parentheses may be used to force the action of an operator with a lower precedence before that with a higher precedence e g Logical Not has a higher precedence than logical And therefore 21850 evaluates to 0 however gt 1 amp 0 evaluates to 1 The order of operator precedence is as follows highest at the top Prefix operators Prefix 3 Prefix Prefix Arithmetic operators Add and Subtract to OS Relational operators Ba ee be eS tee ee ra gt ss Logical operator And amp Logical o
445. urns the position of the found string within the first data field that contains a match for the search string otherwise zero is returned If no structure is applied to the data this position will be a position in the unexpanded record If the search string is a numerical value which is found in a field of numerical data type then the returned value is 1 Examples FIND c c Needle 21 50 FIND hit last prefix 2 4 FIND 22 8 12 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 54 SDE Concepts FIND HASPOINT gt gt HASPOINT gt lt HASPOINT or BIFHASPOINT has no arguments It returns 1 if the focus record segment or DB2 table row has an active SET POINT label name and 0 otherwise Because HASPOINT has no arguments it may be expressed simply as HASPOINT HASPREFIXCMD gt gt HASPREFIXCMD gt lt HASPREFIXCMD or BIFHASPREFIXCMD has no arguments It returns 1 if the focus record segment or DB2 table row has a prefix command pending on the line and 0 otherwise Because HASPREFIXCMD has no arguments it may be expressed simply as HASPREFIXCMD IDREQUIRED gt gt IDREQUIRED gt lt IDREQUIRED or BIFIDREQUIRED has no arguments It returns 1 if an ID field identified b
446. urrent settings of the COMPILER option EXTRACT Rexx variables lcompiler 1 sd The current setting for the COBOL compiler name lcompiler 2 sd The current setting for the PL1 compiler name DESCRIPTION SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax AAA DESCription gt Jong description gt lt a SET 1 gt gt Query DESCELPETON A AAA A A Eeer gt lt gt gt EXTract DESCription 2 2 2 2 gt lt Description This option displays and assigns the long description that may be defined as part of an SDE structure SDO file See CREATE STRUCTURE 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 198 SET QUERY EXTRACT DESCRIPTION SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SET DESCRIPTION values take effect at the File level SET Value long_description Specifies a structure description text string which may be no longer than 512 characters Enclosing quotation marks or apostrophes may be specified and are stripped when saved in the structure QUERY Response The string DESCRIPTION followed by the complete structure definition text EXTRACT Rexx variables ldescription 1 rie complete structure definition text DRECTYPE SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax PA AZ DRECtype record_type nennen gt lt e SET i gt gt gt Query DRECEY DG 2322252229237 222227222 gt lt gt gt EXTract DRECtype
447. urrent setting of the EOLOUT value EXTRACT Rexx variables eotout 0 hi leolout 1 the current setting of the EOLOUT value 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 201 SET QUERY EXTRACT EOLOUT SET QUERY EXTRACT Option FIELD EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt EXTract FIELD gt lt Description For use in macros EXTRACT FIELD obtains the characteristics field reference number field data type field name and currently displayed field width of each field column header belonging to the default record type Field data type may be one of the following BINTEGER FIXED FLOATBIN FLOATHEX HEXADECIMAL Values are obtained for each displayed field column in the order in which they appear in the display Therefore the SELECT command will influence the EXTRACT FIELD values EXTRACT Rexx variables lsicla o0 Number of currently selected fields belonging to the default record type The blank delimitted field reference number nn field data type field name including any array element subscripts in parentheses and the current field width of the ith field in the default record type See Also QUERY EXTRACT COLWIDTH EXTRACT FOCUS EXTRACT FVALUE EXTRACT VALUE FILEID SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SDE SET QUERY and EXTRACT for option FILEID has the same effect in an SDE window view as that supported by a CBLe edit view See SET FILEID in
448. us record where the field UNIT PRICE has a value greater than 100 and either the field DELIVERY has a value less than 10 or field REGION is UK LOCATE LAST UNIT PRICE gt 100 DELIVERY lt 10 REGION UK Creating a Subset of Records for Display SDE expressions may be used as filters to display only a subset of records record segments or DB2 table rows that satisfy the expression criteria The WHERE command filters all records of the default record type so that only those records that match the supplied expression criteria are displayed Records that do not match the expression are excluded whereas records that are assigned a different record type are unaffected e g Display only those records assigned the same record type as the focus record and where the contents of field DISPATCH_DATE is less than the contents of field ORDER_DATE or either of the following are not true 1 Value of numeric field ORDER_VALUE is greater than or equal to 256 55 2 Value of numeric field ORDER_BALANCE is equal to 0 WHERE DISPATCH_DATE lt ORDER_DATE ORDER_VALUE gt 256 55 amp ORDER_BALANCE 0 The LESS command allows the user to filter the subset further so that only non excluded records of the default record type are excluded if they do not satisfy the supplied expression criteria Records that are already excluded or assigned a different record type are unaffected e g Exclude only records that a
449. used ADATA adata_fileid Identify a COBOL or PL1 ADATA output file adata_fileid which contains the group field definition major or minor structure whose name matches record_type specified by the NAME parameter SDO sfile fileid Identify a previously defined SELCOPY i SDE structure SDO file sfile_fileid which contains the record type whose name matches record_type specified by the NAME parameter STRUCTURE Record Definition Specifies the CREATE STRUCTURE Record Definition syntax used to define a record type of name record_type specified by the NAME parameter OFFSET lt gt n_bytes 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 97 Command Line Primary Commands CREATE STRUCTURE Specifies a positive or negative offset from the start of the record or segment at which the record type will start mapping data Use of an offset is documented in detail under SET QUERY EXTRACT option USEOFFSET CopyBook Definition Defines the one or more external copy book s or an ADATA compile output file to be used to generate the SDO Multiple copy books are concatenated to produce a single copy book and the then individual copy book record mappings RTOs identified as follow 1 Each 01 level entry will generate a new record type RTO mapping 2 For COBOL copy books only if no 01 level entry exists within the entire concatenation of copy books and the next available lowest level entry is redefined by all entries of the sa
450. value effectively beginning the record map before the start of the record data itself and so bypassing fields defined at the start of the RTO The offset value is stored as part of the RTO definition and becomes permanent when the structure is saved e g using the SAVESTRUCTURE command Therefore when SDE attempts to match an RTO within the specified structure with a particular data set record any offset value saved within the RTO is added to that RTO s determined maximum and minimum record length values Only if the record s length falls between these adjusted minimum and maximum values and any USE WHEN conditions have been satisfied will the RTO become associated with the data record Following execution of USEOFFSET all records that are currently in storage are re assessed and assigned an appropriate RTO accordingly A negative offset cannot be applied if it would result in removing from the display a field mapping which defines the length of another field defines the size of an array or is included as part of a USE WHEN expression Where an RTO containing a negative offset value is associated with a record data at the beginning of the record may only be partially mapped by a field definition within the RTO In this case the partially mapped data is omitted so that record data is displayed starting at the first complete field mapping e g RTO begins with a 4 byte field map but has an offset value of 2 therefore data is displayed usi
451. values for op are as follow 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 153 ONLY Command Line Primary Commands string VALID INVALID CHARS PREFIX SUFFIX If a character string compare is performed the EBCDIC values assigned to characters in the search and data strings determine the relationship equal to greater than or less than between the two strings The ONLY search string The search string may be any of the following 0 An unquoted numeric value The search string is treated as a numeric value when a numeric field is searched in a formatted record view In all other cases a numeric search string is treated as a character string 0 An unquoted character string containing no commas or blanks The search for the character string will be case insensitive so that uppercase and lowercase characters are treated as being the same 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks The search string may contain embedded commas and blanks and the character string will be case insensitive Two adjacent quotation mark characters that are embedded in a search string which is enclosed by the same quotation mark characters will be treated as a single occurrence of the character e g ONLY Jim O Brien Find the character string Jim O Brien 0 A character string enclosed in single or double quotation marks with the prefix C This is equivalent to specifying a quoted search str
452. ve integer and pad must be a character string of length 1 otherwise ZZSD386E is returned Examples In the following field name XLen exists in the focus record type and contains binary integer value 8 RIGHT Bello World 5 WORLD RIGHT c Hello World 15 i Hello World RIGHT c Hello World 13 Hello World RIGHT c Hello World XLen lo World 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 58 SDE Concepts RIGHT SAVEREQUIRED gt gt SAVEREQUIRED gt lt SAVEREQUIRED or BIFSAVEREQUIRED has no arguments It returns 1 if the focus record segment or DB2 table row has been changed or inserted and has not yet been saved and 0 otherwise Because SAVEREQUIRED has no arguments it may be expressed simply as SAVEREQUIRED SEGPOS gt gt SEGPOS start _ e ett gt lt t y length gt SEGPOS or BIFSEGPOS returns a character string which is a sub string of the current or previous segment within the current record starting at position start for length length SEGPOSY is primarily used for mapping segmented records where a record type definition RTO is assigned to segments based on field values in the current or previous segment If startis a negative value then it refers to a position that many characters from the end of in the previous segment If startis greater t
453. ver parameters are supported to scroll to the next and previous primary or unmapped UnmappedSeg segments Segmented Record Edit SELCOPY i SDE segmented record edit is supported for all file organisations other than VSAM KSDS Full Edit Auxiliary Edit and Update in Place Edit SDE edit techniques are all supported for segmented record edit Data Updates that affect Record Segment Mapping The RTO mapping assigned to a segment is determined by values in ID fields which may occur in the same segment or within the primary and or previous secondary segments Therefore any change to a segment may affect the RTO mapping identification criteria for that segment or any subsequent segment in the record SELCOPY i SDE is able to detect changes to ID fields which have been identified via a USE WHEN expression that includes only fields referenced explicity by name or field reference number Changes to ID field name Unmapped reference number 1 are detected only when record type formatting is disabled Where an ID field change is detected or where the length of the segment data is altered via CHANGE or RECLEN updates the ID flag is set on for the changed segment The ID flag represented by m in the record information flag display and ID gt in multi record view prefix area is an indication that the record to which this segment belongs may require a remap re assignment of segment RTOs based on new ID field values This flag may be ignored but may be
454. view level SET Value ON Shadow display is set ON for the types that follow OFF Shadow display is set OFF for the types that follow ALL The setting affects all types of shadow lines SET SHADOW OFF ALL is equivalent to HIDE SET SHADOW ON ALL is equivalent to RESET HIDE EXcluded The setting affects shadow lines for EXCLUDED records NOTselected The setting affects shadow lines for NOTSELECTED records SUPressed The setting affects shadow lines for SUPPRESSED records QUERY Response The current setting of the SHADOW options SHADOW EXCLUDED SHADOW NOTSELECTED and SHADOW SUPPRESSED each followed by ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables naano OS bieden The literal EXCLUDED shadow 2 The ON or OFF setting for EXCLUDED shadow lines snadow 3 Ire literal NOTSELECTED Jshadow 4 TheONorOFF setting for NOTSELECTED shadow lines shadow 5 Theliteral SUPPRESSED lshadow 6 sd hee ON or OFF setting for SUPPRESSED shadow lines 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 228 SET QUERY EXTRACT SHADOW SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SIZE QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax gt gt Query SIZE eegene gt lt gt gt EXTract SIZE gt lt Description Obtain the number of segments and records in the current file or DB2 table For DB2 table rows and non segmented records the number of segments and records are the same Size also returns
455. w of record type record type of structure struct_name For character data type fields a string compare is performed For numeric data type fields binary packed decimal floating point zoned etc then the following will occur 1 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are not specified the search string is interpreted as a signed numeric value and an arithmetic compare is performed against the field s formatted numeric value The length and data type of the numeric field and the number of digits in the search value are not significant e g CHANGE 67 23 Finds numeric fields with value 67 e g 0067 67 00 0 0670E 03 and character fields containing the string 67 e g 167 Baker Street and replaces with the value 23 using the appropriate data type If the search string is non numeric then numeric data type fields are not searched Therefore to bypass searching numeric data type fields explicitly set the search string to be character or hex using string C string or X string formats respectively e g CHANGE E7 23 CHANGE C 67 e123 CHANGE X F6F7 X F2F3 Finds only character fields containing the string 67 and replaces with character string 23 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 83 Command Line Primary Commands CHANGE 2 If pos1 pos2 positional parameters are specified the search string is interpreted as being a character string and so a string compare is performed against the unfor
456. with record types with a large number of fields required for display Using standard text editing techniques the user can manipulate the SELECT command to tailor the presence and order of fields within the SELECT command without having to re type the field names or references Once configured the command may be executed by positioning the cursor on the first line of the command and pressing lt F16 gt to invoke the ACTION facility The SDE window view behind the text edit view is updated SDESEL may be invoked as follows e Position the cursor on a record assigned the required record type and press lt PF14 gt e Position the cursor on a record assigned the required record type and press lt F16 gt to open the SDE Browse Edit Utilities Menu or DB2 Browse Edit Utilities Menu as appropriate then select option Select Exclude Order visible field names e g To re order the occurrence of fields in records of record type REC CUST and hold the first two fields execute the following Note that asterisk represents all remaining fields that have not already been specified on the SELECT command in the order in which they occur within the record SELECT FIRSTNAME LASTNAME HOLD EMAIL FROM REC CUST SELCOPY i NBJ CBLINST 7SSAM2 22 using NBJ CBLI SDOx m File Edit Actions Options Utilities Window SwapList Help wS wR x Command SELECT FIRSTNAME LASTNAME HOLD EMAIL FROM REGC EUST Scroll gt Csr Record type REC CUST Fixed 196 Off
457. within the SDE window view Options are selected by entering the required option number at the prompt or by pressing the appropriate PFKey Field Selection Select Exclude Order visible field names Executes SDESEL to generate a temporary CMX command centre file containing an SDE SELECT command that by default selects all columns for display in ascending order of field reference number The temporary CMX file is displayed in a CBLe text edit window which allows the user to employ standard text editing techniques to re order and or exclude the fields from the SELECT command and so select and re order the display of table row fields 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 68 SDE Menus and Popup Windows Field Selection The SELECT operation may be executed by placing the cursor on the first line of the SELECT command beginning with lt and pressing lt F16 lt Record Information Configure display of row length SOL Code and flags Opens the SDEUTRI sub window which prompts the user to select the record information to be displayed at the start of all rows in the current SDE window view The Display Record Information option must be selected before any of the selected record information fields will be displayed lt Enter gt actions the information display in the SDE edit view but keeps the SDEUTRI window open lt PF3 gt closes the window and returns focus to the Utilities Menu See the RECINFO SET QUERY EXTRACT o
458. ws the current segment making it the new current segment For non segmented record BROWSE EDIT every record is considered to be a primary base segment with no secondary segments Therefore using NEXT SEGMENT to scroll to secondary segments is invalid and will always return ZZSD441E error message In multi record view the view of the data within the SDE window is scrolled down to the next selected segment In single record view NEXT will display the next selected segment NEXT scrolls only to segments of a specific type primary secondary or unmapped and optionally segments assigned a specifically named record type RTO In contrast DOWN in multi record view and RIGHT in single record view scroll to records or record segments that follow regardless of segment type and assigned RTO NEXT SEGMENT the default for segmented record display restricts scrolling to only those secondary segments belonging to the current segmented record If the specified secondary segment cannot be found within the current record e g NEXT 6 for a record 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 150 Command Line Primary Commands NEXT containing only 5 secondary segments then the last segment to match the NEXT parameter criteria becomes the current segment and the following message is returned ZZSD441E Base record exhausted Final match nn of mm displayed Where nn is the last occurrence of the segment assigned record type record_t
459. xist for each dimension of the array e g RoomSize 6 2 4 a three dimensional array Specification of multiple field columns must either be enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas The field columns may be specified in any order however the data is always searched from the first column in the display to the last Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and columns ranges e g JobID 6 Tax_Reference 12 15 20 A search is only performed on field columns that are selected for display Therefore any field column specified on the EXCLUDE command that has not been selected for display will be ignored field_coll field_col2 namel name2 The first and last fields of a range of field columns to be searched within a formatted record display display field_col1 and field_col2 must be separated by colon and if Geld Col occurs after field_col2 in the data record then the values are swapped field_col1 and field_col2 have the same specifications as field_col Specification of multiple field column ranges must either be enclosed in parentheses and or separated by commas Field column search specifications may be a combination of individual field columns and field columns ranges e g FirstName LastName 2 Salary Bonus EmpNo 10 15 If field names are used enclosing parentheses are mandatory nn A label name identifying the first record of a range of data records to
460. xx variables llengeh 1 Jeng of the record occupying the focus line LEVEL SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax AS LEVEL ee A a aoe gt lt a SET bes OFF i gt gt Query LEVEL SSeS ase SSS SS Se aS gt lt gt gt EXTract LEVel gt lt Description For SDE EDIT and BROWSE window views in mapped single record view MAP this option controls display of the field s hierarchical level number as a prefix to the field name With LEVEL ON in effect the Field name value is indented for each successively higher level number The LEVEL option operates at the View level and its setting is saved if SAVEOPTIONS ON is in effect 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 209 SET QUERY EXTRACT LEVEL SET QUERY EXTRACT Option SET Value ON Level number display is set ON OFF Level number display is set OFF QUERY Response The current setting of the LEVEL option ON or OFF EXTRACT Rexx variables llever 1__ The current setting of the LEVEL option ON or OFF LOADWARNING SET QUERY EXTRACT Option Syntax A E LOADWarning DH Eege gt lt a SET gt gt Query gt LOADWarning naana gt lt gt gt EXTract LOADWarning gt lt Description This option specifies the threshold of number of data set records to be loaded into storage before the Load Warning pop
461. y USE WHEN criteria belonging to the focus record or segment has been changed and so flagged as possibly requiring execution of the IDENTIFY command ID gt to remap the record Otherwise 0 is returned Because IDREQUIRED has no arguments it may be expressed simply as IDREQUIRED INSERTED gt gt INSERTED gt lt INSERTED or BIFINSERTED has no arguments It returns 1 if the focus record segment or DB2 table row has been inserted in the current edit session and 0 otherwise Because INSERTED has no arguments it may be expressed simply as INSERTED KEYCHANGED gt gt KEYCHANGED gt lt KEYCHANGED or BIFKEYCHANGED has no arguments It applies to KSDS edit mode only and returns 1 if the focus record is flagged as having had a change to its key during the current edit session and 0 otherwise Because KEYCHANGED has no arguments it may be expressed simply as KEYCHANGED 2013 11 13 13 03 23 Structured Data Environment SDE 55 SDE Concepts KEYCHANGED LASTPOS gt gt LASTPOS stringl string2 ch AN ESA gt lt ER a BAD iS LASTPOS or BIFLASTPOS returns the position of the last occurrence of string1 in string2 starting the backwards search from position startin string2 A search is successful only if string exists entirely between posit
462. yntax gt gt 4 UNDOING ON gt lt I ORR t mtevels ssbesaaseassa as gt n kbytes gt gt gt Query UNDOING Sa Se SS SS Sa gt lt gt gt EXTract UNDOING gt lt Description UNDOING defines whether the UNDO and REDO facility is enabled for SDE the number of change levels that SDE will attempt to maintain and the maximum amount of storage SDE can allocate in order to store this information The third number following Alt on the status line displays the current number of stored change levels The change level count is incremented by any command for which the UNDO operation is supported i e any command that changes the data in the display area or the flag bits of a line Flag bits include a line s excluded and suppressed indicators Multiple changes made to a file as a result of a macro execution are considered to be one change level only SDE is informed of any changes to the 3270 terminal when an Attention ID AID is generated e g on hitting the Enter key or any of the PF Keys It is only then that changes to the file are committed to the copy of the file data in SDE storage and the change level is updated Therefore where changes have been made to text on multiple lines SDE has no indication as to the order in which the lines were changed and so assigns a change l
463. ype to be found following the current segment and mm is the requested number of matching segments to be scrolled n_seg If using the default parameter values to simply scroll to the next secondary segment this message will contain 0 of 1 where an attempt has been made to scroll to the first secondary segment following the last segment in the record Parameters SEGMENT BASE UNMAPPED Specifies the type of segment to be selected as the current segment SEGMENT indicates a secondary segment BASE indicates a primary base segment and UNMAPPED indicates an unformatted primary or secondary segment Note that unformatted primary segments i e records have record type Unmapped and unformatted secondary segments have record type UnmappedSeg Default is SEGMENT for segmented record browse edit and BASE otherwise n_seg Specifies the occurrence of a segment following the current segment that matches the optionally specified record_type Default is 1 record type Specifies the record type RTO of the segment that is to become the new current segment Only segments assigned this record type will be included in the count of segments to be scrolled asterisk indicates that segments may be of any record type record_type nominates a specific record type or indicates that segments are to be of the record type assigned to the current segment indicates that segments are to be of the record type not assig

Structured Data Environment (SDE)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents